Home

Copyright 2011 Robert Bosch Engineering and Business Solutions

Contents

1. Signals can be added deleted from the group by checking unchecking corresponding check box The signal offset can be changed in the Offset filled To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Signal group name will be checked for its uniqueness e The offset of each signal should be less than the Signal Group size To discard the changes click on Cancel button Deleting Signal Group To delete any signal group right click on the signal group item in the Element view and click on the pop up menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the coding Note Signal groups are depreciated from LDF2 x version Codings Creating Codings To create Codings right click on the Codings element in the element view and click on pop up menu New A dialog Box as Shown in below image will be displayed BUSMASTER LIN 187 r 2 Create Coding T Raw Value Description Minimum Maximum 1 General Properties e Name Name of the Coding should follow C identifier rules and should be unique in coding list 2 Logical values and physical values can be created using Add Buttons provided in the corresponding sections Editing Codings To edit existing Coding right click on the required coding item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Coding lt Coding Name gt dialo
2. Add Node Edit Node ha a Build Node H F Wy Bus Remove Node Node Configure P m BUSMASTER CAN 49 Add Node This is used to added cpp dll files to Node Simulation Add Node can be done by following ways Add Build All Remove All HQ 1 Right click the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Add 2 Click Add Node in the toolbar 3 Pressing Insert key in the keyboard Then Node Details dialog box appears as shown below Add unique Node name and add existing cpp dll or provide new File name to create new cpp file Node Details Node Name ecu File DAD emo ECU1 cpp Browse OK Cancel Edit Node This is used to edit the cpp file attached to a Node Editing can be done by following ways E we F Bus Me Configure Build Remove 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Edit 2 Select the Node and click Edit Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Enter key in the keyboard Then Function Editor window appears in which the required editing can be done Remove Node This is used remove selected node all the nodes in the Simulated system Removing a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Remove To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Al 2 Select the Node and click Remove Node in the toolbar To Remove All Nod
3. Log To Excel Converter Log to Excel Converter is used to convert the log file log in to an xls file The messages recorded by BUSMASTER using the logging feature can be neatly updated in a xls file using this conversion Once the input file is selected the output file is filled automatically in the same path of input file with input file s name with the extension of xls Either specific fields or all the fields can be used for conversion Only the selected fields data will be converted Select the Export button to convert the file 96 BUSMASTER CAN BUSMASTER Format Conversions CAPL_2_CPP Converter Log to Excel File Converter Other Converters Select Bus Type CAN X m Esport File e P evFlef L m Fields Available gt m Selected Other Converters This supports the following conversion e ASC to LOG Converts log files in ASC format to BUSMASTER format files log DBC to DBF Converts database files in DBC format to BUSMASTER format files dbf e DBF to DBC Converts BUSMASTER database files to DBC format files dbc e J1939 DBC to DBF Converts J1939 database files in DBC format to BUSMASTER format files dbf e LOG to ASC Converts BUSMASTER log files to ASC format files asc Select the convert button to convert the files CAPL_2_CPP Converter Log to Excel File Converter Other Converters BUSMASTER CAN 97 AS
4. ssesessesseseseseeserssessressrssresresseesresees 221 setvbuf specify file or stream buffering eesesesessesseeseeeessrsesessesersrsersreressesensesreseesee 221 siprintf write formatted output integer ONLY ee eeeeessceeeeceeceeseceeeeesseceseeceeeesaeeeneees 222 tmpfiles create a temporary Henares nenin A nieee EEn Rar e EEE E EEE 222 tmpnam tempnam name for a temporary file eceeeeeenceesececeeseceseeeceeeeeenseeeees 222 vprintf vfprintf vsprintf format argument list cece ceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeecnecaeeeeaeeeees 223 String and Memory Functions cece cecscessecsseeseceeceseceeeeseeeeeeeseaceseseaeeaeecaecaaecaessaeeasenaeenees 223 bemp Compare two memory ALAS ee ee eee eee ceeeeeeceeaeceeeeaeceecaeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeas 223 DCOPY COPY Memory LEGIONS se eeeceeseceesecserecsecesceceecessseeeeeeeseeesaeceseecaeceaeeceeeeeneeeeeees 224 bzero imitialize MEMOTY tO Zero eee cee cee eseeesceeeeeeceseeeeeeseeeaecaeecaecsaeaecasessenseeeeeees 224 index search for Character in String eeceececeececsseeeeceeseeeeseceececeaeceaeeceeeessaeeeeeesteeseaeees 224 memchr find character in Memorya ee E A EEEa 224 MEMCMP compare CWO MEMOTY ALCAS eee eee cs eeeeeceeeseseeeeseeceseeceaeeeeeesneeseaseeees 225 MEMCPY COPY Memory LEGIONS eee cece ceseeecsseeseceeceseceseeseeeeeeseeeaseseeeaesseesaecnaeeass 225 memmove move possibly overlapping MEMOTY eee eeeseeeeeceeecseceeeesecesee
5. A dialog box will pop up Select the message entry to be deleted from the message entry list Click on Remove button A delete confirmation message box will be displayed Select Yes to confirm deletion na bh WN Select OK button to confirm the modification of entries On subsequent reception transmission the message will be displayed in black color Display Buffer size amp Update Rate configuration To configure Append and overwrite buffer size follow the steps given below 1 Select CAN gt Message Window gt Configure 2 A dialog box will pop up Select the Buffer page BUSMASTER CAN 31 Configure Message Display CAN Fiter DB NDB Buffer Buffer Size Scroll view Size 5000 Entries Overnurite View Size 2000 Entries Display Update Display Update Rate 100 Set Default Cancel Help 3 The buffer size can be from 200 to 32500 display entries The display update rate can be from 50 to 20000 milliseconds 4 Set entries for Append buffer and overwrite buffer Set display update rate m Select OK button to confirm the modification of entries 6 Select Set Default button to set the default values Show Last Option This option can be used to set the focus of the list item to the latest item in Scroll mode In append mode latest message entries will be added at the end To make the latest entries visible always select CAN gt Message Window gt Show Last F Note
6. cccceceseecesseecceeceseceseeeeecaeeeeecaeesaecsacsaecnecsaeceecsaeseeeseeeeeeseseaseaeeees 50 Database Ed OE a ra aenea aE e E EE tosh tet a sueschaveerte tego EET an RE 54 Message Window e in atte tit e Be eh a E E Bess Hah 58 Signal Generations sre ocveeddvcsee ss ses vesehespescs gis sopsevs E E apee o oe Gh Ean EEEE OEE pave eee eaeeeb reps csees 63 Signal Watchs oi Fics atts eo tevin tel take eee Mest aires ee eA aa 66 Signal Graphies E E E R E E RO E E EEEE 68 Trace Window e le Raha eed heals Nel Gal la eds ah ENT ESE E O T E 77 LOSE AAULOM At OM sy ec se OEE des es EEA EEEE E EEEE EE A EEEE EEE REE 77 Test Setup Fie r e e Ha i ea ea tase 78 Test Setup Editor nsien e E E E E EEE A E E E EE SER 80 Test Suite EXCCUOKs scx ccstevcd so e Enri ees ree ceils EE ced E ada pay SSO bee EE S EEEREN 83 STEAN MSGi Structure n a a EE aae E rS 97 APE DSST a VEE E E E E SS 99 J1939 API Referenc nunenc cno eii a Sa dee bas Tass estes Sued ace a a E a Ea 103 JIO O OUE Se T a a re e e EE A EE EEES EOE 103 JL9O39 APE LIStiN S cein aan We a aie eR Re 105 COM Interface orara eee Secussevets RE E EREE eaeech shieuaieer E ERRORE 112 BUSMASTER COM interface eee ceceseeseceeeeseeeseeeeeeseecaeceaecaecsaeaecaeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 112 COM Interface API Ici tin E nooner irese ceeelsts epee ee un E EES OE SES EEPE pov Eesi on ENEE sees 114 Know About SUDESTOTs 12 csvescedescesessccevevseseeseescdestecsvecua vince tdeentveasccvsnevade cveugeseceedsug
7. Description unctrl is a macro which returns the printable representation of c as a string unctrllen is a macro which returns the length of the printable representation of c Returns unctrl returns a string of the printable representation of c unctrllen returns the length of the string which is the printable representation of c Variable Argument Lists The printf family of functions is defined to accept a variable number of arguments rather than a fixed argument list You can define your own functions with a variable argument list by using macro definitions from either stdarg h for compatibility with ANSI C or from varargs h for compatibility with a popular convention prior to ANSI C ANSI standard macros stdarg h In ANSI C a function has a variable number of arguments when its parameter list ends in an ellipsis The parameter list must also include at least one explicitly named argument that argument is used to initialize the variable list data structure ANSI C defines three macros va_start va_arg and va_end to operate on variable argument lists stdarg h also defines a special type to represent variable argument lists this type is called va_list Initialize variable argument list Synopsis include lt stdarg h gt void va_start va_list ap rightmost Description Use va_start to initialize the variable argument list ap so that va_arg can extract values from it rightmost is the name of
8. RegisterClientForRx To register Client for receiving messages Synopsis HRESULT RegisterClientForRx in USHORT usUniqueID out BSTR pEventName out BSTR pPIPEName Description This function registers a client for receiving messages Inputs inJusUniqueld The unquie Id the Client needs to provides while registering out pEventName The event which gets notified on reception of a message Client needs to wait on this event out pPIPEName The Buffer on which the Rx messages will be written for the client Usage in COM Client BSTR pEventName BSTR pPIPEName HRESULT hResult m_IApplication gt RegisterClientForRx 1 pEventName pPipeName If HRESULT is S_OK the Client is registered with a client id of 1 BUSMASTER CAN 117 Cause of failure NA UnRegisterClient To Unregister a Client Synopsis HRESULT UnRegisterClient in USHORT usUniquelID Description This function unregisters the registered Client Inputs usUniqueID Client Id Usage in COM Client HRESULT hResult m_IApplication gt UnRegisterClient 1 Unregisters Client with id 1 Cause of failure NA SendCANMSg To send a CAN message Synopsis HRESULT SendCANMSg CAN_MSGS sMsg Description This function will put the message on the CAN bus The message structure CAN_MSGS will be filled with ID length frame format and data Inputs CAN_MSGS CAN Message Structure Cause of failure Tool not connected GetAp
9. strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found SetTimerVal To set a new time value for a timer Synopsis UINT SetTimerVal char strTimerName UINT nTimeInterval Description This function will change the timer value The timer value and name of timer whose time value is to be changed has to be passed through the parameter strTimerName The second parameter will take time value If the timer is running in cyclic mode or next instance of timer is to be fired this function will return FALSE otherwise if will return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 nTimelInterval Time value of the timer Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found BOOL EnableDisableMsgTx To enable or disable message transmission from the node Synopsis BOOL EnableDisableMsgTx BOOL bEnable Description This function will enable or disable message transmission from a node User can pass parameter as TRUE to enable and FALSE to disable outgoing message from a node The node can receive the messages in both state Function will return TRUE if state change was successful otherwise it will return FALSE Inputs bEnable TRUE to Enable message transmission FALSE to disable Returns TRUE success FALSE if the handler is already in the specified state 110 BUSMASTER
10. ECU_LINSlavel_1 J ECU_LINSlavel_1 NormalTable C0 ECU_LINSlavel_1 06 ECU_LINSlavel_1 O00 ECU_LINSlavel_1 00 ECU_LINSlavel_1 00 ECU_LINSlavel_1 00 ECU_LINSlavel_1 J ECU_LINSIavel_1 UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional UnConditional C0 ECU_LINSIavel_1 C0 ECU_LINSIavelECU1 0 ECU_LINSlavel ECU 1 O00 ECU_LINSIavel ECU 1 0 ECU_LINSIavel ECU_1 TEFL GRRE REE FE 2 Configure Schedule Table window displays the Schedule Tables channel wise 3 Frames will be listed under respective Schedule table Displayed Columns e Table Frame Schedule Table name or Frame name ID hex Frame Identifier displayed in hex mode e Type Frame type or Command name e Delay Frame delay time in ms 4 To select the Schedule Table from the list mark the respective Schedule Table as checked By which all the frames part of Schedule Table will be selected 5 User can select de select the frame s by marking the frame as check un check 6 Master request s shall be sent only for the selected frame s at pre configured time interval as specified in the Schedule table 7 Schedule Tables and Frames can be selected de selected during runtime 8 The check status of Schedule Table and the frames will be stored in the configuration file and retained on importing configuration
11. Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is already OFF WriteToLogFile To send string to log file Synopsis UINT WriteToLogFile char msg Description This function will output text passed as parameter msg to all log files The return value of this function will be Oorl Inputs msg Pointer to characterarray Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is OFF or user has passed a NULL pointer Trace To send string to Trace window Synopsis WIN apaes Claes TOEN s55 Description This function will format the passed parameters based on format specified and will show the formatted text inTRACE window The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 BUSMASTER CAN 107 Inputs msg Pointer to character array Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case user has passed a NULL pointer If the TRACE window is visible it will be made visible ResetController To reset CAN controller Synopsis void ResetController BOOL bResetType Description This function will reset the controller If the parameter passed is TRUE a hardware reset will be given to controller In case of hardware reset the buffer of controller w
12. The functionalities provided by the Test Setup editor are grouped under the Test setup editor Menu This Menu will be shown in BUSMASTER when the editor is in active mode or user clicked on the Editor File The File menu contains all most all the functionalities provided by the editor It contains the following sub menus e File gt New Use to create a new test setup file Ctrl N is the keyboard short cut e File gt Open Use to Open an existing test setup file Ctrl O is the keyboard short cut e File gt Close Closes the current file e File gt Save Saves the current changes to the file Ctrl S is the keyboard short cut e File gt SaveAs Saves the current data into another file e File gt Validate Validates the current file according to the table under Test Setup File e File gt Exit Closes the editor Edit The Edit menu will provide the operations such as cut copy and paste e Edit gt Copy Any item on the right pane can be copied using this menu Ctrl C is the keyboard short cut e Edit gt Cut Using this menu any item on the right pane can be deleted by copying it Ctrl X is the keyboard short cut e Edit gt Paste The copied item can be inserted under any parent item by selecting the parent item and this menu For example the copied send_message can be inserted in any send node of any test case Display The Display menu is used to customize the GUI Help The Help menu provide t
13. isupper uppercase character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt aioe al Sioyojoreare line C F Description isupper is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for upper case letters A Z and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isupper Returns isupper returns non zero if c is a upper case letter A Z isxdigit hexadecimal digit predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt Hime aleixglakeslic amie Description isxdigit is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for hexadecimal digits and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isxdigit Returns isxdigit returns non zero if c is a hexadecimal digit 0 9 a f or A F toascii force integers to ASCII range Synopsis include lt ctype h gt ine coaseii line E Description toascii is a macro which coerces integers to the ASCII range 0 127 by zeroing any higher order bits You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining this macro using undef toascii Returns toascii returns integers be
14. rte Section Oe RS Configured Filters Selected Filters YT Tx Mag Filter T LIN gt Display_Filter Add Y LIN gt ATA Filter Add All Delete Delete All Message Coloring User can configure the color with which the message will be displayed and associate a textual description to message By default all messages are displayed in black color and the message ID itself as the associated text For the database message user can only edit the color BUSMASTER LIN 151 ECU_LINSlave Slave4_LINSlav Slave 1_LINSlav Slave1_LINSlav Slave _LINSlav Slave3_LINSlav Edit MasterReg SlaveResp ma 3 5 12 15 18 26 3c 3D 152 BUSMASTER LIN __ Ad Edit Remove Adding message attribute To configure a message display option please follow the steps given below 1 eei a Select LIN gt Message Window gt Configure 2 Dialog box Configure Message Display as in above figure will be displayed 3 4 One more dialog box Add Message Display Attributes as shown below will pop up Click on Add button Message Text fingriion Message ID Ox jl Message Color B ca Enter the message ID and Message text Click on the colored button to select a color This click pops up a color palette as shown above Select a suitable color Select OK button to confirm BUSMASTER LIN 153 Subsequent reception transmission of the message that has been configured
15. 238 BUSMASTER C Library Functions atan atanf arc tangent Synopsis include lt math h gt double atan double x ifk ene eheehaic acll ere x lt p Description atan computes the inverse tangent arc tangent of the input value atanf is identical to atan save that it operates on floats Returns atan and atanf return the calculated value atan2 atan2f arc tangent of y x Synopsis include lt math h gt double atan2 double y double x float atan2f float y float x Description atan2 computes the inverse tangent arc tangent of y x atan2 produces the correct result even for angles near that is when x is near 0 atan2f is identical to atan2 save that it takes and returns float Returns atan2 and atan2f return a value in radians If both x and y are 0 0 atan2 causes a DOMAIN error You can modify error handling for these functions using matherr atanh atanhf inverse hyperbolic tangent Synopsis include lt math h gt double atanh double x IOS eiceta arlloeic KF Description atanh calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of x atanhf is identical other than taking and returning float values Returns atanh and atanhf return the calculated value If is greater than 1 the global errno is set to EDOM and the result is a NaN A DOMAIN error is reported If is 1 the global errno is set to EDOM and the result is infinity with the same sign as x A SING error is reported You
16. Buffer Size Scroll View Size Entries Overwrite View Size 2000 Entries 3 The buffer size can be from 200 to 32500 display entries The display update rate can be from 50 to 20000 milliseconds 4 Set entries for Append buffer and overwrite buffer Set display update rate ya Select OK button to confirm the modification of entries 6 Select Set Default button to set the default values Show Last Option This option can be used to set the focus of the list item to the latest item in Scroll mode In append mode latest message entries will be added at the end To make the latest entries visible always select LIN gt Message Window gt Show Last Note e In overwrite mode this option will be disabled to avoid rolling of selection e Selection will be update only during display update LIN Node Simulation Node Simulation Configuration Simulated systems can be configured under the lt Protocol gt bus by following the steps given below Select lt Protocol gt gt Node Simulation gt Configure menu option This will display the window as shown is figure below BUSMASTER LIN 155 Add Node Edit Node Build Node t J al H D M y Bus DN f Mg tonion Remove Node E Node Add Node This is used to added cpp dll files to Node Simulation Add Node can be done by following ways Add Build All Remove All 1 Right click the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and
17. Description Use va_end to declare that your program will not use the variable argument list ap any further Returns va_end does not return a result Traditional macros varargs h If your C compiler predates ANSI C you may still be able to use variable argument lists using the macros from the varargs h header file These macros resemble their ANSI counterparts but have important differences in usage In particular since traditional C has no declaration mechanism for variable argument lists two additional macros are provided simply for the purpose of defining functions with variable argument lists As with stdarg h the type va_list is used to hold a data structure representing a variable argument list Declare variable arguments Synopsis include lt varargs h gt RUNGON Vama ES ae Description To use the varargs h version of variable argument lists you must declare your function with a call to the macro va_alist as its argument list and use va_dcl as the declaration Do not use a semicolon after va_dcl Returns These macros cannot be used in a context where a return is syntactically possible BUSMASTER C Library Functions 251 Initialize variable argument list Synopsis include lt varargs h gt va_list ap va_start ap Description With the varargs h macros use va_start to initialize a data structure ap to permit manipulating a variable argument list ap must have the type va_alist Returns
18. It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isalpha BUSMASTER C Library Functions 203 Returns isalpha returns non zero if c is a letter A Z or a z isascii ASCII character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt inte ASAs ume E y Description isascii is a macro which returns non zero when c is an ASCII character and 0 otherwise It is defined for all integer values You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isascii Returns isascii returns non zero if the low order byte of c is in the range 0 to 127 0x00 0x7F iscntrl control character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt Lime saksyeimeiel slime E F Description iscntrl is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for control characters and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef iscntrl Returns iscntrl returns non zero if c is a delete character or ordinary control character Ox7F or 0x00 0x1F isdigit decimal digit predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt iye Lecho atinic p Description isdigit is a macro which
19. Remove All 1 Right click the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Add 2 Click Add Node in the toolbar 3 Pressing Insert key in the keyboard Then Node Details dialog box appears as shown below Add unique Node name and add existing cpp dll or provide new File name to create new cpp file 38 BUSMASTER CAN Node Details Node Name fEcut File D Demo ECUT cpp Browse OK Cancel Edit Node This is used to edit the cpp file attached to a Node Editing can be done by following ways a m i F Bus FO Configure Build Remove 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Edit 2 Select the Node and click Edit Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Enter key in the keyboard Then Function Editor window appears in which the required editing can be done Remove Node This is used remove selected node all the nodes in the Simulated system Removing a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Remove To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Al 2 Select the Node and click Remove Node in the toolbar To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Delete key in the keyboard To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and press Delete key Configure Node This is used change
20. Signals 4 m Diagnostic Signals Removing Diagnostic Support MasterReqBO fil MasterReqB1 M MasterReqB2 MasterReqB3 M MasterReqB4 fil MasterReqB5 M MasterReqB6 fil MasterReqB7 fil SlaveRespBO fil SlaveRespB1 mM SlaveRespB2 fil SlaveRespB3 fil SlaveRespB4 fl SlaveRespB5 fil SlaveRespB6 fil SlaveRespB7 Mm Signal Groups FE Codings gt T Schedule Tables Q Node Compositions To remove diagnostic support right click on Diagnostic Frames in the Element view and click on Remove Diagnostic Support which removes diagnostic frames and diagnostic signals Signals Creating Signals To create Signals right click on the Signals element in the element view and click on pop up menu New A dialog Box as Shown in below image will be displayed 184 BUSMASTER LIN r Create Signal X General Properties Name Length bits Te itae ox secos COO Tx Rx Relations E Motori Select Motor2 am Publisher Subcribers SeatECU F qwe 1 General Properties e Name Name of the Signal should follow C identifier rules and should be unique in signal list e Length Length of the Signals in bits The value always will be displayed as Decimal mode e Type Signal type can be either scalar or Byte array e Initial Value This will be the initial value of the signal e Coding Coding for the signal can be selected from the drop down Select Codi
21. Synopsis include lt math h gt double fabs double x close raigs r Losie xF Description fabs and fabsf calculate the absolute value magnitude of the argument x by direct manipulation of the bit representation of x Returns The calculated value is returned No errors are detected floor floorf ceil ceilf floor and ceiling Synopsis include lt math h gt double floor double x icll etc illo sese Gloew x double ceil double x iflogic Sallie loar xX Description floor and floorf find the nearest integer less than or equal to x ceil and ceilf find the nearest integer greater than or equal to x Returns floor and ceil return the integer result as a double floorf and ceilf return the integer result as a float fmod fmodf floating point remainder modulo Synopsis include lt math h gt double fmod double x double y AKO cite Clas Grose xy eel Oct emnys Description The fmod and fmodf functions compute the floating point remainder of x y x modulo y Returns The fmod function returns the value for the largest integer i such that if y is nonzero the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y fmod x 0 returns NaN and sets errno to EDOM You can modify error treatment for these functions using matherr frexp frexpf split floating point number Synopsis include lt math h gt double frexp double val int exp float frexpf f
22. button Node Composition Creating Node Compositions To create Node Configuration right click on the Node Composition element in the element view and click on popup menu New Create Node Configuration dialog is as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 191 Node Name Logical Nodes 1 General Properties e Name Name of the Node Configuration should follow C identifier rules and should be unique 2 Adding Node Composition e To Add Node Composition click on Add button which adds a new row in Node list e Node Name drop down will be populated with the list of Nodes available e Select the Node from the Node Name drop down e Specify the logical nodes in the Logical Nodes field Multiple Logical Nodes can be specified separating with comma 3 Deleting Node Composition Item Select the Node Composition Item in the list and click on Delete button Editing Node Compositions To edit existing Node Configuration right click on the Node Composition in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Node Configuration dialog is displayed as shown below 192 BUSMASTER LIN hoe Notte Deleting Node Composition To delete Node Configuration right click on the Node Configuration in the Element view and click on the popup menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the Node Configuration To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The
23. gt if Signals yo gt i Diagnostic Signals ix Signal Groups LDF Language Version 2 100000 Schedule Tables gt B Node Compositions f Element View Additional View Warnings Window Severity Description Action Taken 1 Warning Valid LDF File should Contain Atleast one Warnings Window j Menu bar e File Menu 1 File gt New gt LIN 1 3 Creates LIN 1 3 LDF file Default elements will get created 2 File gt New gt LIN 2 0 Creates LIN 2 0 LDF file Default elements will get created 3 File gt New gt LIN 2 1 Creates LIN 2 1 LDF file Default elements will get created 4 File gt Open To Open an existing LDF file of versions 1 3 2 0 and 2 1 5 File gt Save To Save the changes to the current loaded LDF file 6 File gt Save As To Save changes to anew LDF file 7 File gt Recent Files Displays 5 recently viewed LDF files Click on the file to load the LDF file e View Menu 1 View gt Hex Select DeSelect Hex to toggle between numeric modes Hex Dec 2 View gt Preview LDF File Opens the current LDF file in LDF file editor 3 View gt Warnings Window Populates the Warning Window which displays the list of warnings with description and action taken if any Toolbar 170 BUSMASTER LIN Toolbar can be used for creating loading saving LDF files and also to set the numeric mode hex dec o fel J e Element View Element view displ
24. list however after every group of 32 functions is enrolled atexit will call malloc to get space for the next part of the list The initial list of 32 functions is statically allocated so you can always count on at least that many slots available Returns atexit returns 0 if it succeeds in enrolling your function 1 if it fails possible only if no space was available for malloc to extend the list of functions atof atoff string to double or float Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt double atof const char s FIO ACO COMMS Cligie S P 194 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description atof converts the initial portion of a string to a double atoff converts the initial portion of a string to a float The functions parse the character string s locating a substring which can be converted to a floating point value The substring must match the format l digits digits elE I digits The substring converted is the longest initial fragment of s that has the expected format beginning with the first non whitespace character The substring is empty if str is empty consists entirely of whitespace or if the first non whitespace character is something other than or a digit atof s is implemented as strtod s NULL atoff s is implemented as strtodf s NULL Returns atof returns the converted substring value if any as a double or 0 0 if no conversion could be performed If the correct value is out o
25. more then one messages A delete confirmation message will be popped up before deletion On selection of Yes to this confirmation the selected messages will be deleted Delete All This is to clear the message list This will show a confirmation message Selecting Yes to this confirmation will clear all messages in the message block Configuring Message Details A message details shall be configured in different ways Message details like ID Name shall be directly typed in the Message Name ID combo box Database message names shall be either directly typed or selected from the drop down list This list will be populated with the imported database messages Similarly message ID shall be directed entered here If corresponding database message found this will be replaced with the message name Message length shall be entered or modified using the field DLC The allowed DLC vales are 1 8 If a database message is entered or selected from the drop down list the length of that message will be automatically taken from the database and will be filled in this field Data bytes values shall be directly entered using Data Bytes fields The message data shall be meaningfully entered using signal values of the message Only for a database message signal values shall be given For non database messages the value can be entered only through data bytes fields Message Type can be configured using Standard Extended radio button and RTR check box Message will
26. plus space zero 0 and sharp They can appear in any combination e The result of the conversion is left justified and the right is padded with blanks If you do not use this flag the result is right justified and padded on the left 216 BUSMASTER C Library Functions e The result of a signed conversion as determined by type will always begin with a plus or minus sign If you do not use this flag positive values do not begin with a plus sign e space If the first character of a signed conversion specification is not a sign or if a signed conversion results in no characters the result will begin with a space If the space flag and the plus flag both appear the space flag is ignored e OlTIf the type character is d i 0 u x X e E f g or G leading zeroes are used to pad the field width following any indication of sign or base no spaces are used for padding If the zero 0 and minus flags both appear the zero 0 flag will be ignored For d i o u x and X conversions if a precision prec is specified the zero 0 flag is ignored Note that 0 is interpreted as a flag not as the beginning of a field width e The result is to be converted to an alternative form according to the next character e 0 increases precision to force the first digit of the result to be a zero e xa non zero result will have a Ox prefix e Xanon zero result will have a 0X prefix e e Eorf The resul
27. va_start does not return a result Extract a value from argument list Synopsis include lt varargs h gt type va_arg va_list ap type Description va_arg returns the next unprocessed value from a variable argument list ap which you must previously create with va_start Specify the type for the value as the second parameter to the macro type Returns va_arg returns the next argument an object of type type Abandon a variable argument list Synopsis include lt varargs h gt va_end va_list ap Description Use va_end to declare that your program will not use the variable argument list ap any further Returns va_end does not return a result Copyright C Library functions help is taken from GCC help content and it is from The Cygnus C Support Library Copyright c 1991 by AT amp T Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IN PARTICULAR NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT amp T MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE 252 BUSMASTER Hot Keys Hot Keys Hot keys are availa
28. 1 indicate a success condition Connect To connect CAN controller to CAN bus Synopsis UINT Connect DWORD dwClientId 102 BUSMASTER CAN Description This function will connect the tool to CAN bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already connected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition StartTimer To start a timer in specific mode Synopsis UINT StartTimer char strTimerName UINT nTimerMode Description This function will start timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName in monoshot or cyclic mode The function takes first parameter as timer name and second as mode monoshot or cyclic If the named timer is already running or timer name is not matched the function will return FALSE Otherwise function be return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 nTimerMode Mode of the timer 1 Start in Cyclic mode 0 Start in Monoshot mode Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found StopTimer To stop a running timer Synopsis UINT StopTimer char strTimerName Description This function will stop timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName If the named timer is not running or timer name is not matched the function will retu
29. 20 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 GearLock o 0 000000 Diagnostics o 0 000000 AccelerationForce o 0 000000 N CarSpeed o 0 000000 mph E 15 24 59 6253 Rx 0016 0 1 Data static BrakeControl 21 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 ABSWarningLamp o 0 000000 ASRMode o 0 000000 BrakePressure o 0 000000 kPa ESPWarningLamp o 0 000000 BrakeWarningLamp o 0 000000 E 15 24 59 6256 Rx 0025 0 1 Data static EngineData 21 A 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 EngForce o 0 000000 N EngPower o 0 000000 kW PetrolLevel o 0 000000 1 IdleRunning o 0 000000 EngSpeed o 0 000000 rpm EngTemp o 50 000000 gi E 15 24 59 6214 Rx 0051 0 2 Data static BackLightInfo 20 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 BrakeLight o 0 000000 BackUpLight o 0 000000 15 24 59 6252 Rx 0013 Null static 21 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 15 24 59 6264 Rx 0051 Null static 21 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 The Following section will explain the Columns Displayed in Message window with explanation Table 1 Column Explanation Time This Will display the time at which message is received Sent on FlexRay BUS The time mode can be changed to Absolute System Relative Mode using FlexRay gt Message Window gt Time Mode menu Tx Rx This Menu will display weather the message is received or sent from BUSMASTER Tx Represents the message is sent From BUSMASTER Rx Represent Message is received in BUSMASTER Frame Id This Column gives the information about the Scheduling of Message The inform
30. 3_BSI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 BE 17 13 08 4859 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 999 900 000 000 000 0001 let f 17 13 08 4849 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 tooo om 17 13 08 5859 1375 ACQ NEW 1 000 l 17 13 08 5849 1375 ACO NEW 1 000 17 13 08 6859 Tx 1 0114 ROQD_CMM 5 000 000 000 000 000 pa 17 13 08 6849 Rx 2 s 0114 ROD_CHM 000 000 000 000 000 17 13 08 7859 Tx 1 s 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 3 17 13 08 7849 Rx 2 s 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 03 17 13 08 8859 Tx 1 s 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 000 000 17 13 08 8849 Rz 2 s 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 000 000 ha 17 13 08 9859 Tx 1 s 1375 ACQ NEW 1 000 17 13 08 9849 Rx 2 s 1375 ACQ NEW 1 ooo lt 17 13 09 0859 Tx 1 s 0114 RQD_CHM 5 000 000 000 000 000 Wf 17 13 09 0849 Rx 2 s 0114 ROD_CMM 5 000 000 000 000 000 17 13 09 21859 Tx 1 s 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 at 17 13 09 1849 Rz 2 s 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 Me 17 13 09 2859 Tx 1 s 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 000 000 a gt 17 13 09 2849 Rx 2 s 0168 CFD_BSI 5 000 000 000 000 000 F 12 13 09 3859 Tx 1 s 1375 cQ_ NEW 1 000 17 13 09 3849 Rz 2 s 1375 ACQ NEW 1 ooo meg 17 13 09 4859 Tx 1 S 0114 ROQD_CMM 5 000 000 000 000 000 a 17 13 09 4849 Rx 2 s 0114 ROD_CHM 5 000 000 000 000 000 5 m Re Config Fil CAN Recording J1939 Recording 2 Channel s Kvaser CAN 500 000 Kbps Allov 7 60 BUSMASTER CAN Change Time Display This is a tool bar butt
31. 5 Industry Vehical Function ECU Manufacturer Identity Address System Reserved Function sii aiii Ed _ m ka uii J1939 NAME Fields 2 ECU Address 8 bit ECU address defines the source or destination for messages Address claiming procedure The address claim feature considers two possible scenarios 1 Sending an address claimed message ACL At the network startup an ECU will cliam an address and send Address Claimed message All ECUs receiving the address claim will record and verify the newly claimed address with their internal address table In case of an address conflict the ECU with the lowest NAME will succeed 2 Request for Address Claimed message An ECU Requests ACL message from all nodes in the network and claims available address 88 BUSMASTER CAN BUSMASTER J1939 Initialisation Prerequisite of employing the J1939 functionalities is getting hold of J1939 interface and this is the sole purpose of this function This will query for the available J1939 interface Once this is available the associated menu item and button will be disabled The query operation involves DIL J1939 interface initialisation a J1939 client registration and finally the J1939 logger interface query and initialisation Outcome of the query operation can be seen on the Trace window Configure Logging This invokes the logging configuration dialog box whose layout and the configuration procedure is exactly same as that o
32. A test case must have a validation routine Test case shall be dropped Warning Error The test case shall be dropped Error The test case shall be dropped So As explained above the test setup file has to write in XML format So user has to know the syntax of XML and the test set up file But To simplify this process BUSMASTER provides an editor called Test Setup Editor Test Setup Editor Test setup Editor is useful to create and edit a test setup file Here is the list of different services rendered by the editor BUSMASTER CAN 81 Features provided by test setup editor e Create a new test setup file e Save a test setup file e Load an existing test setup file e Create edit and update a test case e Define a test case by adding its sub nodes like send wait verify and replay e Reposition a test case e Delete a test case e Create edit and update a new test case node e Adding deleting a send message to send node e Initialization of a send message node e Adding and deleting a verify message node to verify node e Create a validation procedure for each signal in the verify message e Create a wait node e Repositioning a test case sub node e Copy cut paste operation on Test case and its sub nodes e Validate the test setup file Invoking Test setup editor To open the test setup editor In BUSMASTER click on menu Item CAN gt Test Automation gt Editor The first look of Automation Editor w
33. Automation scenario is presented below 78 BUSMASTER CAN lt lt XML File gt gt Test Setup File BUSMASTER pee Bus Interface Test Automation in BUSMASTER can be divided into three Modules Test Setup File Test Setup Editor Test Executor Test Setup File Description A test setup is a XML file which contains the instruction set of the various test cases The contents test setup file can be divided as follows Test setup lt Header gt lt Test case list gt Test case list test case 1 test case 2 test case N where N gt 1 Test case test step 1 test step 2 test step N N gt 2 Test step transmission wait replay verification operation Explanation Test Setup Test setup file contains two sections Header and Test Case List Header Header contains the basic information regarding to the test setup file like versions report file path database file path ECU name tester information etc User has to provide the information Some values are optional and some are compulsory Database path is a compulsory value Check the table below for the required and optional fields Test Case List Test Case List contains a collection of test cases User has to create the test cases Test case A test case is the collection of test steps such as send wait replay verify Send This is a collection of send_messages This test step instructs to send the specified messages Send
34. BLF To LOG Converter Converts BLF bIf file into BUSMASTER log file log Usage To use the Converters select File gt Format Converters As Shown in the below figure TT eusva File CAN 31939 View Window Help New Load ol Save Recent Configurations gt JL FF FF OOO Channel Msg ID Message D Data Byte Format Converters Properties Exit p e A window is displayed with 3 tabs in it which caters to various conversions CAPL to CPP Conversion CAPL to CPP Converter is used to convert the CAPL file can to CPP cpp files to be used with BUSMASTER Once the CAPL file is selected for conversion the entry for output file name will be automatically filled with input file name but with the extension of cpp Any database associated with the CAPL file has to be added using the Add DBC file option The DBC file will be converted to DBF file and will be used for conversion The converted DBF file will saved in the same path by default Select the convert button to convert the file BUSMASTER CAN 95 BUSMASTER Format Conversions CAPL_2_CPP Converter Log to Excel File Converter Other Converters Source CAPL can File Browse BUSMASTER cpp File Browse m Add C4Noe Database Files Used in CAPL File Save the converted Database DBC File Path Add DBC File Delete DBC File Change DBF Path
35. CAN 45 g M el We Enabling Disabling Logging Note e Logging will fail if the log file is not present in the specified location e Logging status is stored in configuration file and logging will be started automatically during application startup if it is enabled and saved in the configuration file Replay User can replay messages from a BUSMASTER log file User can choose multiple log files for replay in different modes Please find more details to configure replay in section Log and Replay The log file content can be filtered to choose interested messages alone To add filters select Filter option from Replay Configuration Window Before starting replay active filters will be applied on log file and resulting messages will be taken for replay Replaying a log file shall be done in two methods That is e Interactive and e Non Interactive In interactive replay mode the log file content will be display as list of messages and user can navigate this list and can transmit interested messages User can step through replay messages can skip messages can start message transmission continuously and can insert break points In non interactive mode replay will start during tool connect and will be stopped during tool disconnect In case of cyclic mode the replay will continue till tool disconnect and in monoshot or once all messages will be transmitted only once and replay will start Based on replay mode user can configur
36. DLL is generated it can be loaded and used dynamically There are many others features that can be used without any programming The key such features are e Display of messages e Message information and Interpretation e Filters e Logging e Replaying logged messages e Network statistics e Different time stamping e Interactive transmission of message blocks e Signal watch etc To facilitate the user programming a comprehensive set of APIs and event handlers are provided Key Features e Using USB port multiple USB CAN hardware can be connected and monitored with multiple instances of BUSMASTER application e It operates in Active mode In active mode the tool influences the bus In passive mode the tool does not have any influence on the bus e It supports CAN 2 0A and 2 0B protocol e The messages can be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format e There are three different time stampings namely system time relative time and absolute time mode The absolute time is the time from when tool is connected to CAN bus The relative time is time between two consecutive messages if the display is configured in scroll mode In overwrite mode it is the time difference between two messages of same ID Time stamping is done at CAN driver level The system time is PCs real time value e User can log messages to a file and replay the logged file The time stamping mode can be also be configured in System Relative and Absolute mode d
37. Deleting Slave To delete Slave node right click on the Slave node in the Element View and select pop up menu Delete Confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the Node On deleting node all the frames and signals published by the node will also be deleted To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Slave name will be checked for its uniqueness e On delete checks if at least one Slave node is available If not tool will give error Unconditional Frame Creating Unconditional Frames To create Unconditional frame right click on the Unconditional Frame element in the element view and click on popup menu New Create Unconditional Frame dialog is shown as below 176 BUSMASTER LIN 4 Y Byte s Signal Map Signal Name Start Bit Subscriber s Length bits Init Value 1 General Properties e Name Name of the frame should follow C identifier rules and should be unique ID Identifier of the frame 0 59 e Length Length of the frame 1 8 in bytes e Dynamic Frame If dynamic frame the Dynamic Frame check box should be checked More than one Unconditional frame can exist with the same Id and it is introduced from LDF version 2 0 2 Publisher and Subscribers e Frame publisher can be selected from the Publisher drop down which lists Master and Slave nodes e Subscribers list is read
38. Door_left_Signal2 i Door_Right_Signali i Door _Right_Signal2 gt if Diagnostic Signals iX Signal Groups Sat Codings 4 Schedule Tables Frame Name 1 Door_left_Open 2 Door_Right_Open 3 AssignNAD 4 SlaveResp 5 Assign Frame Ra 6 SlaveResp Frame Type UnConditional UnConditional MasterReq SlaveResp MasterReq SlaveResp Delay ms 50 000000 10 000000 50 000000 50 000000 10 000000 50 000000 E NormalTable gt E Node Compositions LIN Network View 4 B MasterECU Master Published Frames Subscribed Frames if Published Signals a 4 Subscribed Signals ix Door_left_Signali ix Door_left_Signal2 if Door Right_Signali ix Door _Right_Signal2 a BB Door Left 4 Published Frames Door_left_Open Subscribed Frames 4 i Published Signals i Door_left_Signali i Door_left_Signal2 a if Subscribed Signals if Door_left_Signali 4 Wi Door Right 4 Published Frames Door_Right_Open Subscribed Frames a Published Signals i Door Right_Signali i Door Right _Signal2 gt bG Subscribed Signals Overview LIN Database Editor main window is as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 169 LDF Element View Property Name Name LIN Network View 4 Lin Cluster Band Rate 19 200000 GO MasterECU Master gt Gi Master G Door Left gt GE Slaves LIN Protocol Version 2 100000 G Door Right Unconditional Frames Event Triggered Sporadic Frames Channel Name gt Diagnostic Frames
39. EE p Frequently Asked QuestionSs seessocescoessocsssccssocesocesoocesocessccssocesocesoosesocssseessocssosee ZDJ Additional Installation seossooesooesooccsscsssecssocesocesoocssocessccssocesoossoosesocessecesocssocsssssssse 2D0 MinGW Installation using GCC Installer eee cee ceseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeecaeseeecaeesaeseeeaeenees 256 MinGW Installation using TDM GCC Installer esse ceecneceseeseenseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeesneeeaeenee 256 BUSMASTER Introduction 7 Introduction BUSMASTER Overview BUSMASTER is a user friendly and cost effective testing and development tool for CAN bus systems that runs on Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 7 It helps in monitoring analyzing and simulation of CAN messages the bus Using its powerful functions and user programmability one can simulate CAN system of any complexity Additionally it provides options to analyze data bytes in raw data format or logical physical data format and signals can be monitored separately These two functionality is achieved using a message database An in built database editor is provided to create message databases The user can simulate a CAN node s behavior or enhance the functionality of BUSMASTER This is done by means of 32 bit windows Dynamic Link Library DLL A DLL containing BUSMASTER interface can be loaded dynamically to simulate the node s behavior An in built Function editor is provided to write program in ANSI C and build a DLL Once
40. Error Warning Warning Fatal Error There must be at least one entry Error There must be at least an entry No error Warning 80 BUSMASTER CAN Section tag Transmission send Transmittion message details send_message Send message id identifier Send message unit unit Signal signal Verification verify Failure classification failure Verify message details verify_message Verify message signal detail signal Assumed value if absent Description Collection of the messages to be transmitted Details of the message list to be transmitted Identifier of the message Unit type of the signals Can be either raw raw or engineering eng Engineering value Details the signal with its name name and value Verification instruction set Contains a collection of verification messages For a verification procedure how to classify validation failure Can be one of warning error fatal Details of the message list to be verified validated Details of a signal under a verify message node The attribute required is the signal s name name The node value shall be a string with formulation of the condition This shall follow the syntax mentioned in the table below Error condition if absent No error Warning Error The test case shall be dropped Warning Error The test case shall be dropped Error
41. FALSE if the handler is already in the specified state hGetDIilHandle To get handle of dll attached to a node from the node Synopsis HANDLE hGetDllHandle char strNodeName Description This function returns the handle of the dll attached to a node The node name will be passed as parameter Inputs Node name Returns DII handle on success else NULL J1939 API Reference J1939 Structures TYPES OF TIMEOUT typedef enum ETYPE_TIMEOUT YPE_TO_BROADCAST 0 YPE_TO RESPONSE YPH_TO_HOLDING YPE TO TI YEROTOLTS VAP 3 YPE_TO_T4 104 BUSMASTER CAN Ip TYPES OF ACKNOWLEDGEMENT typedef enum ETYPE_ACK ACK_POS 0 ACK_NEG ECU NAME STRUCTURE typedef struct tagSECU_NAM FI GINLS2 M CAID 3 Bile GINWS2 ni wins Mis Copia 3 NE IBCs im IOV OU_ IUNSar sp INCI sat OT UINIC_IUNISIE 2 3p IBIS iid JOYASVNE IEUINCWILON 8 Biz BYTE m_bySAE_RESERVED 1 JENA sa loyASVNE _ WAG SNS 2 I F IBN san Jo AVABULy SCS ONSI g Ap BYTE m_bySAE_IND_GRP 3 IB Ne ILI an lo WANSIE ND IEUS Cle ik 8 IL 8 STRUCT_ECU_NAME J1939 PGN structure typedef struct tagSTRUCT_PGN Byra m boyrDy Specicie s Be PDU Sioseiicle PS BYTE m_byPDU_Format 8 PDU Format PF I
42. If successful the result is 0 otherwise the result is EOF fread read array elements from a file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt Slza e Creac voro lolit Salwe ie Sualwe Size ce Cowie MLI SES Description fread attempts to copy from the file or stream identified by fp count elements each of size size into memory starting at buf fread may copy fewer elements than count if an error or end of file intervenes fread also advances the file position indicator if any for fp by the number of characters actually read Returns The result of fread is the number of elements it succeeded in reading freopen open a file using an existing file descriptor Synopsis include lt stdio h gt FILE freopen const char file const char mode FILE fp Description Use this variant of fopen if you wish to specify a particular file descriptor fp notably stdin stdout or stderr for the file If fp was associated with another file or stream freopen closes that other file or stream but ignores any errors while closing it file and mode are used just as in fopen Returns If successful the result is the same as the argument fp If the file cannot be opened as specified the result is NULL fseek set file position Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int fseek FILE fp long offset int whence 212 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description Objects of type FILE can have a position that r
43. If the TRACE window is visible it will be made visible Disconnect To disconnect the controller from the bus Synopsis UINT Disconnect DWORD dwClientId Description This function will disconnect the tool from correponding protocol bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already disconnected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition Connect To connect controller to the bus Synopsis UINT Connect DWORD dwClientId 166 BUSMASTER LIN Description This function will connect the tool to corresponding protocol bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already connected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition StartTimer To start a timer in specific mode Synopsis UINT StartTimer char strTimerName UINT nTimerMode Description This function will start timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName in monoshot or cyclic mode The function takes first parameter as timer name and second as mode monoshot or cyclic If the named timer is already running or timer name is not matched the function will return FALSE Otherwise function be
44. Item click on Add button which adds a new row in Frame list e Frame Name drop down will be populated with the list of Unconditional frames Event Triggered frames Sporadic frame and Diagnostic Frames e Select the Frame name from the Frame Name drop down e Specify the delay in delay field 3 Deleting Schedule Table Item e Select the Schedule Table Item in the list and click on Delete button 4 Property view e On selecting Schedule Table Item in the list properties will be displayed in the property view based on the type of the frame selected e User defined parameters will be editable in the Property view for user input Editing Schedule Table To edit existing Schedule Table right click on the Schedule Table in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Schedule Table dialog is displayed as shown below 190 BUSMASTER LIN Mean Schedule Table Schedule Table s Name Normaifable ss s s Frame Name Frame Type 1 UnConditional 2 UnConditional Deleting Schedule Table To delete Schedule Table right click on the Schedule Table in the Element view and click on the popup menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the frame To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Schedule Table name will be checked for its uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel
45. MBPS e User can analyse of bus statistics e User preferences can be saved or loaded The last saved user preferences are loaded automatically at the start of application BUSMASTER What is new 9 What is new 2 6 4 Following features are added e Advanced log file settings e Replay optimization for CAN e Node Simulation UI Improvement e Toolbar cleanup 2 6 3 Following features are added e Support for LIN Kvaser e Bug Fixes 2 6 2 Following features are added e Bug Fixes 2 6 1 Following features are added e Support for FlexRay GIGATRONIK flex i Controller e Bug Fixes 2 6 0 Following features are added e LIN Database editor LDF e Introduction of CMake for solution project file generation 2 5 0 Following features are added e BLF to LOG Conversion e Bug Fixes 2 4 0 Following features are added e LIN PEAK device support e LIN Master mode e LIN Status message reporting e ISO TP over CAN support e UDS support e Bug Fixes 2 3 0 Following features are added e LIN Statistics window e LIN Signal watch e LIN Filters e LIN Message window configuration e LIN Diagnostic ID support 3C and 3D e FlexRay ETAS BOA support for BOA 2 0 AND BOA 1 4 10 BUSMASTER What is new e Bug Fixes 2 2 0 Following features are added e Support for LIN ETAS BOA e Support for LIN logging e Support for BOA 2 0 for CAN and CANFD e Bug Fixes 2 1 0 LIN support added for slave node
46. Message This provides the details of message to be send User has to initialize the messages and its signals The default value assumed to the signals is 0 The message value my be given in engineering value mode or in raw value mode Wait Wait node instruct to wait certain period of time expressed in terms of milliseconds Replay Replay node instructs to replay BUSMASTER log file Verify This is a collection of verify_messages This test step instructs to verify the specified messages both Rx and Tx Verify Response This test step verifies the specified message responses Rx Messages with in specified time So this step requires a time interval Verify Message This provides the details of message to be verify The user needs to formulate the validation condition In the formula current signal value shall be denoted by x following the algebraic notation The presently supported logical operators are the eight gt lt gt lt Il and amp amp By combining them suitably the following validation operations may be carried out e Range of values e g x lt 10 amp amp x gt 50 e Set of discrete values e g x 10 Il x 20 Il x 50 e Formulation of any other validation procedure Here is a sample test file SampleTestSetupFile xml BUSMASTER CAN 79 The table below contains a concise description of each of the section details and error handling procedure in case of absence of any infor
47. PIII ico Cneu JUE y Description setbuf specifies that output to the file or stream identified by fp should be fully buffered All output for this file will go to a buffer of size BUFSIZ specified in stdio h Output will be passed on to the host system only when the buffer is full or when an input operation intervenes You may if you wish supply your own buffer by passing a pointer to it as the argument buf It must have size BUFSIZ You can also use NULL as the value of buf to signal that the setbuf function is to allocate the buffer Warnings You may only use setbuf before performing any file operation other than opening the file If you supply a non null buf you must ensure that the associated storage continues to be available until you close the stream identified by fp Returns setbuf does not return a result setvbuf specify file or stream buffering Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int setvbuf FILE fp char buf int mode size_t size Description Use setvbuf to specify what kind of buffering you want for the file or stream identified by fp by using one of the following values from stdio h as the mode argument _IONBF Do not use a buffer send output directly to the host system for the file or stream identified by fp _IOFBF Use full output buffering output will be passed on to the host system only when the buffer is full or when an input operation intervenes _IOLBF Use line buffering pass o
48. ROS PI Pepa gon perme re 11 34 15 11 34 14 0019 Tx 11 34 14 0537 Tx 11 34 14 0995 Tx 11 34 13 5741 Tx 11 34 13 6174 Tx N N KY DH PO F 7 F F F E Interpretation Dialog A message can be interpreted separately in a popup window using Interpretation dialog Double clicking a message entry will show interpretation dialog with the message details This will have a list of signals and its Raw and Physical Values 62 BUSMASTER CAN E Message Interpretation Message Name no tor 7 Signalfs Name Physical Value Raw Value MO _Oeltemp MO _StaGluehk MO _Lastabw_Heiz MO _Gen_ein MO _Lastabwurf MO _RueckLLDz MO _SleepInd MO _Zus_ Kuehl MO _Mot_weckf MO _PTC_bereit MO _GenLdResp MO _Ladedruckneu MO _GradientVYorz MO _Gradient_Dz MO _Hoeheninfo MO _DFM MO _Sta_PTC MO _Sta0eltemp MO _Fehlereintr MO _Sta_VBegr MO _Fehler_YBegr MO _LL_ Solldz 34 000 8 000 Hochleistun Generator_ein Stufe_2 keine Anfie CAN wird_be nein kein Wecken 1 000 3 000 0 080 positives_ 6 000 0 055 3 200 PTC_100_Pro n 10 Fehlerspeic inaktiv V_Begrenzun LLDZ_hat_We Oxia Oxi 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 Oxi Oxi 0x4 0x0 Ox6 Ox Ox8 0x0 0x0 Oxi 0x0 0x0 0x1 Left clicking on the message entry will change the message selection Sending a Message From Message Display Messages can be directly send
49. Refer section Edit Function Body 44 BUSMASTER CAN Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Message A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list Select the check box option in the dialog box Click on Select button AAW YD The selected message variable will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Insert Message name User can add a tag of message structure and this could be used for defining variables Please follow the steps below to insert a message structure tag into the function Edit the function for which database message name is to be added Refer section Edit Function Body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Message A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list and click on Select button ANP eye The selected message will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Insert Signal name User can use signal names while programming The signal names have to be used in conjunction with the corresponding message variable It is member of message structure Please follow the steps below to insert a signal name into the function Edit the function in which signal name is to be added Refer section Edit Function Bodyedit_function_body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is di
50. Zoom Track Copy Hide Grid Range From 0 to 0 Apply Auto Range Export Configure Cursor Stats T1 s 9 837 T2 s 11 771 T2 T1 s 1 934 Category Element Type Cursorl Cursor2 Difference MSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_P_Klasse Physical 9 397 3 977 MSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_RND Physical 24 49 19 196 5 303 MSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_SIG_E Physical 8 59 799 1 423 BAP_ACC BAP_Data_ACC Physical 0 000 0 000 BAP_HYB BAP_Data_HYB Physical 0 000 0 000 BAP_Anzeige BAP Data Anzeige Physical aooo 0 000 J Statistics Standard Tx Rate Channel 1 30 000 80 000 0 000 To Start with BUSMASTER graph select CAN gt Signal Graph gt Activate menu item This will show Graph Display with configuration setting option The left side view will show list of elements added for plotting the graph Below the element list properties of the selected element will be listed This includes line type and color sample point symbol type and color An element can be hidden from the display and an element can be disabled so that it will not get currently receiving data To configure element list Configure button is provided This will show a dialog with database messages and statistics parameters The right side view shows graph window Below that controls are provided that will manipulate plotted graph These ranges from basic manipulation of graph like moving zooming and tracking the value Advanced features like setting
51. a cycle of transmission is complete next cycle of transmission will start after cyclic delay To stop all non interactive replays disconnect the tool Single Run Mode Find more details to configure replay in cyclic mode in section Log and Replay Interactive Replay In interactive replay mode replay window will be displayed during connect Follow the steps given below to start replay e Select a message from Message Replay Window e There are four options to select e CAN gt Replay gt Go e CAN gt Replay gt Step e CAN gt Replay gt Skip e CAN gt Replay gt Stop User can use tool bar button shown in figure below for this purpose 0O00 L Stop Start Skip Step Step If User selects Step the current highlighted message will be sent over CAN bus and next message will be highlighted If the current highlighted message is the last message in message replay window then first message in the replay window will highlighted BUSMASTER CAN 47 Skip If User selects Skip the highlighted message will not be sent and next message will be highlighted the current highlighted message is the last message in message replay window then first message in the replay window will highlighted Go If User selects Go then replay will start and message transmission will happen continuously with configured message delay Replay message window will be freezed Once replay finds break point or the last message is already tra
52. all the available controllers will be displayed as shown in following figure 128 BUSMASTER FlexRay i Hardware Selection Available CAN hardware Configured CAN Hardware 7 F F J haee 7 i Hardware JEGEN FlexRay2 FlexRay3 FlexRay 4 m Hardware Details Driver ID 0 Firmware Description ETAS VirtualRPCSystems FlexR aySyster Once the Cluster amp Controller is configured BUSMASTER Can be connected to FlexRay network using FlexRay gt Connect Menu If any Error occur during the initialisation of Controller the information will be displayed in BUSMASTER Trace Window Transmit Messages FlexRay Transmit Window can be used to send FlexRay Messages over FlexRay bus using Select FlexRay gt Transmit gt Configure menu option This Will Display Hide the FlexRay Tx Window as shown in figure below BUSMASTER FlexRay 129 B7 Configure Transmission Messages FLEXRAY oe js jis r fi 7 Add New Frame Delete Delete All Data Byte View HEX Signal View finde oon oss os or Update g To Add messages Use Add New Frame button This Will display a window as shown below containing all the Tx Messages of Selected ECU s To add the messages in Transmit Window select the message using check box click on the OK Button BUSMASTER Flexray Message List x frame346 C frame398 frame624 frameA C frameAB C frame_25 frame 1000 fram
53. any kind of special characters also The second parameter tells about the type of the filter pass or stop Pass filter allows only the configure message or range of message to pass On the other size stop filter blocks the configured messages These filters shall be used in display logging and replay filters Filter Details This section shows list of message names ID and range along with ID type message frame type direction and channel number Type is denoted by different icons Selecting an entry from the list updates the details of the filter in Filter Attributes section Filter Attributes Filter attributes gives more details of selected filter entry Message Name or ID in case of single id filtering and message ID range in case of range filter will be update ID type will give whether the ID is standard or extended type If ID type is All then ID type will be ignored Frame type will show whether the message is of remote transmit request or not If this field shows all then frame type will be ignored Direction field will show whether the message is transmitted or received If it is all then direction will be ignored Channel filed associates the message with particular channel Channel all makes the message independent of channels Database message names shall be selected from the Message ID combo box Message ID shall be directly typed in this combo box If the filter is for a range of messages then the Range radio button shall be selec
54. block and then enter appropriate message details in Configure Message e Ifthe field for Message ID Name has a database message then DLC and frame type will be updated with database information The Signal List will be enabled with signals defined in the database Signal Raw or Physical values can be directly entered in this list After validation the data will be updated e Signal descriptor can be used to enter physical value Double clicking the physical value cell of a signal that got descriptor will show a list of signal descriptors e Ifthe message ID is not a database message enter DLC Message bytes In this case signal list will be disabled e RTR message can be added to by selecting RTR checkbox e If there is selection in the message list changes will update the selected message e Selecting Add Message button will add a new message entry e Database messages can be directly entered by name or ID in the Message ID Name combo box or can be selected from the combo box list items e Signal Matrix will show the bit pattern of the data bytes e Instead of using Update button Auto Update option can be selected to dynamically save the data e Select Update button to save the changes and press the toolbar button shown in the figure below BUSMASTER CAN 33 Start Transmission Stop Transmission Note e Start Stop Transmission toolbar button will be enabled only if the tool is connected e Message transmission shall be stop
55. can be logged to a file for analysis Log file name shall be selected as described in section Logging To start message logging select Log Start or press the Tool Bar Button shown in the figure below The tool bar is toggle button Clicking on the button or selecting the menu again will stop logging Once the logging has started the messages received and transmitted will be logged in to the file with time of message reception 0000 Enabling Disabling Logging Note F e Logging will fail if the log file is not present in the specified location e Logging status is stored in configuration file and logging will be started automatically during application startup if it is enabled and saved in the configuration file App Filter User can configure filter list by choosing messages events to be filtered To configure the filter list follow the steps given below e Select LIN gt Filter Configuration 148 BUSMASTER LIN e The dialog box specified below will be displayed Configure Filter List Filter List Filter Details Name Type TEES E 2d slaveResp Y Filter_2 Pass i Y Filter_3 Stop 2 fi Slave No Response Named Filter List Finer Detaile G 1 Delete Delete All m Filter Attibutes Message ID Name Direction aa v C ID Ox Ox3c MasterReq Channel an 7 C From Ox O to Ox fi i Event Slave No Response ID Properties gt i Delet
56. can modify the error handling for these routines using matherr jN jNf yN yNf Bessel functions Synopsis include lt math h gt double j0 double x iclko ete Wie roar x double j1l double x loar Jir st l ene x Hh BUSMASTER C Library Functions 239 double jn int n double x rloare sine alinic im close xie double yO double x float yOf float x double yl double x eloag yili ilosanr x double yn int n double x icl ene yau aioe ia clost x3 Description The Bessel functions are a family of functions that solve the differential equation These functions have many applications in engineering and physics jn calculates the Bessel function of the first kind of order n jO and j1 are special cases for order 0 and order respectively Similarly yn calculates the Bessel function of the second kind of order n and yO and y1 are special cases for order 0 and 1 jnf jOf j1f ynf yOf and y1f perform the same calculations but on float rather than double values Returns The value of each Bessel function at x is returned cbrt cbrtf cube root Synopsis include lt math h gt double cbhrt double x roat Gomer Geos 2 lt g i Description cbrt computes the cube root of the argument Returns The cube root is returned copysign copysignf sign of y magnitude of x Synopsis include lt math h gt double copysign double x double y cloar Gopysie
57. data packets after sending Clear to Send message Tb Time interval between two packets in broadcast transmission Tr Maximum wait period for a sender to receive a response from the receiver Th Time interval between two Clear to Send message when delaying the data T1 Maximum wait period for a receiver when more packets were expected T2 Maximum wait period for a receiver to receive data packets after sending Clear to Send message T3 Maximum wait period for a sender to receive End of Message Acknowledgement after sending last data packet T4 Maximum wait period for a sender to receive another Clear to Send message after receiving one to delay the data Signal Watch J1939 signal watch window is similar to CAN signal watch window User can add SPNs Signals of the PGN defined in database Node Programming Seperate menu items are available for configuring J1939 node programming Use J1939 gt Node Simulation gt Configure menu for configuring nodes and J1939 gt Node Simulation gt User Program menu for 92 BUSMASTER CAN Building Loading and Execution of user dll handlers Most of the features of J1939 node programming remain same as that of CAN Few differences are listed down 1 Node Addition User has to provide following information to create a new node a Node Name b Preferred Address c 64 bit ECU name x Node Name fi_Ecu s939 O Preferred Address Ofa ECU NAME Ox 8000000000
58. decimals For ecvtbuf the second argument chars specifies the total number of characters to write which is also the number of significant digits in the formatted string since these two functions write only digits For fevtbuf the second argument decimals specifies the number of characters to write after the decimal point all digits for the integer part of val are always included Since ecvtbuf and fcvtbuf write only digits in the output string they record the location of the decimal point in decpt and the sign of the number in sgn After formatting a number decpt contains the number of digits to the left of the decimal point sgn contains 0 if the number is positive and 1 if it is negative For both functions you supply a pointer buf to an area of memory to hold the converted string Returns Both functions return a pointer to buf the string containing a character representation of val exit end program execution Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt RZ sleClano alton me Coce BUSMASTER C Library Functions 197 Description Use exit to return control from a program to the host operating environment Use the argument code to pass an exit status to the operating environment two particular values EXIT_SUCCESS and EXIT_FAILURE are defined in stdlib h to indicate success or failure in a portable fashion exit does two kinds of cleanup before ending execution of your program First it calls all application defined
59. dialog box one can select the time interval between two consecutive messages by entering the delay value in milliseconds in the Interval box The Key box is used to enter key value for key trigger The transmission can be configured as one shot or cyclic by selecting or deselecting the item Monoshot Close the dialog by clicking on OK button You can use Apply button to save the changes without closing the dialog User can also select the message from the list and transmit over the CAN bus by using Send button or by right click in the list and selecting the Send menu Message blocks and messages in blocks can be added deleted by selecting the menus The pop up menu is displayed when user right clicks the corresponding list The message details can be modified even the transmission is in progress Message data can be directly modified by changing the data byte values or the signal values Signal values can be given as raw value or physical value In all these cases all other values will be updated accordingly You can modify the message details and select Apply or OK button to reflect the changes for transmission During transmission you can t modify the details of message block which is active But you can add a new block or change the message block details for block which is not active On selection of start transmission only those blocks which is active having at least one message frame will be transmitted Also if the trigger is selected as On Ke
60. disabled it will not get latest values If it is enabled again it will start getting latest values Changing the enable property will reflect only if the tool is connected F Note e Dueto highlight the line style modification will not be visible during selection This will be visible if the selection moves to other element e Disable is a run time option This will be considered only if the tool is connected and message activity is on Graph Manipulation Controls Sets mouse drag to move To Copy graph window as an 1 action image in to clipboard To e graph viewport Unlocks only X axis Sets mouse drag to Zoom To ShowMide gridlines on grid position Up action Sets mouse drag to value Track action Unlocks only Y axis Unlocks both X amp Y axis To move graph viewport on grid position Right To move graph viewport on grid position Down To move graph viewport on grid position Left Active Ay Act xv xv f Move _ Zoom Tack haf efi Auto Range To set X axis value manually To configure view style of graph To set X amp Y scall automatically for each graph bb oe graph data in various ormats Active Axis This unlocks mouse move only in the enabled axis If X axis is selected only X axis value of mouse movement will be taken in to account The behavior is same for Y axis too If XY is selected then axis local will be removed and both X and Y will be considered for the action specifie
61. each file pointer fp to record whether any read or write errors have occurred on the associated file or stream Use ferror to query this indicator See clearerr to reset the error indicator Returns ferror returns 0 if no errors have occurred it returns a nonzero value otherwise fflush flush buffered file output Synopsis include lt stdio h gt SLING ICE Sov I LIL SEa e Description The stdio output functions can buffer output before delivering it to the host system in order to minimize the overhead of system calls Use fflush to deliver any such pending output for the file or stream identified by fp to the host system If fp is NULL fflush delivers pending output from all open files Returns fflush returns O unless it encounters a write error in that situation it returns EOF fgetc get a character from a file or stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt HIME ICSE HILL Aia y Description Use fgetc to get the next single character from the file or stream identified by fp As a side effect fgetc advances the file s current position indicator For a macro version of this function see getc Returns The next character read as an unsigned char and cast to int unless there is no more data or the host system reports a read error in either of these situations fgetc returns EOF You can distinguish the two situations that cause an EOF result by using the ferror and feof functions
62. editor Select CAN gt Database gt Close menu option to close any opened database file Or click on X button at the right upper corner of the database window Message Window BUSMASTER reports all kinds of messages through this window A message can arise from any one of the two categories as mentioned below e Message transmitted across the CAN bus including the one generated by BUSMASTER e Error messages Each message is displayed in a separate line which consists of the following five fields listed below respectively Time Time can be viewed in three different modes namely e System In this mode message will be displayed with PC System time e Relative In this mode message will be displayed with time since the reception of the message with same identifier previously BUSMASTER CAN 59 e Absolute In this mode the reference is the time of connection Messages will be displayed with time since the logical connection with the device ES581 is established In all cases time format is maintained as HH MM SS MS where MS stands for millisecond and the display will be in 24 hour scale e Tx Rx A message transmitted from BUSMASTER is tagged as Tx whereas for a received one the tag is Rx e Type The indicates if the message is of standard extended or RTR type the convention followed is e S Standard frame e X Extended frame e Sr Standard RTR frame e Xr Extended RTR frame e Message Thi
63. entries in the graph Buffer will be created with this size for each graph elements in the graph If the graph has two message signals and two statistics signals and the buffer size is 10000 entries each element can hold 10000 entries and individual buffers will be created to hold 10000 samples Once the buffer will become full old data will be removed to make room for latest data For optimal performance of the tool keep this buffer size minimum or with the default value The supported value for this parameter is between 1000 50000 entries Display Update Rate This is the cyclic time delay after which the display will be updated This refresh timer delay will be set to this value The default value is 1000 msec or one second The supported value for this parameter is between 1000 20000 millisecond Frame Color This is the color of the Frame Frame is the rectangle area that covers the graph plotting area This parameter depends on the frame style also This color will be considered only for frame styles FLAT and SCOPE Selecting this button will popup a dialog where standard colors will be displayed There will be an option to give custom RGB values also Plot Area Color This is the color of graph elements plotting area This forms the background of the graph area Axis Color This is the color of axis rectangle Axis rectangle is visible only if the frame style is flat Other wise this rectangle will be hidden by 3D border of the fra
64. exponent and a zero fraction NAN A number with an all 1 s exponent and a non zero fraction Returns isnan returns 1 if the argument is a nan isinf returns 1 if the argument is infinity finite returns 1 if the argument is zero subnormal or normal The isnanf isinff and finitef perform the same operations as their isnan isinf and finite counterparts but on single precision floating point numbers 244 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Idexp Idexpf load exponent log Synopsis include lt math h gt double ldexp double val int exp float ldexpf float val int exp Description ldexp calculates the value Idexpf is identical save that it takes and returns float rather than double values Returns Idexp returns the calculated value Underflow and overflow both set errno to ERANGE On underflow Idexp and Idexpf return 0 0 On overflow Idexp returns plus or minus HUGE_VAL logf natural logarithms Synopsis include lt math h gt double log double x ie lk ytte Lock elec x 7 Description Return the natural logarithm of x that is its logarithm base e where e is the base of the natural system of logarithms 2 71828 log and logf are identical save for the return and argument types You can use the non ANSI function matherr to specify error handling for these functions Returns Normally returns the calculated value When x is zero the returned value is HUGE_VAL and errno is set to ERA
65. file cS Note e Schedule Tables and frames from the Configure Schedule Table window will be considered when BUSMASTER simulates the LIN Master node of a LIN network 138 BUSMASTER LIN e From the LDF file imported only unconditional frames in the Schedule Table will be considered for the configuration and execution LIN Controller Configuration Introduction BUSMASTER Can be connected to LIN physical channel using LIN Controller Currently BUSMASTER Supports the following LIN Controllers ETAS BOA To monitor messages associating LDF file is required for LIN ETAS BOA ETAS ISOLAR EVE PEAK USB Vector XL Kvaser LIN nk WN Selecting Controller To select controller use LIN gt Driver Selection gt Driver For example to select ETAS ISOLAR EVE Driver use LIN gt Driver Selection gt ETAS ISOLAR EVE Once the Controller is configured BUSMASTER Can be connected to LIN network using LIN gt Connect Menu Transmit Messages Master can transmit frame headers and Slave can respond to the Master requests over LIN bus using LIN Transmit Window Use LIN gt Transmit gt Configure menu option to open the LIN Transmission Window r Tx Frame List 1 00 Message2 Message3 000501 Message6 Delete Delete All DLC ta Bytes _ Channel Type JP foe fo foe fT Tih x C hede C renee naan gMessage4 0x04 Message5 0x0 g Message7 0x07 uO MW BW
66. file can be created for certain interval of time The new log file will have a file name Eg BusmasterLogFile_CAN_Tn log where n is the count and T indicates logging is Time based Comment Comments can be inserted to the header of the log file Filters Filters can be added for logging Enable Disable Logging on Tool Connect Disconnect Logging can be enabled Disable on Connect Disconnect to CAN bus Message Log CAN messages can be logged to a file for analysis Log file name shall be selected as described in section Logging To start message logging select Log Start or press the Tool Bar Button shown in the figure below The tool bar is toggle button Clicking on the button or selecting the menu again will stop logging Once the logging has started the messages received and transmitted will be logged in to the file with time of message reception Note e Logging will fail if the log file is not present in the specified location e Logging status is stored in configuration file and logging will be started automatically during application startup if it is enabled and saved in the configuration file Replay User can configure replay file setting using CAN gt Replay gt Configure menu This will show replay file configuration dialog as shown below Replay Configuration Replay Files Replay File Details Replay File File Path C Documents and Settings sia3kor Desktop T me C Documents and Settings
67. first non whitespace character that has the format l digits digits elE l digits The substring contains no characters if str is empty consists entirely of whitespace or if the first non whitespace character is something other than or a digit If the substring is empty no conversion is done and the value of str is stored in tail Otherwise the substring is converted and a pointer to the final string which will contain at least the terminating null character of str is stored in tail If you want no assignment to tail pass a null pointer as tail strtodf is identical to strtod except for its return type This implementation returns the nearest machine number to the input decimal string Ties are broken by using the TEEE round even rule The alternate function _strtod_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns strtod returns the converted substring value if any If no conversion could be performed 0 is returned If the correct value is out of the range of representable values plus or minus HUGE_VAL is returned and ERANGE is stored in errno If the correct value would cause underflow 0 is returned and ERANGE is stored in errno strtol string to long Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt long scicol conse Chear wsp Chail joie alin DaS 7 lone Srrrol se WrOaCl icSSiic Cose Caan sep Caa wajo bne IoeisS 3 Description The function strto
68. from Message Display entry Select a message entry and right click This will popup message operation menu Refer Fig 1 Select Send to transmit the selected message entry on the CAN bus Clear Message Window On pressing the tool bar button shown below the message window will be cleared To clear message window BUSMASTER CAN 63 Message Columns Ordering and visibility Message columns can be dragged and dropped to any column position in the message window according to user s preference The columns can also be shown or hidden To show hide a column right click on the columns header a popup menu with all the column header names will be shown as shown in fig 6 below The columns which are currently shown are marked with a check mark against them in this menu If user wishes to hide a column just uncheck that column from the menu and the column will be hidden These column ordering and visibility are saved along with configuration Message Window CAN Tine _ Tx Rx Channel y Time e TSEC a v TxiRx 08 11 20 1437 v Channel i ISO_EPB_ Resp 09 11 20 1438 o v Msg Type BAP OPS 08 11 20 1438 Tx v ID ISO_Sounda 08 11 20 1436 TX v Message BAP _ Debug_ v DLC v Data Byte s Signal Generation Signal Generation allows the user to configure each signal in database messages with particular waveform and send the messages with these signal values at a particular sampling time per
69. functionality The tool can be used to respond back to master requests It supports the following features e Support for LIN v1 3 and v2 0 e Added LIN support for Vector XL library e LDF importing for cluster configuration and message interpretation e Modified Tx Window for DB and Non DB frame configuration and data updation e Message Window with Error information and interpretation e Node Simulation for slave mode with message timer key and error handlers 2 0 0 Added Support For Following CAN Controllers e ETAS ISOLAR EVE CAN Added FlexRay Support For Following Controllers e ETAS BOA Added following FlexRay Modules e FIBEX Import support for 2 0 3 0 e Message Window e Transmit Window Added LIN Support for Following Controllers e ETAS ISOLAR EVE LIN Added Following LIN Modules e Message window Transmit Window 1 9 0 Support to following hardware interfaces are added e NSI interface e i View Interface e Development Environment IDE is migrated to Visual Studio 2012 e Visual Studio Redistributable Package is expected by the installer script Please refer development environment for more information BUSMASTER Getting Started 11 Getting Started If you are using BUSMASTER application for the first time then the following section will help you to get familiarized with the features of this tool For this we will operate the BUSMASTER in self reception mode i e the BUSMASTER tool will be the sender a
70. gt Enable Alternatively user can use the toolbar items shown below for configuring and sending waveform signals ye i e Send Waveform Messages Contigure Waveforms Use the Delete button in Fig 1 to delete previously configured signals defined signals list The Waveform Signals defined are saved along with configuration 66 BUSMASTER CAN Signal Watch User can watch the value of a signal using the signal watch window as and when a message having that signal is received The Physical and Raw values will be listed and updated as and when the message arrives Click on the tool bar button shown below to display the signal watch window 2 allis Show Hide Signal Watch Add Delete Signals Signal watch list can be interactively populated The following list describes the steps to Add Delete signals from Signal Watch List e Click on CAN gt Signal Watch gt Configure e A dialog box will be displayed with all the database messages listed under the Message list and the list of signals defined in the selected message The Signal Watch List will show the Watch List BUSMASTER CAN 67 Signal Watch List Message List 0s10 MSG1_WwFS_ nfrage Y Signal List Signal Watch List Re MSG1_WFS_RND AZ 0x1 0 MSG1_WFS_Anfrage gt MS Ox10 MSG1_WFS_Anfrage gt MS Add Add All Delete Delete All e Select a message and select associated signal from the Signal list Select Ad
71. host system does not permit you to read it w Open the file for writing from the beginning of the file effectively this always creates a new file If the file whose name you specified already existed its old contents are discarded a Open the file for appending data that is writing from the end of file When you open a file this way all data always goes to the current end of file you cannot change this using fseek Some host systems distinguish between binary and text files Such systems may perform data transformations on data written to or read from files opened as text If your system is one of these then you can append a b to any of the three modes above to specify that you are opening the file as a binary file the default is to open the file as a text file mow rb then means read binary wb write binary and ab append binary To make C programs more portable the b is accepted on all systems whether or not it makes a difference Finally you might need to both read and write from the same file You can also append a to any of the three modes to permit this If you want to append both b and you can do it in either order for example rb means the same thing as r b when used as a mode string Use r or rb to permit reading and writing anywhere in an existing file without discarding any data w or wb to create a new file or begin by discarding all data from
72. information Config File D Sample cx CAN Recording J1939 Recording 16 Channel s Simulation 500 Kbps Allowed channels 16 e The first pane shows the loaded configuration file path e The second pane displays the data logging status for CAN and J1939 e The extreme right pane indicates the hardware selected baud rate and the number of channels supported by the application Note e Error Counters values and controller status are displayed in Network Statics window 16 BUSMASTER General General Configuration settings in a file User can save your preferences of the tool into cfx file The last loaded configuration file will be loaded automatically when the tool is run for the next session If the configuration file is not found then the application will load the default configuration settings and the status of the loaded configuration filename will be shown on the status bar Creating New Configuration file 1 Select File gt New menu option This will invoke file Save dialog box 2 Enter the new configuration file name And select Save button The new configuration file will be loaded and the same filename can be seen on the status bar Loading a Configuration File 1 Select File gt Load menu option This will invoke file Open dialog box 2 Select the configuration file name And select Open button The selected configuration file will be loaded and the loaded configuration file wil
73. is greater than the second where less than and greater than refer to whatever arbitrary ordering is appropriate Returns Returns a pointer to an element of array that matches key If more than one matching element is available the result may point to any of them BUSMASTER C Library Functions 195 calloc allocate space for arrays Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt void CelIloOe Sive ic im Siza e Sp voici Celie se yore weSeint Size it lt a gt lt Siveic gt S Description Use calloc to request a block of memory sufficient to hold an array of n elements each of which has size s The memory allocated by calloc comes out of the same memory pool used by malloc but the memory block is initialized to all zero bytes To avoid the overhead of initializing the space use malloc instead The alternate functios _calloc_r is reentrant The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns If successful a pointer to the newly allocated space If unsuccessful NULL div divide two integers Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt cay je oly alinic in akidic cl Description Divide returning quotient and remainder as two integers in a structure div_t Returns The result is represented with the structure typedef struct int quot int rem div_t where the quot field represents the quotient and rem the remainder For nonzero d if r div n d then n equals r rem
74. is selected as 29 bit interface If the interface is selected as 11 bit interface the source address will be taken from CAN ID Response from ECU field in the Settings window 3 Send Tester Present Checked to transmit tester present message 4 Max DLC If checked the data length of the messages transmitted will be set to 8 bytes even if the data length of the message is less than 8 bytes 5 Channel Channel number on which the message to be transmitted 6 CAN ID Indicates the message identifier 7 DLC Displays the data length of the message based on the bytes inserted in the Data Bytes field 8 Data Bytes Data bytes to be transmitted 9 Send Transmits the configured message 10 Bytes Number of data bytes received as response to the request sent 11 Response Description Description of the response received 12 Byte Index Index or position of the data bytes 13 Response Data Data bytes received as response to the request sent BUSMASTER FlexRay 125 FlexRay Introduction FlexRay Simulation in BUSMASTER Introduction BUSMASTER can be used to Transmit or Receive Monitor the FlexRay messages The following steps are required to Configure the BUSMASTER for Transmit Receive the FlexRay Messages 1 Cluster Configuration To Transmit Receive the FlexRay Messages a proper FIBEX File has to Imported in BUSMASTER Refer Cluster Configuration Section for more Information 2 Controller Driver Selection BU
75. null pointer if c does not occur in string strcmp character string compare Synopsis include lt string h gt ime errom Const Chean sey CONSE Char 10 Description strcmp compares the string at a to the string at b BUSMASTER C Library Functions 227 Returns If a sorts lexicographically after b strcmp returns a number greater than zero If the two strings match strcmp returns zero If a sorts lexicographically before b strcmp returns a number less than zero strcoll locale specific character string compare Synopsis include lt string h gt dime Sieaceo lil omsic Clneke SEa oMisic Claewe Sicielo p Description strcoll compares the string pointed to by stra to the string pointed to by strb using an interpretation appropriate to the current LC_COLLATE state Returns If the first string is greater than the second string strcoll returns a number greater than zero If the two strings are equivalent strcoll returns zero If the first string is less than the second string strcoll returns a number less than zero strcpy copy string Synopsis include lt string h gt Cher Sieimejony clei cic Conse Cine SSe y Description strcpy copies the string pointed to by src including the terminating null character to the array pointed to by dst Returns This function returns the initial value of dst strcspn count chars not in string Synopsis sizene EC S Mi COn Siemon ctesaa S
76. only be used when c is known to be a lowercase character a z Returns toupper returns the upper case equivalent of c when it is a character between a and z and c otherwise _toupper returns the upper case equivalent of c when it is a character between a and z If c is not one of these characters the behaviour of _toupper is undefined 1 0 Functions This chapter comprises functions to manage files or other input output streams Among these functions are subroutines to generate or scan strings according to specifications from a format string The underlying facilities for input and output depend on the host system but these functions provide a uniform interface The corresponding declarations are in stdio h The reentrant versions of these functions use macros stdin_r reent _stdout_r reent _ stderr_r reent BUSMASTER C Library Functions 207 instead of the globals stdin stdout and stderr The argument lt reent gt is a pointer to a reentrancy structure clearerr clear file or stream error indicator Synopsis include lt stdio h gt void clearerr FILE fp Description The stdio functions maintain an error indicator with each file pointer fp to record whether any read or write errors have occurred on the associated file or stream Similarly it maintains an end of file indicator to record whether there is no more data in the file Use clearerr to reset both of these indicators See ferror and fe
77. predicate eee ce eeeseeeeeeceeeeseeseecaeceeecsecsaeeeceseeneeeeees 203 isprint isgraph printable character predicate eee eee ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseesaeraes 204 ispunct punctuation character predicate eee eeeseeeseeseecseceeecaecssessecsseeseeeseeseeneees 204 isspace whitespace character predicate secs ceeceeceeceseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeaeees 204 4 BUSMASTER TOC isupper uppercase character predicate eee cece ceeceseceeceseeeseeseeeeceseeeeeeseeeaecseeeaeenaes 205 isxdigit hexadecimal digit predicate el secs ceee cee ceseeeeceseeeceeeeseeeeeeseseaeeeeseneeaes 205 toascii force integers to ASCII T nger ireen oeiee eysi reip ieoi 205 tolower translate characters to lower CASE eee eseeseeeseeseecaecesecaeceseesecnseeseenseeseeeees 206 toupper translate characters tO Upper CASE eee eee ese cseeseecaeceecaecaeeseceaeeesnseeseeeees 206 VO Funct Ons svi SS Re Ba eee ARS Este E ees et ce AION Seeds Soe sneha 206 clearerr clear file or stream error INdiCALOL eee eee ete cee ceeceeceseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeaeeeneeaes 207 fclose eose a Tiles ett Bioeth ial a Hees ae Boal Eaa 207 fdopen turn open file into a StreaM lee eee ceeeseceeceecesceeeeeeeeseeeeseessesseecaeenaeeaes 207 feof test for end of file sertes en e e Ee OE N E eS 207 ferror test whether read write error has occurred eeeseeseseereessrrerseeererrerreresereeserersee 208 fflush flush buffered file output s
78. probability that is erfc x is 1 erf x erfc is computed directly so that you can use it to avoid the loss of precision that would result from subtracting large probabilities on large x from 1 erff and erfcf differ from erf and erfc only in the argument and result types Returns For positive arguments erf and all its variants return a probability a number between 0 and 1 exp expf exponential Synopsis include lt math h gt double exp double x float expf float x Description exp and expf calculate the exponential of x that is is the base of the natural system of logarithms approximately 2 71828 You can use the non ANSJ function matherr to specify error handling for these functions Returns On success exp and expf return the calculated value If the result underflows the returned value is 0 If the result overflows the returned value is HUGE_VAL In either case errno is set to ERANGE expm1 expm1f exponential minus 1 Synopsis include lt math h gt double expml double x float expmlf float x Description expm1 and expm1f calculate the exponential of x and subtract 1 that is is the base of the natural system of logarithms approximately 2 71828 The result is accurate even for small values of x where using exp x 1 would lose many significant digits BUSMASTER C Library Functions 241 Returns e raised to the power x minus 1 fabs fabsf absolute value magnitude
79. realloc or the related function calloc return it to the memory storage pool by calling free with the address of the object as the argument You can also use realloc for this purpose by calling it with 0 as the nbytes argument The alternate functions _malloc_r _realloc_r and _free_r are reentrant versions The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns malloc returns a pointer to the newly allocated space if successful otherwise it returns NULL If your application needs to generate empty objects you may use malloc 0 for this purpose realloc returns a pointer to the new block of memory or NULL if a new block could not be allocated NULL is also the result when you use realloc aptr 0 which has the same effect as free aptr You should always check the result of realloc successful reallocation is not guaranteed even when you request a smaller object free does not return a result mbtowc minimal multibyte to wide char converter Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt iMG wmMocCOwe GHClNaIe Ic je ECONS Clee s SiwS ic ia p Description This is a minimal ANSI conforming implementation of mbtowc The only multi byte character sequences recognized are single bytes and they are converted to themselves Each call to mbtowc copies one character from s to pwe unless s is a null pointer In this implementation the argument n is ignored BUSMASTER C Library Functions 199 Re
80. replaced by some combination of digits and letters BUSMASTER C Library Functions 215 The alternate functions _mktemp_r and _mkstemp_r are reentrant versions The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns mktemp returns the pointer path to the modified string representing an unused filename unless it could not generate one or the pattern you provided is not suitable for a filename in that case it returns NULL mkstemp returns a file descriptor to the newly created file unless it could not generate an unused filename or the pattern you provided is not suitable for a filename in that case it returns 1 perror print an error message on standard error Synopsis include lt stdio h gt void perror char prefix void _perror_r void reent char prefix Description Use perror to print on standard error an error message corresponding to the current value of the global variable errno Unless you use NULL as the value of the argument prefix the error message will begin with the string at prefix followed by a colon and a space The remainder of the error message is one of the strings described for strerror The alternate function _perror_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns perror returns no result printf fprintf sprintf format output Synopsis include lt stdio h gt dae primer Connac Grea wiremametc lp a
81. response messages To configure diagnostic settings use CAN gt Diagnostics gt Settings menu This will display the Window as shown below 122 BUSMASTER CAN m General Settings N Interface iibits Extended MaxDic Diagnostic Standard UDS ISO 14229 Transport Layer Request to ECU Response from ECU CAN ID ox ox B Base Address ox 600 DB Ox 600 DB ISO TP Settings Message Identifier min BlockSize Flow Control hex 0 ms dec 10 B Length P2 Time Out 250 ms Time to wait for ECU to respond 3 Time to wait after the Neg Resp 78hex Tester Present 1 Diagnostics Standard To select diagnostics standard UDS ISO 14229 or ISO 14230 2 Interface To select the type of the interface 11 bit or 29 bit interface 3 Max DLC If checked the data length of the messages transmitted will be set to 8 bytes even if the data length of the message is less than 8 bytes 4 Default Values To reset to default settings 5 CAN ID Request to ECU To set the identifier of the diagnostic request message that is to be transmitted 6 CAN ID Response from ECU To set the identifier of the diagnostic response message that is to be received 7 Base address Indicates the base of the 11 bit message identifier Enabled only if the interface selected is 11 bit Extended interface 8 STmin Indicates the time delay between transmission of two consecuti
82. result from a customized matherr by modifying e gt retval which propagates backs to the caller If matherr returns 0 indicating that it was not able to resolve the error the caller sets errno to an appropriate value and prints an error message 246 BUSMASTER C Library Functions modf modff split fractional and integer parts Synopsis include lt math h gt double modf double val double ipart float modff float val float ipart Description modf splits the double val apart into an integer part and a fractional part returning the fractional part and storing the integer part in ipart No rounding whatsoever is done the sum of the integer and fractional parts is guaranteed to be exactly equal to val That is if realpart modf val amp intpart then realpart intpart is the same as val modff is identical save that it takes and returns float rather than double values Returns The fractional part is returned Each result has the same sign as the supplied argument val nan nanf representation of infinity Synopsis include lt math h gt double nan void float nanf void Description nan and nanf return an IEEE NaN Not a Number in double and single precision arithmetic respectivly nextafter nextafterf get next number Synopsis include lt math h gt double nextafter double val double dir ploate ihexwehre icn lloar wel loat lili e Description nextafter returns t
83. selected using the radio buttons To add handler based on the message name the corresponding message should be available in the imported database Multiple messages can be added from this dialog box by clicking on Apply button after selecting a message handler Function definition will be added to the source file in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Message Handlers category in Pane 1 Add Timer Handler Select Timer Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Add A dialog box appears Enter Timer Handler Name like e g Time_One and the Timer Value in milliseconds Select OK button Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Timer Handlers category in Pane 1 oc Nn kW WN Note e Adding a Sleep function inside a Timer handler might have an adverse effect on the application e Maximum of 16 timers can run simultaneously in cyclic mode Anything above 16 will fail to start Add Key Handler Select Key Handlers category in the Pane and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Add A dialog box appears asking the user to press a key Press a key for which User want to write the handler The same will be displayed in the dialog box a ee Po Select OK button or Apply button if more key handlers are to be added from the same dialog Function definition will be added to the source file automa
84. signal watch list will show Raw and Physical value of the signal with the Unit along with Message and Signal name Close signal watch window User can directly close the window by clicking on Close X button OR 1 Click on the drop down button associated with the tool bar button shown above This will pop up a menu 2 Click on Close menu option to close the signal watch window Logging Logging User can configure log file setting using LIN gt Logging gt Configure menu This will show log file configuration dialog as shown below 146 BUSMASTER LIN m Log Blocks mLog File Details File Path D Projects BUSMASTER BUSMASTERLogFile Time Mode System 7 Channel m m Numeric Format C Decimal Hex _ Reset Timestamp Log Trigger J Start on Reception of ID 0x I Stop on Reception of ID 0x Create New Log File M For every Bus Connect for Transmission _ After each file size exceeding 50 MB _ After every fo Hr s 30 Min s Number of files to be allowed 10 Enable Disable Logging during tool Connect Disconnect Log Files User can add as many as log files in to the list of Log Files This list will show the log files that are already configured To add a new Log file select Add button This will add a log file with default file name User can change the file name using button in the Log File Detail
85. slaves if required Refer section Slave on page 172 Ge Create signal and provide its Publisher and subscribers Refer section Signals on page 183 4 Create unconditional Frames and map publisher and signals Refer section Unconditional Frame on page 175 5 Create Event triggered and sporadic frames if required Refer sections Event Triggered Frame on page 178 and Sporadic Frame on page 180 Add Diagnostic Messages and signals if required Refer section Diagnostic Support on page 182 Create schedule table s and define slots Refer section Schedule Table on page 189 Create codings and associate to signals Refer section Signals on page 183 CmArAN Create signal groups if required Signal groups are depreciated from LDF 2 x Refer section Signal Group on page 185 10 Create Node compositions if Required Refer section Node Composition on page 190 2 Importing Editing LDF File Use File gt Open to import the existing LDF file If any errors found tool will report the same and file not be loaded If any warnings are found tool will display the same in warnings window with the description action point if any and imports LDF File 3 Preview LDF File To preview the current LDF File use View gt Preview File menu LDF Elements Cluster Properties The LIN Cluster parameters can be edited by Right clicking the LIN Cluster Element in Element View and click on pop up menu Fdit A dialog Box as Shown in
86. the last explicit argument in the parameter list the argument immediately preceding the ellipsis that flags variable arguments in an ANSI C function header You can only use va_start in a function declared using this ellipsis notation not for example in one of its subfunctions 250 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Returns va_start does not return a result Extract a value from argument list Synopsis include lt stdarg h gt type va_arg va_list ap type Description va_arg returns the next unprocessed value from a variable argument list ap which you must previously create with va_start Specify the type for the value as the second parameter to the macro type You may pass a va_list object ap to a subfunction and use va_arg from the subfunction rather than from the function actually declared with an ellipsis in the header however in that case you may only use va_arg from the subfunction ANSI C does not permit extracting successive values from a single variable argument list from different levels of the calling stack There is no mechanism for testing whether there is actually a next argument available you might instead pass an argument count or some other data that implies an argument count as one of the fixed arguments in your function call Returns va_arg returns the next argument an object of type type Abandon a variable argument list Synopsis include lt stdarg h gt void va_end va_list ap
87. the previous header file in the source file in the Pane 2 and also under Include Headers category in Pane 1 Delete Handlers User can delete Header files Message Handlers Timer Handlers Key Handlers Error handlers DLL handlers and Utility Functions in source file opened for editing to do so follow the steps given below 1 Select the item to be deleted in the Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Delete A confirmation message is displayed Select Yes nan AUN The selected item s definition will be deleted from the source file in the Pane 2 and also in Pane 1 Add Message Handler 1 Select Message Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu will be displayed 3 On selecting Add menu A dialog as shown below pops up Based on C Message ID C Message ID Range ALL Rx Messagels Message Name Message ID 0x Message ID Range From Ox To Ox ALT_LINALT_R_02 lt ALT_LINALT_R_01 Channel CAV LINALTECM R 01 EMM_LINALT_A_01 MasterReg RDU_LINSLTECM_R_O1 SlaveResp boob Cose 4 From this dialog message handlers of different type can be selected The different types of message handlers supported are e Message handler based on the message name e Message handler based on message ID e Message handler based on range of message ID e Message handler for all received messages 160 BUSMASTER LIN The type of message handler can be
88. the scanf input field If the first character in the brackets is a caret the search set is inverted to include all ASCII characters except those between the brackets There is also a range facility which you can use as a shortcut 0 9 matches all decimal digits The hyphen must not be the first or last character in the set The character prior to the hyphen must be lexically less than the character after it Here are some pattern examples e abcd matches strings containing only a b c and d e abcd matches strings containing any characters except a b c or d e A DW Z matches strings containing A B C D W X Y Z e z a matches the characters z and a Floating point numbers for field types e f g E F G must correspond to the following general form ddddd ddd Ele l ddd where objects inclosed in square brackets are optional and ddd represents decimal octal or hexadecimal digits Returns scanf returns the number of input fields successfully scanned converted and stored the return value does not include scanned fields which were not stored If scanf attempts to read at end of file the return value is EOF If no fields were stored the return value is 0 scanf might stop scanning a particular field before reaching the normal field end character or may terminate entirely scanf stops scanning and storing the current field and moves to the next input field if any in any of the following sit
89. this select Transmit menu under CAN menu and select Configure menu A dialog as shown below pops up 12 BUSMASTER Getting Started E Configure Transmission Messages Message Blocks Tx Message List e Ei tiisseltiiawe chand Tee BAC Daa Byles CYCLIC 1007s BG 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 CyCuic 10ers H amp A s77 IRX_DOOR LAND KEY_ S 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 CO a 8 000 054 054 000 000 000 000 00 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 lt Nams ID fnDec DLCI Block Detais RXTORQUEA e 000 osa fose ooo foo ooo ooo fooo fi x Std Exd M RTR Name ECU_Trarsmit Signal Details 0 Tx Mode G Ocie C Monoshot AN ConSpCil Ay ToignitvType AN TTRLT Tog W Tima Delay 100 msec Ae TIRST_Torg M Key gt v Megi Delay Between Message blocks I Time Dely msec 5 0 1 Trigger Cycle on evenk 1 0 0 oo oc oc amp amp les s ejo ejo ojw elsisc ejo oly oo oc co O 1 eleje ejs ejos amp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o olojolojo loj e You can add a total of 32 Message Blocks having trigger condition either as On Key or On Time or both Each block of message can have a total of 64 messages e You can activate any message block selectively for transmission by selecting a check box in Message Blocks list Message can be added that are not in the database as well as in the database For details about this refer Transmit Message s From the same
90. using undef isprint or undef isgraph Returns isprint returns non zero if c is a printing character 0x20 0x7E isgraph behaves identically to isprint except that the space character 0x20 is excluded ispunct punctuation character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt diae Sounet alia C e Description ispunct is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for printable punctuation characters and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef ispunct Returns ispunct returns non zero if c is a printable punctuation character isgraph c amp amp isalnum c isspace whitespace character predicate isspace whitespace character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt int isspace int c Description isspace is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for whitespace characters and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF BUSMASTER C Library Functions 205 You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isspace Returns isspace returns non zero if c is a space tab carriage return new line vertical tab or formfeed 0x09 0x0D 0x20
91. value and click on OK button The changes in signal description and value are displayed in the signal description list The same can be done by selecting the signal details from the list and the description to be edited and by clicking on Edit Desc button Delete User can delete Signal description and Signal value by following the steps given below 1 Click the message name for which you want to delete description for the signal from the Pane 1 The details will be displayed in the Pane 2 Select the signal description and value from the signal description list in Pane 2 Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Delete Description menu option A delete confirmation message will be displayed Click on Yes button Aw wh The selected signal description and value are deleted from the signal description list The same can be done by selecting the signal details from the list and the description to be deleted and by clicking on Delete Desc button Save database User can save the database to a file by selecting CAN gt Database gt Save or by clicking on the tool bar button shown below 2hlaSs o Save Database User also have an option to save the file at different folder location with different name You can do this by following the steps given below 1 Select CAN gt Database gt Save As menu option 2 A save as file dialog box will be displayed Enter the file name Click on Save button Closing database
92. want to declare selected message structure variable option in the Message and Signal List to initialise message with its struct definition Required Include header file Unions h F Note e Unions h file will be automatically generated by BUSMASTER during database import BUSMASTER CAN 99 e This file will be in the database file directory API Listing BUSMASTER API Listing SendMsg To send a CAN frame Synopsis UINT SendMsg STCAN_MSG Description This function will put the message on the CAN bus The message structure STCAN_MSG will be filled with ID length frame format and data Big Little endian packing will be taken care if it is a database message Inputs STCAN_MSG CAN Message Structure Returns Zero on successful transmisstion Non zero value on failure EnableLogging To start logging Synopsis UINT EnableLogging Description This function will enable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is already ON DisableLogging To stop logging Synopsis UINT DisableLogging Description This function will disable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case log
93. week e 9 A The full name for the day of the week e b An abbreviation for the month name e B The full name of the month 236 BUSMASTER C Library Functions e 9 c A string representing the complete date and time in the form Mon Apr 01 13 13 13 1992 e 9 d The day of the month formatted with two digits e H The hour on a 24 hour clock formatted with two digits e I1 The hour on a 12 hour clock formatted with two digits e j The count of days in the year formatted with three digits from 001 to 366 e m The month number formatted with two digits e M The minute formatted with two digits Q p Either AM or PM as appropriate e 9 S The second formatted with two digits e U The week number formatted with two digits from 00 to 53 week number 1 is taken as beginning with the first Sunday in a year See also WW e w A single digit representing the day of the week Sunday is day 0 e W Another version of the week number like U but counting week 1 as beginning with the first Monday in a year e x A string representing the complete date in a format like Mon Apr 01 1992 e X A string representing the full time of day hours minutes and seconds in a format like 13 13 13 e y The last two digits of the year e 9 Y The full year formatted with four digits to include the century e 9 Z Defined by ANSI C as eliciting the time zone if available it is not available in this implementation whic
94. which override the default way that printf interprets the data type of the corresponding argument h forces the following d i o u x or X conversion type to apply to a short or unsigned short h also forces a following n type to apply to a pointer to a short Similarily an 1 forces the following d i o u x or X conversion type to apply to a long or unsigned long also forces a following n type to apply to a pointer to a long If an h or an l appears with another conversion specifier the behavior is undefined L forces a following e E f g or G conversion type to apply to a long double argument If L appears with any other conversion type the behavior is undefined e type type specifies what kind of conversion printf performs Here is a table of these e prints the percent character e c prints arg as single character e s prints characters until precision is reached or a null terminator is encountered takes a string pointer e d prints a signed decimal integer takes an int same as i e prints a signed decimal integer takes an int same as d e 0 prints a signed octal integer takes an int e uprints an unsigned decimal integer takes an int e x prints an unsigned hexadecimal integer using abcdef as digits beyond 9 takes an int e X prints an unsigned hexadecimal integer using ABCDEF as digits beyond 9 takes an int e f prints a signed value of the form 9999 9999 takes a floating point number e e prints a signed value
95. 000124 BLE FO Browse Cancel Clear 2 Function Editor J1939 Function Editor is similar to CAN Function Editor In addition to the handlers available in the CAN Function Editor it has Event Handlers where user can configure e Data confirmation event Handler is executed whenever a long gt 8 bytes message is transmitted void OnEvent_DataConf UINT32 unPGN BYTE bySrc BYTE byDest BOOL bSuccess unPGN PGN of the message transmitted bySre Source node byDest Destination node bSuccess Result of transmission TRUE success FALSE failure e Address confirmation event Handler is executed whenever a node claims or loses an address void OnEvent_AddressClaim BYTE byAddress byAddress New Address claimed by the node Address lost If the value is 254 Note These event handlers are always enabled once added Add Event Handler xj M Address claim event cence _ 3 J1939 API Reference A new set of API is introduced in order to perform functions on J1939 bus Please refer following section API Reference J1939 for further details BUSMASTER CAN 93 HMODULE GetD lH andle char UINT ClaimnAddress BYTE Address UINT UINT Cormmand ddress UINT64 E cuN ame UINT DizableLoggingi WINNT EnableLogginagl UINT God ffline UINT Go nlinef UINT RequestAddress UINT Channel UINT RequestPGN UINT FGH BYTE Des UINT Send4ckMeq JINT PGN BYTE Ack UINT SendMeg S5TJ1939 MSG pels UINT SetTin
96. 1000 O frame347 r l 1 ka Add New Frame Delete Delete All Click to Enable Signal View Signal View Byte View HEX Signal View 1 000000 0 000000 FlexRay Message Window Introduction On line FlexRay Network Monitoring can be done using FlexRay Message window Activation Use FlexRay gt Message Window gt Activate menu to Activate the Message window This will display Message Window as shown in following figure Message Window FLEXRAY olez _ Frame Id 7 Once the BUSMASTER is connected to FlexRay Network the Message window will display all the Messages Transmitted on the network The Messages can also display the message interpretation Enabling Interpretation To enable the interpretation the Message window should be in overwrite mode Use FlexRay gt Message Window gt Overwrite menu to enable the overwrite mode After this use FlexRay gt Message Window gt Interpret The below figure shows Message window when it BUSMASTER is connected to FlexRay Network BUSMASTER FlexRay 133 E Message Window FLEXRAY feifeiis Tine _ Tx Rx Frame Id Frane Type Slot Typ Descriptio Cycle Chann D Data Byte s 15 24 59 6298 Rx 0001 sync startup static 22 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 15 24 59 6298 Rx 0002 sync startup static 22 16 000 000 000 000 000 000 E 15 24 59 6202 Rx 0013 0 2 Data static ABSInfo
97. 17 13 08 9859 1375 ACQ NEV 17 13 08 9849 1375 ACQ NEV 17 13 09 0859 0114 ROD_CMM 17 13 09 0849 0114 ROD_CMM 17 13 09 1859 1266 Dat3_BSI 17 13 09 1849 1266 Dat3_BSI 17 13 09 2859 0168 CFD_ESI 17 13 09 2849 0168 CFD_BSI 17 13 09 3859 1375 ACQ_NEW 17 13 09 3849 1375 ACQ NEV 17 13 09 4859 0114 ROD_CMM 17 13 09 4849 0114 ROD_CMM m BG Config Fih CAN Recording J1939 Recording 2 Channel s Kvaser CAN 500 000 Kbps Allov_ Change time display O ooo 000 000 000 ooo 000 000 ooo ooo 000 ooo ooo ooo ooo 000 000 000 ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo 000 000 000 000 000 ooo ooo 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 Foun HH HH Hw c Ty gt E t ll a lt II A G amp anneren nooNnNAnerr Naon Anerer Nn ooNnNn nerna N aA NENEN ENENEPENENEN NEN vnnnnnnnnnnannnnnann 14 BUSMASTER Operating Modes Operating Modes The BUSMASTER can be operated in Active mode e Active In this mode the controller will participate in the bus activity i e it will generate acknowledgement signal error signals etc on reception of message and also will be able to transmit messages e Passive Currently this mode is disabled Any one of the above mentioned modes can be selected from the menu Hardware gt Driver Mode By default BUSMASTER will be in Active mode BUSMASTER Status Bar 15 Status Bar The status bar gives the following
98. 22 16 26 5893 2 16eeff00 OOEEOO ACL 00 FF 006 Rx 6 01 00 00 00 OO OO 00 80 22 16 26 5905 2 16eeffO00 OOEEOO ACL 00 FF 006 Tx 6 O1 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 22 16 30 2136 2 1ceefffe ODEEOD ACL FE FF 0O07 Rx 8 01 00 00 00 00 00 900 80 25 24 18 2355 1 lceeffte OOZE00 ACL FE FF 00 Tx 8 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 22 16 30 2148 2 1ceefffe OOEEOO ACL FE FF 007 Tx 8 01 00 00 00 00 OO 00 80 25 24 18 2367 1 1ceefffe OOEEOO ACL FE FF 007 Rx 6 O1 00 OO 0O 00 00 OO 80 25 24 19 2432 1 1ceafffe ODEADD RQST_ACL FE FF 007 Tx 3 OO EE 00 25 24 19 2440 1 lceatftfe ODEADO RQST_ACL FE FF 007 Rx 3 00 EE 00 22 16 31 2213 2 iceafffe OOEAOO ROST_ACL FE FF 007 Rx 3 OO EE OO 22 16 31 2221 2 1lceafffe OOEAGO ROST ACL FE FF 007 Tx 3 00 EE 00 25 24 20 1554 1 1cecfffe ODECOO BAN FE FF 007 Tx 6 20 09 00 02 FF OO EE 00 22 16 32 1336 2 lcectfte ODECOD BAM FE FF 007 Rx 8 20 09 00 O2 FF OO EE 00 22 16 32 1347 2 icecfffe OOECOO BAM FE FF 00 Tx 8 20 09 00 O2 FF OO EE 00 25 24 20 1565 1 1cecfffe OOECOO BAM FE FF 007 Rx 6 20 09 OO 02 FF OO EE 00 22 16 32 2337 2 1cebfffe OOEBOO TPDT FE FF 007 Rx 6 Of OL 00 00 00 00 OO OO 22 16 32 2349 2 1cebfffe ODEBOO TPDT FE FF oo Tx 8 O1 OL 00 00 00 00 900 00 25 24 20 2555 1 lcebffte OO B00 TPDT FE FF 00 Tx 8 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 25 24 20 2567 1 1cebfffe OOEBOO TPDT FE FF 007 Rx 8 01 01 00 00 OO OO OO 00 22 16 32 3342 2 1cebfffe OOEBOO TPDT FE FF 007 Rx 6 02 60 FE FF FF FF FF FF 2 Rx 9 22 16 32 3342 iceefffe ODEE00 BROADCAST FE FF 007 0 00 00 0O 00 OO
99. 6 56 16 1 0x40 OxBS 0x05 62 16 1 0x40 OxBO 0x06 56 16 1 0x80 OxBS 0x05 62 16 1 0x80 OxBO 0x06 56 16 1 1 1 1 OxCO OxBS 0x05 62 16 OxCO OxBO Ox06 56 16 OxB9 0x04 68 16 OxB1 OK Cancel Other fields like BRP Sampling Point SJW and NBT are dependent on CNFO CNF1 and CNF2 values On clicking the OK button the controller will be initialized with the selected baud rate For more details on bit values of CNFO CNF1 and CNF2 and the calculation of baud rate refer the section Bit Time Calculation Note For MH Tiny CAN either Bit Rate or BTR will be considered If Bit Rate value is available BTR will be discarded Bit Timing Calculation Abbreviations used e tNBT Nominal CAN Bit time e tsyn Syncronization segment e PD Propagation delay e tsegl Time segment 1 e tseg2 Time segment 2 e tq Time quantum e BRP Baud rate prescaler e fsys Controller system clock e fclk Clock Frequency e NBT Number of tq in tNBT e tPD Propagation Delay time The CAN protocol supports bit rates in the range of 1 Kbps and 1000Kbps Each node has its own clock generator and oscillator Configuring the bit timing parameters for each node can facilitate a common bit rate on the bus The Nominal CAN Bit Time NBT divided into four segments as shown below BUSMASTER CAN 19 I lt Nominal CAN Bit Time tner gt Stead PIS propagation delay gt 16 a Seis g
100. 8 mbtowc minimal multibyte to wide char convertert eeseseeeesseressseesrsrestsresreresseeerseeess 198 SOLE Sorkan aray onan E tense ETA a a AAN 199 rand srand pseudo random NUMbers seesessseeseseseseesteresreerrsesrrstnststestsresernrssreresesresreet 199 strtod strtodf string to double or float sseeeeeseseeseeeseseeesrseeessrrererrsesrsserresrerrnrenrereerenes 199 stitok string to Jon Paces ereere esp enese apen o eee cee spat SETE E OS ESER EAE EAEE a tips tee easy 200 strtoul string to unsigned ONG le cece cee ceseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeseseeeeecaeeeaecsaesaecaeeaeenseeaees 201 system execute command SCLIN eee tese sa eenen RES n aeoe E E EEES 201 wctomb minimal wide char to multibyte converter seeseseeeeseeressseesesreersresreresseersesees 202 Character Type Macros and Functions cee eceesessecsseeseceeceseceeceseeeeeeseessceseseeeeseesaecsaecaecnaeeaes 202 isalnum alphanumeric character predicate sees cseceeceeceeeseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 202 isalpha alphabetic character predicate eee eceeeeeeeseeeseceeecseceeesecsaeaecesceeceseeseeeees 202 isascii ASCII character predicate ees eeeseecsecesecaeceseeseceseeeceseeseceeeeseseaeeeeseneeaes 203 iscntrl control character predicates essees eee cesses ceeeeeeceseeeeceseeeeecaeecaecsaeaecsaeesesnsensees 203 isdigit decimal digit predicate ee eseeeecseesseceseesececeseceeceseeeeesseeeeeeseseaeeaeeeaeaes 203 islower lower case character
101. ASTER generated function OnMsg_All d OnMsg_All STCAN_MSG RxMsg Initialise message structure RxMsg m_unMsgID RxMsg m_ucEXTENDED FALSE Standard Message type Re lt cMisGiyineetie elk haa p RxMsg m_ucDLC Ox100 Message ID FALSE Not RTR type 8 Length is 8 Bytes RxMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 0 10 Lower 4 Bytes RxMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 1 20 Upper 4 Bytes RxMsg m_ucChannel 1 SendMsg RxMsqg End BUSMASTER generated function OnMsg_All Start BUSMASTER generated function OnKey_d void OnKey_d unsigned char KeyValue Connect End BUSMASTER generated function OnKey_d Start BUSMASTER generated function OnError_Warning_Limit voi Tra d OnError_Wa ce Warning Limit reached End BUSMASTI Start BUSMASTER generated function OnDLL_Load void OnDLL_Load rning_Limit SCAN_ERR ErrorMsg a ER generated function OnError_Warning_Limit TODO Define and Initialise the following variables EnableLogging j 54 BUSMASTER CAN End BUSMASTER generated function OnDLL_Load Start BUSMASTER generated function OnDLL_Unload void OnDLL_Unload TODO Define and Initialise the following variables DisableLogging End BUSMASTER generated function OnDLL_Unload Start BUSMASTER generate
102. BUSMASTER C Library Functions 209 fgetpos record position in a stream or file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt LING IC SCjOOS WF IIMS IO Ij OOS E D0OS 2 Description Objects of type FILE can have a position that records how much of the file your program has already read Many of the stdio functions depend on this position and many change it as a side effect You can use fgetpos to report on the current position for a file identified by fp fgetpos will write a value representing that position at pos Later you can use this value with fsetpos to return the file to this position In the current implementation fgetpos simply uses a character count to represent the file position this is the same number that would be returned by ftell Returns fgetpos returns 0 when successful If fgetpos fails the result is 1 Failure occurs on streams that do not support positioning the global errno indicates this condition with the value ESPIPE fgets get character string from a file or stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt chark rogor Charni OUr aligne im IP ILIMa 35 9 9 Description Reads at most n 1 characters from fp until a newline is found The characters including to the newline are stored in buf The buffer is terminated with a 0 Returns fgets returns the buffer passed to it with the data filled in If end of file occurs with some data already accumulated the data is returned with no other
103. C TO LOG Conversion Converter Help BLF TO LOG Conversion DBC TO DBF Conversion Converts the CANoe CAN log file asc to BUSMAS DBF TO DBC Conversion Select the Conversion Type ASC TO LOG Conversion J1939 DBC TO DBF Conversion API Reference STCAN_MSG Structure STCAN_MSG Structure Definition Se GuUCEOLeCANSMSE unsigned int m_unMsgID Jf 11 29 Bit Message ID UnSsTtonedechar snmauck ENDED a 7 sitGuc horus AOE E ame unsigned char m_ucRTR true for Remote Request unsigned char m_ucDLC fi Datca lem 0 8 union unsigned char m_aucData 8 Byte Data unsigned short int m_auwData 4 Word Data unsigned long int m_aulData 2 Long Data m_sWhichBit Data access member unsigned char m_ucChannel Required Include header file is struct h STCAN_MSG sMsg Initialise message structure sMsg m_unMsgID 0x100 Message ID sMsg m_ucEXTENDED FALSE Standard Message type sMsg m_ucRTR FALSE Not RTR type 98 BUSMASTER CAN sMsg m_ucDLC 8 Length is 8 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 0 10 Lower 4 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 1 20 Upper 4 Bytes sMsg m_ucChannel 1 First CAN channel Send the messag SendMsg sMsqg SCAN_ERR Structure Definition SewwSe SCAN IAIRUN unsigned char m_ucTcError Tx Error Counter Value unsigned char m_ucRxError Rx Error Counter Value uns
104. CAN hGetDilHandle To get handle of dll attached to a node from the node Synopsis HANDLE hGetDllHandle char strNodeName Description This function returns the handle of the dll attached to a node The node name will be passed as parameter Inputs Node name Returns DII handle on success else NULL RequestPGN To request PGN from a node Synopsis UINT RequestPGN UINT PGN BYTE DestAdres UINT Channel Description This function will request a PGN from a node in the network Inputs PGN PGN to be requested DestAdres From the node Channel Channel number Returns 1 on success 0 on failure SendAckMsg To send a acknowlegde message Synopsis UINT SendAckMsg UINT PGN BYTE AckType BYTE DestAdres UINT Channel Description This function will be used to send a acknowledgement message based on the request Inputs PGN PGN to requested AckType 0 for positive 1 for negative acknowledgement DestAdres Destination node Channel Channel number Returns 1 on success 0 on failure ClaimAddress To claim a different address for current node Synopsis UINT ClaimAddress BYTE Address UINT Channel BUSMASTER CAN 111 Description This function will claim a different address for the current node Inputs Address Address to be claimed Channel Channel number Returns 1 on success 0 on failure RequestAddress To request addresses of currently active n
105. DIR_TX msg m_sMsgProperties m_uExtendedID m_s29BitId m_bySrcAddress 5 msg m_unDLC 8 msg m_pbyData Bag E tmp 1 BUSMASTER CAN 53 d MEWEBNETEIPESI E a Se 45 56 E memcpy msg m_pbyData tmp 5 SendMsg amp msg End J1939 generated function OnPGNID_100 generated by BUSMASTER USMASTER VERSION 1 7 0 hfs CAN foe Waals wale i5 VERSION 1 1 oe B PROTOCOL CAN GCC GCC GCC GCC GCC Gee Gee Gee voi AEN Start BUSMASTER include header Lude lt Windows h gt include lt CANIn cludes h gt End BUSMASTER include header Start BUSMASTER global variable End BUSMASTER global variable USMASTER Function Prototype GCC_EXPORT OnMsg_Al1l STCAN_MSG RxMsgqg GCC_EXPORT OnKey_d unsigned char KeyValue GCC_EXPORT OnError_Warning_Limit SCAN_ERR ErrorMsg GCC_EXPORT OnDLL_Load GCC_EXPORT OnDLL Unload GCC_EXPORT OnTimer_new_100 GCC_EXPORT OnBus_Connect GCC_EXPORT OnBus_Disconnect Seer 15 EXTERN void EXTERN void EXTERN void EXTERN void EXTERN void _EXTERN void _EXTERN void EXTERN void End BU SMASTER Function Prototype Start BUSM
106. D_Application NULL CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER TID_IApplication void amp m_IApplication if SUCCEEDED hr if m_IApplication MATS Heatin gt Gomme cite mm auelam In the header for the dialog declare a member like this TApplication m_IApplication Now all you need to do is include the file CAN_Monitor_Interface h which is provided in the BUSMASTER installation folder When you go looking for this file you ll notice another file CAN_Monitor_Interface c This file contains the implementation of the interface and is needed by the linker So again you can copy it or add it to your project directly Now build your application click the button you ve made and there is your application To receive CAN messages from Busmaster makes use of the new interface_ AppEvents connection points 114 BUSMASTER CAN To know more refer Example folder in BUSMASTER installation folder COM Interface API Listing BUSMASTER COM Interface API Listing Connect To connect BUSMASTER to the bus Synopsis HRESULT Connect BOOL bConnect Description This function connects disconnects BUSMASTER to the bus Inputs BOOL bConnect TRUE connect FALSE Disconnect Cause of failure NA GetMsgInfo Retrieves the message parameters from the loaded database given the message name Synopsis HRESULT GetMsgInfo BSTR MsgName sMESSAGESTRUCT sMsgStruct Description This function will get the details about a database
107. Decimal Message ID and data bytes of a LIN message will use this as a base while format for logging File Mode In Append file mode log sessions will be appended at the end of the file Each logging session will have its own session header and footer In Overwrite file mode the file will be overwritten for the first session For consecutive sessions the file name will be suffixed with an incrementing number and each session will be logged in new files The log file name will be incremented every time when you stop the logging process If already log files are created in the previous session and if a new session is started then the log files created already will be overwritten in both overwrite and append mode In this case the successive files already created in the previous session will contain old session data Logging Indication Recording or logging is indicated in the status bar for LIN When the logging is enabled and data is logged in to the file an icon will be shown in the status bar with glowing on and glowing off continuously till the logging is stopped When the logging is stopped then icon will be disabled Example If the log file name is abc log for the first time then for the next time the log file name will be abc0 log Similarly if the log file name is abcn log for the first time where n is any number then for the next time the log file name will be abcm log where m n 1 Message Log LIN messages
108. Due to this any previous manual changes in these files are lost Answer Unions h file generated is intended to use with BUSMASTER only So any manual modification will not be retained If any additional changes or definitions are required then the same can be achieved by creating a new header file and referring it in the cpp file or modifying in the database file itself Question In Message window close window does not work Answer 254 BUSMASTER Frequently Asked Questions This is the intended behavior Message window will always be kept open If the window has to be hidden then uncheck the View gt Message Window menu option Question Error launching BUSMASTER When BUSMASTER is installed and launched error message The application cannot be started because the application config is not correct is displayed Answer Install Net framework 3 5 or above and try again BUSMASTER has dependency with Net Framework BUSMASTER Unused chapters 255 Unused chapters Message Logging User can configure the name of the log file to which the messages will be logged by following the steps given below e Select Configure gt Log e Select log file name You can also navigate to any folder to select the log file If an existing file is selected it will be overwritten if Over Write Mode Otherwise it will append the same log file for each new logging session If a new file name is entered you will be prompted to confirm the new
109. ECONS tE eha rS Description This function computes the length of the initial part of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters NOT from the string pointed to by s2 excluding the terminating null character Returns strcspn returns the length of the substring found strerror convert error number to string Synopsis include lt string h gt Ghena Sicieucicoie Siac EN A Description strerror converts the error number errnum into a string The value of errnum is usually a copy of errno If errnum is not a known error number the result points to an empty string 228 BUSMASTER C Library Functions This implementation of strerror prints out the following strings for each of the values defined in errno h E2BIG Arg list too long EACCES Permission denied EADV Advertise error EAGAIN No more processes EBADF Bad file number EBADMSG Bad message EBUSY Device or resource busy ECHILD No children ECOMM Communication error EDEADLK Deadlock EEXIST File exists EDOM Math argument EFAULT Bad address EFBIG File too large EIDRM Identifier removed EINTR Interrupted system call EINVAL Invalid argument EIO T O error EISDIR Is a directory ELIBACC Cannot access a needed shared library ELIBBAD Accessing a corrupted shared library ELIBEXEC Cannot exec a shared library directly ELIBMAX Attempting to link in more shared libraries than system limit ELIBSCN lib section in a out corrupted EMFILE T
110. Help Copyright 2011 Robert Bosch Engineering and Business Solutions Limited 2 BUSMASTER TOC Contents Introd cti i ciss se secrssscossessecosisos reo sioe cessas ioeie os asa oeae oseo iesise oas soaa csee asise T i What IS MO Pov ccssdescccisicescvscdesccceseccblesedevcccscedescSesdcscccssecescsssdebaccssocebevesdeveccssocesceeesesscessocesceD Gettina SEAHEC ceseacas ce sencecate ceceeks taa setora eave Seas Re O ing M 14 PCV ALIS IOUS is ds cadscaisecsacsd Seeveaistcii ddssccacuiscbesiidascediuintbevaddesdeadelectsst dalecddesetlssadesdens Status Babicccsccesedscelsscccscessdcasecessosiacesecssnsesecsiaseeacabacuscosictesecsseiesosssusesecadedevosscccesscseocoscsescs LS GeeMme ball sscccesscesedicd aditcscesediccssstcssscececcadesstcssscecsccustessebsccesscouccesscosocesedeccseccdbsccssecesoussecesoce LO CAN Configuration Sette Ima TNC yo ooo sass es er e Ae peace eee bade tus eE a are o steven Ab ERS Oa AOE E EES Rne 16 Con Suration ie a e eid ee gh alae Re PAM mes e a A A Rae hes 17 Ba TO I Re UE SAATE EEE EE EEEE EENS tects tue EE E E E 17 Cycle Modes i3 nen a a Ha ti es a eae E ETE 45 Single R n Mode sci sees cose geet scten eeu seuecsstei desnsenrudtpesteets AE A N 46 Enable Disable Piltets 3 4 cceivtansnatani cit he Bs oie ete a tas Ba RRA 47 Node Simulation Configuration ccc cecesceeeeeceseeesecseecsecaesaecacesecsecsseceeeseseeeeeseaeeseeeaessaesaes 48 Node Simulation Examples
111. It is possible to copy the text into clipboard also Trace Window User can select database file from File gt Database gt Import Database menu option Database version mismatch Message data format will be ignored Signal s byte order is set to Intel Little Endian by default Replay failed for D Work Customer request PQ35_46_ACA4N_V5_7_6_E 20091013_MH log Invalid File Header Replay File Operation Failed 5 x Delete Clear Select All Copy to Clipboard To display trace window Select the menu Window gt Trace Window Test Automation Introduction to Test Automation Test Automation is a process of optimizing the effort in testing where the user only needs to define the test cases rather than writing codes in Node programming The test cases may be taken directly as input parameters for the execution of a testing session carried out by Test Automation module of BUSMASTER This means user can expend more time for writing proper test cases rather than implementation issues of the same To be noted this is neither a substitute nor a variant of node programming In the former the actions are predetermined it is only the parameter set both in terms of signal value and time axis that varies whereas in the later the node behavior logic are programmed So the Test Automation is an extension of the tool to simplify the process of carrying out tests of a genre and generating the report A schematic diagram of Test
112. NGE When x is negative the returned value is HUGE_VAL and errno is set to EDOM You can control the error behavior via matherr log10 log10f base 10 logarithms Synopsis include lt math h gt double logl0 double x cloar loeil ie Gel etc x Description log10 returns the base 10 logarithm of x It is implemented as log x log 10 log10f is identical save that it takes and returns float values Returns log10 and log10f return the calculated value See the description of log for information on errors logip logipf log of 1 x Synopsis include lt math h gt double loglp double x cloar lowest loar x 7 BUSMASTER C Library Functions 245 Description log p calculates the natural logarithm of 1 x You can use log p rather than log 1 x for greater precision when x is very small log pf calculates the same thing but accepts and returns float values rather than double Returns log1p returns a double the natural log of 1 x log pf returns a float the natural log of 1 x matherr modifiable math error handler Synopsis include lt math h gt int matherr struct exception e Description matherr is called whenever a math library function generates an error You can replace matherr by your own subroutine to customize error treatment The customized matherr must return 0 if it fails to resolve the error and non zero if the error is resolved When matherr returns a nonzero value no e
113. Ne O BUSMASTER LIN 139 Once a LDF File is imported the Messages DB Messages in LDF file will be populated in Message ID Name List Box as shown in above figure It is also possible to add Non db Messages by typing Message id in List Box Once the Message is selected in List Box Click on Add Message Button to add it in Tx Frame List Configure Master Requests e Select the frame type as Header from the Type group e Dic and data byte values will not be editable for frame Header Configure Slave Responses e Select the frame type as Response from the Type group e The DLC and data byte values can be changed using DLC and Data Bytes edit box windows e Ifthe Message is a DB Messages and if it has signals associated then they will be displayed in Signal List as shown in following figure The Raw Physical value of the signal can be changed by double clicking the corresponding cell 0 Signali D3 15 875000 y 1 Signal2 8 8 000000 v Signal3 8 8 000000 Rys Signal4 0 0 000000 A 3 Signal5 3 3 000000 a 4 Signal 0 0 000000 a l Signal7 0 0 000000 A 5 6 7 Cyclic Transmission of Message The message frame header can be transmitted periodically by Enabling Repetition Cyclic Transmission will be useful to transmit the message with different data bytes periodically Transmission on Event The Message frame header can be sent to the controller on pressing key Each message in Tx Frame List can be assigned an al
114. OO 80 FE J1939 Log File Message Database 1 Database Editor J1939 database editor is similar to CAN database editor User can define a new message based on its PGN and it can have maximum data size of 1785 bytes Timeout Configuration Message Window Signal Watch gt Save Logging gt EER Transmit Node Simulation 2 Database Function User can associate dissociate J1939 database files 90 BUSMASTER CAN File CAN View Window Help Activate Liw T amp OOO Uses Database New s93 B Timeout Configuration Open Ti Message Window gt Close Signal Watch Save lt Logging Associate Transmit Dissociate ae Node Simulation Z Toolbar A separate toolbar is available for J1939 option Transmit 71939 Messages Start Stop Logging Configure Logging i PN Go Online Go Offilne Disconnect Connect Configure Timeouts User can configure timeouts which will be considered when flow control messages are being sent or received Corresponding dialog box can be invoked by clicking the menu J1939 gt Timeout Configuration Timeout s description will appear on clicking the corresponding check box BUSMASTER CAN 91 Configure Timeouts xj Timeouts Broadcast Tb 100 ms Response Tri 200 T Holding Thy 500 ms 750 EN iso Description T2 Maximum wait period for a receiver to receive
115. Only driver buffer will be cleared The status of controller error counter will not be effected Inputs bResetType 1 for Hardware reset of CAN controller 0 for Software reset of CAN controller Returns BUSMASTER CAN 101 GoOnline To enable all event handlers Synopsis UINT GoOnline Description This function will enable all handlers The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case handlers are already enabled i e All Handler toolbar menu is already enabled Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition GoOffline To disable all event handlers Synopsis UINT GoOffline Description This function will disable all handlers The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case handlers are already disabled i e All Handler toolbar menu is already disabled Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition Disconnect To disconnect CAN controller from CAN bus Synopsis UINT Disconnect DWORD dwClientId Description This function will disconnect the tool from CAN bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already disconnected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value
116. P_Anzeige BAP_Data_AnzePhysical BAP_Anzeige BAP_Data_AnzeRaw Point Point Color Line Display Visible Configure i Cancel Select the bus name from the combo box for which you wish to configure graph elements data Click the Configure button in the Configured Elements group box shown in the above dialog Element Selection dialog will be shown M SignalLights P SignalLights Left Physical Speed R SignalLights Left Raw E A Speed f J Physical P SignalLights Right Physical g ysica R SignalLights Right Raw fa roe P Speed EngineRPM Physical aE Statistics R Speed EngineRPM Raw pee ear ysica Error Rate P Speed G Physical E Extended Rx Message R Speed Gear Raw Extended Rx Rate P Temp Temp Physical Extended Rx RTR P Temp Temp_OutSide Physical Extended Tx Message Extended Tx Rate Extended Tx ATR E Message Rate Network Load 2 FEL Dank hlakhuak ened fad Operations Add Delete Delete All OK Cancel BUSMASTER CAN 71 This dialog will show list of database message signals and statistics parameters Each signal will have physical and raw value entries As soon as a signal value physical or raw or both is added in to the list that will be removed from the tree To add an item select the item Physical or Raw value of signal or statistics parameters only from tree and select Add button This will add the item in to element list and will remove the i
117. R Trace MSG ALL Sees GEMS Gams oye msg m_sMsgP msg m_sMsgP msg m_sMsgP roperties m_byChannel ip roperties m_eType MSG_TYP roperties m_eDirection Dal msg m_sMsgProperties m_ul msg m_unDLC msg m_pbyData new BY Ee eis o i2 34 memcpy msg m_pbyData 8 T 45 tmp ExtendedID m_s29BitId m_bySrcAddress E 15 36 5 7 TSA E_DATA R_TX 5 SendMsg amp msg IS Star void Onl ies WOIDIO 7 Trace Data Handler J1939 generated function On ai GI F a End J1939 generated function Onl fe Orare J199 CGemeicaicScl Tumercion On void OnEvent_AddressClaim BYTE byAddre vent_DataConf UINT32 unPGN BYT End J1939 generated function OnPGN_All 3 F an Sy byDest vent_DataConf a 1OWSiae IBY F a F a BOOL bSuccess Event_DataConf Event_AddressClaim ss 52 BUSMASTER CAN i WOO Trace Address Claim Event End J1939 generated function OnEvent_AddressClaim re Braci Jl generarse conection Weile imc Wicalile ime x alin yy f ODO Fe pne WLIO generarcec trunctcion Wiese Start J1939 generated function OnDLL_Load void OnDLL_Load Trace Dll has been loaded TODO Define and Initialise the following variables UINT ReturnValue ReturnValue EnableLogging I mme J139 generac
118. RN void GCC_ EXPOR GCC_EX ERN void GCC_1 EXPOR BUSMASTER CAN 51 OnBus_Disconnect OnPGNID_100 STJ1939_MSG RxMsqg End xf J1939 Function Prototype x Sta void OnTimer_Timer_1000 STJ1939_MSG msg msg msg msg m_sMsgProperties m_byChannel ik m_sMsgProperties m_eType MSG_TYP m_sMsgProperties m_eDirection D msg m_sMsgProperties m_ul 5 msg m_unDLC msg m_pbyData new BY BYTE tmp 12 34 455 D6 memcpy msg m_pbyData tmp 5 rraces Yap SSS rine lslevinyel ese 2 SendMsg amp msg hye fo 8 void OnKey_q unsigned char KeyValue STJL939 MSG MIC D LSE On msg m sMsgProperties m byChannel L msg m_sMsgProperties m_eType MSG_TYP msg m_sMsgProperties m_eDirection DI msg m_sMsgProperties m_ul 5 msg m_unDLC msg m_pbyData new BYT Ie Iwi egg e ES D LSe 3p Aa 55 ExtendedID m_s29BitId m_bySrcAddress ExtendedID m_s29BitId m_bySrcAddress memcpy msg m_pbyData tmp 3 8 J1939 generated function OnTimer_Timer_1000 E DATA R_TX 5 End J1939 generated function OnTimer_Timer_1000 care JiIO39 generare msl Cielo lm Onkey c E_DATA R_TX 5 SendMsg amp msg 1d End J1939 generated function OnKey_q Ves tart J1939 generated function OnPGN_Al1l void OnPGN_A1l1 STJ1939_MSG RxMsg TODO
119. SMASTER can be connected to Physical FlexRay Network using FlexRay Controller Refer Controller Selection section for more Information 3 Connect to Network Once the Cluster amp Controllers are properly configured BUSMASTER can be connected to Network using FlexRay gt Connect menu or the FlexRay Connect Tool bar Button as shown in following figure x B Bt Connect 4 Transmit Messages FlexRay Messages Can be transmitted ovr FlexRay network using FlexRay Tx Window Refer FlexRay Transmission Window Section for more information 5 Monitoring Messages BUSMASTER Message Window can be used to monitor the FlexRay messages of FlexRay Network Refer FlexRay Message Window section for more information Cluster Configuration Introduction To connect BUSMASTER to the FlexRay Network first it has to be configured with the proper FIBEX File This can be done using Cluster Configuration window Configuration To configure the Cluster use FlexRay gt Cluster Configuration menu This will display the Window as shown in following Figure 126 BUSMASTER FlexRay Cluster Configuration Select Channel Channel 1 Import Flexray Database Adding FIBEX File Click the Browse button as shown in above figure to add the FIBEX File Once the file is added the Window will display the Clusters available in Select FlexRay Cluster combo box The Select ECU List Box will display all ECUs configu
120. TER CAN 83 e Deleting a test sequence Right click on any test sequence item A pop up menu will appear Click on Delete item to delete the node e Adding a message To add the messages in send verify etc nodes Click on the required send node Double click on the Add message cell on right side If a database is added in the Test setup node A list box containing the messages will appear Select a message to add in list After adding a new row with Add Message will be added in list box in order to add another message e Delete a message To delete a message double click on that message Select Delete Message in list in order to delete the message Test Suite Executor Test suite executor is used to execute one or more test setup files sequentially The result of execution will be logged into the result file specified in test setup file The collection of test setup files are called test suite Here is the list of different services rendered by the editor Features provided by test suite Executor e Adding a test setup files e Delete a test setup file from the execution e Select Deselect a test setup file for execution e Select Deselect a test case for execution e Execute the test suite Invoking Test suite Executor To open the test suite editor in BUSMASTER click on menu Item CAN gt Test Automation gt Executor The first look of test suite is shown in the following figure W Test Suite Executor DER 500 TestSuite
121. TestCase Name Execution Step I DilvenkatanarayanalMyProgRAMs Verifying Message BAP_A FAIL OH Test caset Verifying Message BAP_D FAIL MH Test Casez verifying Message BAP_HYB FAIL ga ha pete Verifying Message ISO_Le FAIL est Case M1 Test Cases D ivenkatanarayana MyProgRAMs Verifying Message mClima_1 FAIL Verifying Message ISO_G FAIL Untitled TestCase Verifying Message mAllrad_1 FAIL Untitled TestCase Verifying Message ISO_O FAIL Verifying Message mAFS_ FAIL Verifying Message NMH_M FAIL Verifying Message mTP_D FAIL Verifying Message mRDK_ FAIL Verifying Message IMMO_ FAIL Waiting 100 sec for Waitin Sending Messages Started gt Verifying Started Master Pane Result Pane Master pane Using this pane we can add test setup files and select and deselect a test case All the functionalities described in the following section can be performed using this pane Result pane The Result pane will display the current execution status of the test suite Using Executor e Naming a test suite Double click on the top most tree node test suite node on master pane A edit box will appear give a suitable name and press enter e Adding a test Suite Right click on the test suite node A pop up menu will displayed Click on Add Menu A file browser will appear where you can select a test setup file If the file is correct one the executor will add it in test suite and displays all
122. TimeStamp Timestamp BYTE m_byChannel Channel number enum EJ1939_MSG_TYPE m_eType enum EDIRECTION m_eDirection DIR_TX DIR_RX UNION_29 BIT_ID m_uExtendedID 29 bit extended ID STJ1939_ MSG PROPERTIES typedef struct tagSTJ1939_MSG STJ1939_MSG_ PROPERTIES m_sMsgProperties UINT m_unDLC Data length 0 lt m_unDLC lt 1785 bytes BYTE m_pbyData J1939 message data SOMES OMIM S Gr Required Include header file is struct_J1939 h J1939 API Listing BUSMASTER J1939 API Listing SendMsg To send a J1939 message Synopsis UINT SendMsg STJ1939_MSG Description This function will put the message on the J1939 network The message structure STJ1939_MSG will be filled with ID length data channel Inputs STJ1939_MSG Pointer to J1939 Message Structure Returns 1 on successful transmisstion 0 value on failure EnableLogging To start logging Synopsis UINT EnableLogging 106 BUSMASTER CAN Description This function will enable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is already ON DisableLogging To stop logging Synopsis UINT DisableLogging Description This function will disable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1
123. USMASTER Additional Installation 259 td TDM GCC Setup New Installation Download Mirror Choose the location of a download server Please select a download mirror from the following list For a quicker download choose a mirror that is geographically dose to you Select a Mirror Africa Cape Town South Africa TENET Asia Ishikawa Japan JAIST Asia Seoul Korea CDNetworks 1 Asia Seoul Korea CDNetworks 2 Asia Taiwan NCU Asia Tainan Taiwan NCHC Asia Almaty Kazakhstan SPACE KZ Acia Macecaw Ruiecian Federatinnl Citvl an New Installation Choose Components Choose which features of TDM GCC you want installed installed Click Install to start the installation Position your mouse E Components _ Gee E occ MinGW Stable 4 7 2 1 ara ONO eo G binutils MinGW Stable 2 23 1 1 IS see its description 4 mingw runtime MinGW Stable 3 20 2 cf w32api MinGW Stable 3 17 2 1 7 mingw32 make MinGW Stable 3 82 90 2 cvs _ es FA pat few mies eatin ar 4 48 Download 30 1 MB Install 192 MB Make sure Add to path option is selected Click to install 260 BUSMASTER Additional Installation wish to have installed 6 7 mingw runtime MinGW Stable 3 20 2 Position your mouse EAT w32api MinGW Stable 3 17 2 over a component to E Y mingw32 make MinGW Stable 3 82 90 2 cvs see its description 7 gdb MinGW Stable 7 6 1 1
124. af are alternate names for gamma and gammaf The use of lgamma instead of gamma is a reminder that these functions compute the log of the gamma function rather than the gamma function itself The functions gamma_r gammaf_r lgamma_r and lgammaf_r are just like gamma gammaf lgamma and lgammaf respectively but take an additional argument This additional argument is a pointer to an integer This additional argument is used to return the sign of the result and the global variable signgam is not used These functions may be used for reentrant calls but they will still set the global variable errno if an error occurs Returns Normally the computed result is returned When x is a nonpositive integer gamma returns HUGE_VAL and errno is set to EDOM If the result overflows gamma returns HUGE_VAL and errno is set to ERANGE You can modify this error treatment using matherr hypot hypotf distance from origin Synopsis include lt math h gt double hypot double x double y clost aygori He llo enc ox Cloat y Description hypot calculates the Euclidean distance between the origin 0 0 and a point represented by the Cartesian coordinates x y hypotf differs only in the type of its arguments and result Returns Normally the distance value is returned On overflow hypot returns HUGE_VAL and sets errno to ERANGE You can change the error treatment with matherr BUSMASTER C Library Functions 243 ilogb ilogbf g
125. age f T3 5 Maximum wait period for a sender to receive End of Message Acknowledgement after sending last data packet g T4 6 Maximum wait period for a sender to receive another Clear to Send message after receiving one to delay the data TimeoutValue ms Value to be set for the corresponding timeout type Returns TRUE success FALSE if the handler is already in the specified state COM Interface BUSMASTER COM interface Using BUSMASTER Automation Object User can use all the APIs exposed by BUSMASTER as COM interface functions in his own application by following ways FROM VB If the client application is developed using VB the steps are 1 Project gt Add Reference ie Project Build Debug Data Format i Add Windows Form 5 Add Inherited Form a Add User Control a 4dd Inherited Control iB Add Component 4 Add Module yg Add Class T Add New Item Ctrl Shift A eS Add Existing Item Shift Alt 4 Exclude From Project E Show All Files Add Web Reference Set as StartUp Project WindowsApplication Properties 2 Select the CAN_Monitor 1 0 Type Library BUSMASTER CAN 113 References interface ybp x Available References Visual Basic For Applications Cancel Visual Basic runtime objects and procedures visual Basic objects and procedures OLE Automation Browse JKKK CAN Monitor4pop 145 Helper COM Com
126. al variables follow the steps given below 1 Select Global Variables category in the Pane 1 and double click 2 The Pane 3 will become editable and will show global variable block 3 Change this block to Add Delete Modify the global variables Variable declaration will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 F Note e Use global variable block to use macros structure or union definitions The scope of variables and definitions given in this block is throughout the program Edit Function Body User can edit any function body by double clicking the prototype of the function displayed in Pane 1 On double click of the function prototype the function body will be displayed in the Pane 3 and will be ready for editing Variable of Message Type BUSMASTER defines structures for messages define in the database User can use these structures while programming Please follow the steps below to add variable of the message type Edit the function for which database message name is to be added Refer section Edit Function Body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Message A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list Select the check box option in the dialog box Click on Select button NAM BwWNY Ee The selected message variable will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Insert Me
127. als Signal watch list can be interactively populated The following list describes the steps to Add Delete signals e Click on LIN gt Signal Watch gt Activate e A dialog box will be displayed then do right click and select Configure Signals from the menu This will show the signal configuration Window CIM ECu_LINSlave 1ECU_1 ECU_LINSlave1_1 00 Slave1_LINSlave1_1 06 Slave1_LINSlave1_2 00 Slave2_LINSlave 1ECU_1 06 Slave3_LINSlave 1ECU_1 06 Slave4_LINSlave 1ECU_1 O SlaveResp e Select a message and select associated signal from the Signal list Check the signals to move the selected signal in to Watch List Multiple signals can be checked All signals belonging to a message can be added in to the watch list by checking the message check box e Signal from the Watch List can be deleted by unchecking the entry e Signal Watch List can be cleared by selecting Delete All button e Changes will be saved and applied on selection of Ok Cancel will ignore the changes e The Signal Watch List will be saved in the configuration file and will be reloaded during the load of that configuration file BUSMASTER LIN 145 Show Signal Watch Window a e Physical Value Ag ECU_LINSlavel_1 Signal3 8 000000 fg Slavel_LINSlavel_2 Slavel_Response_Error 0 000000 After receiving a message BUSMASTER will update the signal watch window if the signals of received message are included in the signal watch list The
128. an add new messages to the database following the steps given below 1 Select root item in Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select New Message menu option A dialog box will be displayed Key in all the details and select OK button we o The new message name is added as last item in the Pane 1 and the details are displayed in the Pane 2 Edit Message User can edit messages in database by following the steps given below 1 Select message name to be edited in Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit Message menu option A dialog box will be displayed with all the message attributes displayed Key in all the details and select OK button nan b amp w WY The new message name will be added as last item in the Pane 1 and the details are displayed in the Pane 2 Delete Message User can delete messages in database by following the steps given below 1 Select message name to be deleted in Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Delete menu option A delete confirmation message will be displayed Select Yes nn AUN The message name is deleted from Pane and the details are displayed in the Pane 2 Add Signal Message consists of signals To define a signal in message follow steps given below BUSMASTER CAN 57 Click the message name for which you want to add the signal from the Pane 1 The details of the message will be displa
129. an old one that permits reading and writing anywhere in it and a or ab to permit reading anywhere in an existing file but writing only at the end Returns fopen returns a file pointer which you can use for other file operations unless the file you requested could not be opened in that situation the result is NULL If the reason for failure was an invalid string at mode errno is set to EINVAL fputc write a character on a stream or file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt slime aowe alinic Gla N EI fp Description fputc converts the argument ch from an int to an unsigned char then writes it to the file or stream identified by fp If the file was opened with append mode or if the stream cannot support positioning then the new character goes at the end of the file or stream Otherwise the new character is written at the current value of the position indicator and the position indicator oadvances by one For a macro version of this function see putc BUSMASTER C Library Functions 211 Returns If successful fputc returns its argument ch If an error intervenes the result is EOF You can use ferror fp to query for errors fputs write a character string in a file or stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt IiMe ijoulicS Comsc Chgie Sp Iwilllla RON Description fputs writes the string at s but without the trailing null to the file or stream identified by fp Returns
130. as Signal5 3 000000 ye Signal 0 000000 a Signal 0 000000 A Network Statistics Network statistics dialog gives details about the messages transmitted and received on the bus This information includes the number of Data Frames and Error messages transmitted and received by BUSMASTER and current rate of these parameters Also information related to the total Wakeups and its rate will be displayed This is updated once in a second Message rate per second and Network load in terms of Bus traffic is also presented The peak network load will show the peak traffic during that session This information can be used to find bus utilisation Statistics information will be cleared during connect and during controller reset Data Frames Total Data Frames ffr s Errors Total Total Tx Frames TransEr Total TransErr Er s Reception Statistics Total Rx Frames RecEr Total RecEr Er s Status Controller WAKEUPS frs WAKEUPS Total To invoke Network Statistics Dialog select the menu Window gt Network Statistics Signal Watch BUSMASTER LIN 143 User can watch the value of a signal using the signal watch window as and when a message having that signal is received The Physical and Raw values will be listed and updated as and when the message arrives Click on the tool bar button shown below to display the signal watch window 144 BUSMASTER LIN S wall Show Hide Signal Watch Add Delete Sign
131. at the current value of the position indicator and the position indicator advances by one For a subroutine version of this macro see fputc Returns If successful putc returns its argument ch If an error intervenes the result is EOF You can use ferror fp to query for errors putchar write a character macro Synopsis include lt stdio h gt ine jouleGlaeie alinie Gla y dae _ jorbhieelneic ac Vole maSin ime Cla 9 Description putchar is a macro defined in stdio h putchar writes its argument to the standard output stream after converting it from an int to an unsigned char The alternate function _putchar_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns If successful putchar returns its argument ch If an error intervenes the result is EOF You can use ferror stdin to query for errors puts write a character string Synopsis include lt stdio h gt dme Durs COnrae Caeiie S dme DUE Sua VOM teen COnsu hate S Description puts writes the string at s followed by a newline instead of the trailing null to the standard output stream 218 BUSMASTER C Library Functions The alternate function _puts_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns If successful the result is a nonnegative integer otherwise the result is EOF remove delete a file s name Synopsis incl
132. ation will be displayed in the format of slot_id base_cycle repetition Frame Type This Column will tell the Frame type The following are the Frame types displayed in this column e sync e startup e sync startup Null e Data Slot Type This column will tell weather the message is Transmitted Received in static Dynamic Slot Description This column will give the Message Name associated with the ID Cycle This column will display the Cycle in which the message was received Channel This column will display on which channel A B or AB the message was received DLC This column will display the Length of Frame in Bytes 134 BUSMASTER FlexRay Column Explanation Data Byte s This column will display the Data Bytes received Transmitted of the Frame Message Interpretation window It is possible to Monitor the interpretation of a single message in separate window called Message Interpretation Double click on any message in Message window to Activate the Message Interpretation window An Instance of this window is shown in following figure FlexRay Name ABSInfo Signal s Name Physical Value Raw Value GearLock 0 000000 0 Diagnostics 0 000000 0 AccelerationForce 0 000000 0 CarSpeed 0 000000 0 BUSMASTER LIN 135 LIN Introduction LIN Simulation in BUSMASTER Introduction BUSMASTER can be used as master to transmit master requests and as slave to respond to master
133. ause of failure NA GetErrorCounter Getter for both Rx and Tx error given the channel number Synopsis HRESULT GetErrorCounter UCHAR Tx UCHAR Rx INT nChannel Description This function will provide the TX and RX error count of the specified channel from BUSMASTER Inputs Channel number pointers to variables for RX and TX error Cause of failure NA ImportDatabase To import a database file in BUSMASTER Synopsis HRESULT ImportDatabase BSTR DBFilePath Description This function will import the specified file to BUSMASTER Inputs Database file path Cause of failure Dlls are loaded File absent LoadConfiguration To load a configuration file in BUSMASTER Synopsis HRESULT LoadConfiguration BSTR FileName Description This function will load the configuration file specified by client Inputs Configuration file path Cause of failure File absent tool is connected DLLs are loaded 116 BUSMASTER CAN SaveConfiguration To save current configuration file Synopsis HRESULT SaveConfigurationQ Description This function saves the current configuration file of BUSMASTER tool Inputs Cause of failure NA SaveConfigurationAs To save current configuration in a particular file Synopsis HRESULT SaveConfigurationAs BSTR ConfigPath Description To save current configuration in a particular configuration file Inputs BSTR ConfigPath Configuration file path Cause of failure NA
134. ay option then the delay between messages will be calculated from the log file time stamping If this option is not checked then user can specify the delay between messages Replay Mode Replay mode instructs whether the replay file has to be transmitted only once or cyclically In cyclic mode messages will be transmitted periodically User can specify the cycle delay which will be used in between cycles Where as in monoshot or once the replay of messages will happen only once Replay messages option is provided to select the messages to tbe replayed Tx Rx and All messages options are listed All the messages in the log file will be replayed if All is selected If Tx is selected then only the messages logged with Tx flag in the log file will be replayed If Rx is selected then only the messages logged with Rx flag in the log file will be replayed Interactive Replay In interactive replay mode the log file content will be display as list of messages and user can navigate this list and can transmit interested messages User can step through replay messages can skip messages can start message transmission continuously and can insert break points Non Interactive Replay In non interactive mode reply will start during tool connect and will be stopped during tool disconnect In case of cyclic mode the replay will continue till tool disconnect and in monoshot or once all messages will be transmitted only once and replay will start Configur
135. ays the LIN Cluster elements by which user can create or edit elements To Create a new element right click on the element in the element view and select the pop up menu New To Edit a element right click on the element in the element view and select the pop up menu Edit To Delete a element right click on the element in the element view and select the pop up menu Delete Confirmation message is displayed before deleting the element The following LIN Cluster elements are displayed in Element View e Lin Cluster Settings e Master e Slaves e Unconditional Frames e Event Triggered Frames e Sporadic Frames Displayed for LDF version 2 0 and 2 1 e Diagnostic Frames e Signals e Diagnostic Signals e Signal Groups e Codings e Schedule Tables e Node Compositions Displayed for LDF version 2 0 and 2 1 On selecting an element in the element view Property view and additional view will be updated with selected element properties Property View Property view displays the properties of the element selected in the element view Properties are populated based on the type of element selected in the element view Additional View Additional view displays the additional properties of the element selected in the element view Properties displayed in the additional view will vary based on the type of element selected in the element view Table 3 Selected Element Properties displayed Node Master Slave 1 Node Attrib
136. be validated on change of frame type Any message can be converted to RTR by checking the checkbox RTR Signal details of a message will be removed if the message is of type RTR Signal Details For a database message all signals belonging to the message will be displayed in the signal list with its physical value with unit and raw value User shall enter value in terms of physical value of the signal or raw value of the signal If signal descriptor is defined for a signal then physical value will show list of signal descriptors while entering the signal value This makes entering value of a signal Message data bytes physical and raw values will be updated if there is any modification in these fields Any modification in physical value of a signal will be updated appropriately the raw value and data bytes packing and same for raw value and data bytes modification iF Note e Changing data bytes may violate signal boundary validation If the data bytes of a database message are modified directly the message will be made as dirty This will be denoted by a in message list Signal Matrix Signal matrix will show the packing of the signal values in to the data bytes visually This matrix has 64 cells and each represents one bit of the message data byte If message length is lesser then 8 bytes then the invalid bytes will be disabled While selecting a signal from the signal list it will be highlighted in the signal matrix This matrix will
137. be handy to visualize the signal packing in to the data bytes For a RTR message this matrix will be disabled 36 BUSMASTER CAN Signal Definition To get the definition of a signal just double click the signal name from the signal list This will pop up the signal definition dialog from data base The signal Type Length Start Bit Minimum and Maximum value Offset Factor and unit information will be displayed Add Message This button will create new message entry in the selected message block This will take the valued of message details field and will create a new message frame This message will be put in to the message list of selected message block Status A status text will be update for any invalid data entry This will be cleared of the invalid data got modified to a valid one This will show appropriate error messages for an invalid data entry Once valid data got this text will be cleared and consequently the Add Message button will be enabled ma Note e Ifa message is selected from the message list then all modifications will update the selected message e If none of the message is selected then modifications are local and only Add Message will add this data in to the message list as a new message e A new message shall be added any time by selecting the Add Message button This button will be enabled only if the data entered in message details field are valid e Maximum of 64 messages shall be added in to a signal me
138. below image will be displayed 172 BUSMASTER LIN r F UN Cluster properties P X LIN Protocol Version LIN Langauge Version LIN Baud Rate 19 200000 Channel Name 1 Lin protocol and Language versions are read only sections 2 Baud rate of the Lin cluster can be defined in the LIN Baud rate Section 3 Channel Name can be provided in Channel Name section This field is available from LDF2 1 version Master Creating Master ECU When a new LDF File is crated with LDF Editor a master node will with default values will be crated automatically Editing Master ECU Properties To edit the properties of master ECU right click on the Master node item in the Element view and click on Edit A dialog will be displayed as shown below r I Edit Master MasterECU P X Name MasterECU Jitter 0 000000 Time Base 1 000000 OK Cancel To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e ECU name will be checked for its uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel button Deleting Coding Master Node can not be deleted Slave Creating Slave To create or edit slave nodes right click on the Slaves element in the Element View By default one slave will be created on creating new LDF file Create Slave Dialog is as shown below Slave can be created with the following Slave Protocol versions Pro
139. bject pointed to by s2 bcopy copy memory regions Synopsis include lt string h gt WOLel locooy Gomer Claas iin Chaw sout Siza t m Description This function copies n bytes from the memory region pointed to by in to the memory region pointed to by out This function is implemented in term of memmove bzero initialize memory to zero Synopsis include lt string h gt void bzero char b size_t length Description bzero initializes length bytes of memory starting at address b to zero Returns bzero does not return a result index search for character in string Synopsis include lt string h gt Cheii alinclex COMsic Char siowaling iar p Description This function finds the first occurence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by string including the terminating null character This function is identical to strchr Returns Returns a pointer to the located character or a null pointer if c does not occur in string memchr find character in memory Synopsis include lt string h gt WOLC Meili COME VOL Sie alae Gp SLlz2e Emeron Description This function searches memory starting at src for the character c The search only ends with the first occurrence of c or after length characters in particular NULL does not terminate the search BUSMASTER C Library Functions 225 Returns If the character c is found within length characters of sr
140. ble for most frequently used operations Following are the hot keys implemented CTRL ALT C Clear Message Window CTRL ALT I Toggle between Activate Deactivate message interpretation mode CTRL ALT 0 Toggle between Append Overwrite display mode CTRL ALT R Reset Message Window column header positions to default CTRL ALT H Toggle between Hex Dec display format CTRL ALT S Toggle between Start Stop sending messages cyclically CTRL ALT L Toggle between Enable Disable logging of messages BUSMASTER Frequently Asked Questions 253 Frequently Asked Questions Question I can log CAN Bus messages and it looks like I can transmit them but the Tester does not see the messages transmit Answer Follow the steps below 1 Disconnect the BUSMASTER application Then click option gt controller mode if active mode is not selected please select it 2 If baud rate is gt 500 Kbps use 120 ohm terminating resistors between CANH and CANL at both end of cable between USB hardware and ECU Tester Question BUSMASTER is able to receive messages but when message is transmitted application gives error Answer Follow the steps below 1 Measure the voltage between Pin 2 and 3 and Pin 7 an 3 of the SUB D connector Pins of the PCAN USB when system is idle 2 If voltage is not around 2 5v then CAN Transceiver Philips PCA82C251T has got damaged Question BUSMASTER throws up an error saying BUSMASTER _In
141. bn scalbnf scale by integer Synopsis include lt math h gt double scalbn double x int y iel ene m elliomie close x aime Wy p Description scalbn and scalbnf scale x by n returning x times 2 to the power n The result is computed by manipulating the exponent rather than by actually performing an exponentiation or multiplication Returns X times 2 to the power n sqrt sqrtf positive square root Synopsis include lt math h gt double sqrt double x koe Semper ie llkoyenc x l li Description sqrt computes the positive square root of the argument You can modify error handling for this function with matherr Returns On success the square root is returned If x is real and positive then the result is positive If x is real and negative the global value errno is set to EDOM domain error 248 BUSMASTER C Library Functions sin sinf cos cosf sine or cosine Synopsis include lt math h gt double sin double x ipJko ere Saline Gitil eie se F 7 double cos double x rios COSE izlloOzAiG x Description sin and cos compute respectively the sine and cosine of the argument x Angles are specified in radians sinf and cosf are identical save that they take and return float values Returns The sine or cosine of x is returned sinh sinhf hyperbolic sine tan Synopsis include lt math h gt double sinh double x iclkogic Salialaie Gelko
142. c a pointer to the character is returned If c is not found then NULL is returned memcmp compare two memory areas Synopsis include lt string h gt LMG mee Coins VWoulcl Sil Comsic Woulcl SZ Silwe ic in Description This function compares not more than n characters of the object pointed to by s1 with the object pointed to by s2 Returns The function returns an integer greater than equal to or less than zero according to whether the object pointed to by sl is greater than equal to or less than the object pointed to by s2 memcpy copy memory regions Synopsis include lt string h gt Volo mencoy Volo OU Comic wOlCl Shin Siza ic im Pp Description This function copies n bytes from the memory region pointed to by in to the memory region pointed to by out If the regions overlap the behavior is undefined Returns memcpy returns a pointer to the first byte of the out region memmove move possibly overlapping memory Synopsis include lt string h gt void memmove void dst const void src size_t length Description This function moves length characters from the block of memory starting at src to the memory starting at dst memmove reproduces the characters correctly at dst even if the two areas overlap Returns The function returns dst as passed memset set an area of memory Synopsis include lt string h gt void memset const void dst int c size_t length De
143. classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for decimal digits and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isdigit Returns isdigit returns non zero if c is a decimal digit 0 9 islower lower case character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt dime alisslowwese ine 204 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description islower is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for minuscules lower case alphabetic characters and 0 for other characters It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef islower Returns islower returns non zero if c is a lower case letter a z isprint isgraph printable character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt sibTahteaumells osranleTaiten ine C e int isgraph int c Description isprint is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for printable characters and O for other character arguments It is defined only when isascii c is true or c is EOF You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining either macro
144. cleanup functions you have enrolled with atexit Second files and streams are cleaned up any pending output is delivered to the host system each open file or stream is closed and files created by tmpfile are deleted Returns exit does not return to its caller getenv look up environment variable Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt char getenv const char name Description getenv searches the list of environment variable names and values using the global pointer char environ for a variable whose name matches the string at name If a variable name matches getenv returns a pointer to the associated value Returns A pointer to the string value of the environment variable or NULL if there is no such environment variable labs long integer absolute value Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt long labs long i Description labs returns the absolute value of i also called the magnitude of i That is if i is negative the result is the opposite of i but if i is nonnegative the result is i The similar function abs uses and returns int rather than long values Returns The result is a nonnegative long integer Idiv divide two long integers Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt Iebing tc dev komme im tome cl Description Divide returning quotient and remainder as two long integers in a structure Idiv_t Returns The result is represented with the structure typedef struct lon
145. count elements each of size size into the file or stream identified by fp fwrite may copy fewer elements than count if an error intervenes fwrite also advances the file position indicator if any for fp by the number of characters actually written Returns If fwrite succeeds in writing all the elements you specify the result is the same as the argument count In any event the result is the number of complete elements that fwrite copied to the file getc read a character macro Synopsis include lt stdio h gt SLING Gece Pha S29 p Description getc is a macro defined in stdio h You can use getc to get the next single character from the file or stream identified by fp As a side effect getc advances the file s current position indicator For a subroutine version of this macro see fgetc Returns The next character read as an unsigned char and cast to int unless there is no more data or the host system reports a read error in either of these situations getc returns EOF You can distinguish the two situations that cause an EOF result by using the ferror and feof functions getchar read a character macro Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int getchar void int _getchar_r void reent Description getchar is a macro defined in stdio h You can use getchar to get the next single character from the standard input stream As a side effect getchar advances the standard input s current position ind
146. cription Signal Value mP om ow i mtP_Dyn_Getriede_2 Pane 1 Ren foeta 0 mtr Dyn Getrkbe_1 Message ppa View s Pane 2 ne pmpsi s Signal Message 1 mT Om Disg Pua 3 1 mtr Dm _Dis 16 Description List Details View mTP Dyn _Disg_15S Left Pane This will have the names of all messages listed in a tree fashion Will be called Pane 1 Right Pane This pane will display the details of each message that you select from the Pane1 Will be called Pane 2 By default no database is loaded Once the user imports a database it will be stored across sessions This is called the active database which will be used for interpretation and by the function editor Import Database User can select any number of BUSMASTER generated database and make them as active databases 1 Select CAN gt Database gt Associate menu option An open file dialog will be displayed 2 Select the databases and click on Open button Dissociate Database User can Dissociate any number of active database from the application 1 Select CAN gt Database gt Dissociate menu option Following dialog box will be displayed 56 BUSMASTER CAN Dissociate Database xj C Documents and Settings anilkor My Documents test h C Documents and Settings anilkor My Documents testih C Documents and Settings anilkor My Documents testih 2 cores 2 Select the databases and click on Dissociate button Add Message User c
147. d function OnTimer_new_100 void OnTimer_new_100 Initialise message structure STCAN_MSG sMsg sMsg m_unMsgID 0x20 Message ID sMsg m_ucEXTENDED FALSE Standard Message type sMsg m_ucRTR FALSE Not RTR type sMsg m_ucDLC 8 Length is 8 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 0 10 Lower 4 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 1 20 Upper 4 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 2 30 Upper 4 Bytes sMsg m_ucChannel 1 SendMsg sMsqg End BUSMASTER generated function OnTimer_new_100 Start BUSMASTER generated function OnBus_Connect void OnBus_Connect Trace Bus connected End BUSMASTER generated function OnBus_Connect Start BUSMASTER generated function OnBus_Disconnect void OnBus_Disconnect Trace Bus Disconnected End BUSMASTER generated function OnBus_Disconnect Database Editor BUSMASTER database consists of information about expected message You can create a database of messages to be transmitted or received over CAN bus Each message has a unique ID and name Each message has upto eight bytes of data You can define the length of message in bytes Each message can consist of one or more signals In a message each signal has start bit and length no two signals can overlap Signal can have an offset a multiplication factor and engineering units These three informatio
148. d in the Action frame 74 BUSMASTER CAN Action This setting will be taken during mouse drag Action MOVE will move the graph while dragging the mouse in graph window If ZOOM is selected the mouse drag will result in zooming the graph TRACK will show the value at mouse cursor point in terms of selected element Y axis and X time axis values The actions zoom and move are combined with active axis If action is MOVE and active axis is X then mouse drag will move the graph only in X Axis Similarly if action is ZOOM and active axis is X then mouse drag will zoom the graph only in X Axis time scale zooming Track will work independent of active axis It will show both X and Y value of mouse point This will freeze the graph from mouse drag actions and XY scale will remain same Range To set time axis value for all graphs this range option is given This has inputs from and to This will be the time axis min and max values Valid time scale value shall be set by selecting the button Apply Apply will validate time entered time scale value and will set the X axis time value Decimal values could be entered to see the graph more closely E g e From 1 To 10 Sec e From 2 23 To 2 24 Sec Auto Range To set optimal values for time axis and Y scale for all graphs auto range option is given This will find the min and max time value to set optimal X Axis value Each graph will set its own Y axis value such that the graph will occupy whole g
149. d r quot To divide long rather than int values use the similar function Idiv ecvt ecvtf fcvt fcvtf double or float to string Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt char ecvt double val Gaee seevier losie yell char fcvt double val eimene wreyc itll ete well Line Chews linc cece dine sei p dime CaaS amc Clocioc ane SSCM ioe Clayeslimeils alice ClaGjow aliqic S alin Clecaieils alist Cleciot aioe SG Sa ne Description ecvt and fcvt produce null terminated strings of digits representating the double number val ecvtf and fcevtf produce the corresponding character representations of float numbers The stdlib functions ecvtbuf and fevtbuf are reentrant versions of ecvt and fcvt The only difference between ecvt and fcvt is the interpretation of the second argument chars or decimals For ecvt the second argument chars specifies the total number of characters to write which is also the number of significant digits in the formatted string since these two functions write only digits For fcvt the second argument decimals specifies the number of characters to write after the decimal point all digits for the integer part of val are always included 196 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Since ecvt and fevt write only digits in the output string they record the location of the decimal point in decpt and the sign of the number in sgn After formatting a number decpt contains t
150. d to move the selected signal in to Watch List Multiple signals can be added by multiple selection and selecting Add button All signals belonging to a message can be added in to the watch list be selecting Add All button e Double clicking the signal name in Signal List will add the signal in to the Watch List e Signal from the Watch List can be deleted by selecting the entry and by selecting Delete button Multiple signals can be deleted by multiple selection e Signal Watch List can be cleared by selecting Delete All button e Changes will be saved and applied on selection of Ok Cancel will ignore the changes e The Signal Watch List will be saved in the configuration file and will be reloaded during the load of that configuration file Note To get details of a signal right click the signal and select Signal Details menu item This will show C signal details like start bit length type etc in a dialog Show Signal Watch Window To popup signal watch window select the toolbar button explained in the previous section and select Show This will show the Signal Watch Window 68 BUSMASTER CAN E Signal Watch CAN Message Signal Physical Value vMSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_RND 3 000 AvMSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_SIG_E 2 000 AvMSG1_WFS_Anfrage MSG1_WFS_P Klasse 1 000 After receiving a message BUSMASTER will update the signal watch window if the signals of received message are included in the signal watch list The signal wa
151. de lt string h gt Cae varie eonen SeN A Description strlwr converts each characters in the string at a to lower case 230 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Returns strlwr returns its argument a strncat concatenate strings Synopsis include lt string h gt Clague CicicimGeie Clague CSc COMSic Cligue Sire Save ie IkSiavesela 2 Description strncat appends not more than length characters from the string pointed to by src including the terminating null character to the end of the string pointed to by dst The initial character of src overwrites the null character at the end of dst A terminating null character is always appended to the result Warnings Note that a null is always appended so that if the copy is limited by the length argument the number of characters appended to dst isn 1 Returns This function returns the initial value of dst strncmp character string compare Synopsis include lt string h gt LMG SEIAnK Io COMsc Cligic a CoMmsic Cligie lo Salwe_ic Ileineicla p Description strncmp compares up to length characters from the string at a to the string at b Returns If a sorts lexicographically after b strncmp returns a number greater than zero If the two strings are equivalent strncmp returns zero If a sorts lexicographically before b strncmp returns a number less than zero strncpy counted copy string Synopsis include lt string h gt chari Sen
152. depvessduuiesvanssaees 120 DTA STIOS TLCS i n e rE coke E E E E RR A R E de couones E AS 121 Diagnostics Setting Soer oeer a E e e ENE SEEEN Eer eS Eae S 121 Diagnostics Main Window eceesseseescescecseeseecseceaecaeceseeseceseeseceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeaeeeas 123 BV GXIRAY sassiscsabicincnccesstudeiuoidachccsdsasoavedicenssage T LO FlexRay Simulation in BUSMASTER ow cece ceeesseceneaeceecesecseeseeseeeeseaseseeeaeesaecaesnaeeaee 125 Cluster Conf Suration ss loaders cescsseesscy ovshsesuncsushsursy covtedueiines satsceucorsacssa soaue ove shvovse cussb angie EON 125 FlexRay Controller Configuration ccc ecceececseesecscessecssesseceeceseceeceseeeeeeseseeeeseseeeeaeeeaessaeeaeenaes 127 BUSMASTER TOC 3 Trans MESSAGES r r a opsess caus rae E sab ered dossh dove te EEE Oe usu any EE SEES 128 FlexRay Message Windowsni ceense eese ee a E R e r TaS Ee EESE Esty 132 LIN Simulation in BUSMASTER creere es cecesscesesesenssensconsneeconssee a TE a Eip OEEO R o SREO E E 135 LIN Cluster Configuration eee esea E Eaa aE EE E eS Eeee S TES CES TEE AEE NOSS 135 LIN Schedule Table Configuration ennerien n AeA RE a A EEE SKEE ENEA 136 LIN Controller Configuration sereine ee ipe aian Ee Eae Er ori E EE Ee pi Sre ian 138 Transit MeS SAPE S ear a rert eare aE eee e e e eaaa Ee SET pease SEEE terrane es 138 Connect and Disconnects csisecci secede st cine E E debs etna el a E ea I ESEE 139 TEIN Message Windows siiiescstcoutes vacroevan vesseethh deee
153. der filename under Include Header category to be edited in the Pane 1 and Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit A dialog box will be displayed Click on Browse button to select the required header file and click on OK button The selected header file will be replaced with the previous header file in the source file in the Pane 2 and also under Include Headers category in Pane 1 Delete Handlers User can delete Header files Message Handlers Timer Handlers Key Handlers Error handlers DLL handlers and Utility Functions in source file opened for editing to do so follow the steps given below 1 A pop up menu will be displayed Select Delete Aconfirmation message is displayed Select Yes nan AUN Select the item to be deleted in the Pane 1 and right click The selected item s definition will be deleted from the source file in the Pane 2 and also in Pane 1 Add Message Handler 1 2 3 Select Message Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed On selecting Add menu A dialog as shown below pops up Add Message Handler EES Based g hM C Message ID Range C Message ID C AllRx Messagels Message ID os Message ID Range From o To ox Database Message List Diag4lINode_req DiagRemoteDiag_req DiagUSDT_request_NodeO0 DiagUSDT_request_Nodef1 DiagUSDT_request_NodeO2 DiagUSDT_request_NodeQ3 DiagUSDT_request_NodeO4 DiagUSDT_re
154. displayed Select Yes de R a The signal and its attributes are deleted from signal details list in Pane 2 Selecting the signal details from the list and clicking on Delete Signal button will do the same Add Signal description User can add the give description for a value of a signal please follow the steps below to do so 1 Click the message name for which you want to add description for the signal from the Pane 1 The details will be displayed in the Pane 2 Select the signal in the signal details list in Pane 2 Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Add Description menu option A dialog box will be displayed nab WwW bd Enter description and the signal value and click on OK button The new signal description and value are displayed in the signal description list Selecting the signal details from the list and clicking on New Desc button can do the same Edit Signal Description and Signal value User can edit the give description for the value of a signal please follow the steps below to do so 1 Click the message name for which you want to edit description for the signal from the Pane 1 The details will be displayed in the Pane 2 2 3 Select the signal description and value from the signal description list in Pane 2 4 Right click A pop up menu will be displayed 58 BUSMASTER CAN 5 Select Edit Description menu option A dialog box will be displayed 6 Enter description and the signal
155. e Creating Event Triggered Frames To create Event Triggered frame right click on the Event Triggered Frame element in the element view and click on popup menu New Create Event Triggered Frame dialog is as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 179 Frame Name Length Byte s Publishers E Door left 4 Door Left E Door Righ 4 Door Right 1 General Properties e Name Name of the frame which should follow C identifier rules and should be unique e ID Identifier of the frame 0 59 e Collision Resolution Table Using drop down select the Schedule table to be referred in case of Collision 2 Associating Frames e Check the Unconditional frames to be mapped to the Event Triggered frame from the Associated Frames list The following validations are performed e Frame name will be checked for its uniqueness e Frame Id will be checked for its uniqueness e Checked if selected Associated frames belong to the Collision resolving table To discard the changes click on Cancel button Editing Event Triggered Frames To edit existing Event Triggered Frame right click on the Event Triggered frame item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Event Triggered Frame dialog is displayed as shown below 180 BUSMASTER LIN Edit EventFrame Door_Opet Sem Frame Name Length Byte s Publishers Subscribers Door left 4 Door Left W Door Righ 4 Door Right MasterECu Deleting Even
156. e et o Add OK Cancel Filter List It is a list of filters that are identified by the name The name of the filter should be unique and can have any kind of special characters also The second parameter tells about the type of the filter pass or stop Pass filter allows only the configure message or range of message to pass On the other size stop filter blocks the configured messages These filters shall be used in display logging and replay filters Filter Details This section shows list of message names ID and range along with ID type message frame type direction and channel number Type is denoted by different icons Selecting an entry from the list updates the details of the filter in Filter Attributes section Filter Attributes Filter attributes gives more details of selected filter entry Message Name or ID in case of single id filtering and message ID range in case of range filter will be update Direction field will show whether the message is transmitted or received If it is all then direction will be ignored Channel filed associates the message with particular channel Channel all makes the message independent of channels Database message names shall be selected from the Message ID combo box Message ID shall be directly typed in this combo box If the filter is for a range of messages then the Range radio button shall be selected This will enable range edit boxes Filter attributes shall be select
157. e In overwrite mode this option will be disabled to avoid rolling of selection e Selection will be update only during display update Transmit Messages Messages can be send over CAN bus by following the steps given below Select CAN gt Transmit gt Configure menu option This will display the dialog as shown is figure below Getting Started 32 BUSMASTER CAN E Configure Transmission Messages DE led Message Blocks Tx Message List CyCuc 100k Bez g 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 OOI OnTime CYCLIC 100e PAG 977 RX_DOOR_AND_KEY_S 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 COI 78 RX_TORQUE_ REQUEST 8 000 054 054 000 000 000 000 00 EG 85 RX_COMMUNICATION_ 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 00i BEA Tx_080_3FOR_FFD 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 Named ID fn Dec DLC prerisremsssismarsssensre Data BytegeenneesnZorrennsessmmase 4 Channel Type Block Detae FRX TORQUELR e ooo osa foss fooo ooo foo ooo foco fi Sid C Exd 7 RTA Name JECU_Transmt Signal Details 0 Tx Mode G Cycle Monoshot AN Cont3pCll ToidritvT ype Woe he ES Ae TIRLT_Tesa I Time Delay fi00 msec A TIRST_Toig Key ora Mets Delay Between Message blocks I Time Delay fic msec 5 0 1 1 0 0 l ool ojo oja occ ojo oj 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o olojoloj ee coe ce S S w o olo olo Sjn CA TA e Add a message block and select the trigger as On Key or On Time or both Select a name of message
158. e Replay Replay can be configured using the three parameters mentioned below e File Name e Mode e Time Delay There are two modes of Replay e Single Run The messages in the file will be replayed only once e Cyclic The messages in the file will be replayed cyclically The time delay can be set to control the delay between two consecutive messages and between two consecutive replay of the same file The following field controls delays 26 BUSMASTER CAN e Recorded time delay in the log file e Time delay between messages e Time delay between cycles Applicable for only cyclic mode Time delay 1 and 2 are mutually exclusive irrespective of replay mode This time delay is the time duration between transmission of two consecutive messages The minimum time delay in milliseconds is one millisecond On clicking the OK button a Message Replay Window will be displayed This will contain all messages in the replay file By default first message in the replay window will be selected Please see section Replay a File for further details User can configure to replay all message logged or only transmitted message or only received message by selecting the option from Replay Message Type It can be done during configuration of replay Message Display Message Filter Filters for message display can be configured by selecting CAN gt Message Window gt Configure and by selecting Filter tab This will show list of filters co
159. e changes Note Function Editor BUSMASTER can work as a programmable node over a CAN bus User can program different event handlers using function editor The programming language is C Five types of event handlers are supported e Message Handlers e Timer Handlers e Key Handlers e Error Handlers e DLL Handlers These function handlers when built and loaded are executed on e Receipt of a Message e Elapse of a time interval e Press of a Key e Detection of error or change in error state e Loading unloading of DLL User can also include Header File names add Global Variables and Utility Functions while programming the event handlers All these functions can be edited and saved in a file with extension c The source file can be built to a DLL This DLL can be loaded dynamically There are three panes in function editor as shown below e Left Pane Will be called Pane 1 e Right Top Pane Will be called Pane 2 e Right Bottom Pane Will be called Pane 3 Pane 1 displays the list of functions included header files and global variables defined Pane 2 displays the contents of the source file Through Pane 3 User can edit the body of function selected 40 BUSMASTER CAN EOL_WRITE_AUDIO123 EOL_WRITE_AUDIOS EOL_WRITE_DAB C Program Files RBIN CAN vas CAN vas c 4 0 Include Headers include lt Windows h gt D include lt struct h gt D include lt string h gt E include lt stdio h gt fi Me
160. e replays in two different modes e Single Run Mode and e Cyclic Mode Please find more information on these modes on respective sections Cyclic Mode Find more details to configure replay in cyclic mode in section Log and Replay Interactive Replay In interactive replay mode replay window will be displayed during connect Follow the steps given below to start replay e Select a block of messages from Message Replay Window e Select CAN gt Replay gt Go or tool bar button Go shown in figure below to start sending message cyclically one by one starting with first one in message block Message replay window will be freezed If mode is Cyclic then the selected messages from Replay window will be sent By default only the first message will be selected After sending all the selected messages it waits for the delay mentioned in Delay between replay cycles Then the cycle will be repeated e Select CAN gt Replay gt Stop or Stop tool bar button shown in figure below to stop replay Once the replay is stopped Replay Message Window will be activated again 46 BUSMASTER CAN 0O00 L Stop Start Skip Step Replay window will be closed during tool disconnect Non Interactive Replay In non interactive replay mode replay will start during tool connect First filters will be applied on the messages from the log file Then replay will start with the filtered set and will continue transmitting messages continuously If
161. e runecioA Onin toei fe Heavier J1939 generare rumetion Ondt Wioll eyel void OnDLL_Unload Trace D1ll is unloaded TODO Derine ane Imieialisge the rollowing variables UINT ReturnValue ReturnValue DisableLogging End J1939 generated function OnDLL_Unload le rare J939 gersrarcac cinmerion Onriner ew 10 lt void OnTimer_dew_10 STJ1939_MSG msg msg m_sMsgProperties m_byChannel 1 msg m_sMsgProperties m_eType MSG_TYPE_ msg m_sMsgProperties m_eDirection DIR_TX msg m_sMsgProperties m_uExtendedID m_s29BitId m_bySrcAddress 5 WSC Gt CADE Sve msg m pbyData new BYTE 15 Byra cwoll 112 34 45 SG V N memcpy msg m_pbyData tmp 5 rrace Vial s S mine leleviaxelese 2 SendMsg amp msg End J1939 generated function OnTimer_dew_10 es Orare GLOSS CemeicaicScl inuMciciGin Omsws Comece void OnBus_Connect Trace Bus Disconnected End J1939 generated function OnBus_Connect Start J1939 generated function OnBus_Disconnect void OnBus_Disconnect Trace Bus Disconnected End J1939 generated function OnBus_Disconnect Start J1939 generated function OnPGNID_100 void OnPGNID_100 STJ1939_MSG RxMsqg Trace MSG ALL STJ1939_MSG msg msg m_sMsgProperties m_byChannel 2 msg m_sMsgProperties m_eType MSG_TYPE_ msg m_sMsgProperties m_eDirection
162. e347 C frame348 C frame349 Or WOOK WH OO NbDOrY bpp DH N gt rrrrrrrr pb Transmitting Message Over FlexRay BUS 130 BUSMASTER FlexRay After Configuring the messages they will be displayed in Transmit Window as shown in below figure Click on the check box beside a message to select the message for transmission Once the BUSMASTER Connected to the FlexRay network all the selected message will be sent on the network in their schedule time a 67 Configure Transmission Messages FLEXRAY Data Byte View HEX Signal View index tc tt sl Updating Data Bytes To Change the Data bytes of a message click on the message This will display the current data bytes of the Message in Data Window as shown in below image To change the Data bytes double click on the required data byte Use Tab or Arrow Keys to move to the next data bytes Click on Update button to Apply the changes BUSMASTER FlexRay 131 a Configure Transmission Messages FLEXRAY CEA Signal View To View the Signals of a any Frame click on it and select the Signal View This will display the signals amp their Raw Physical values as shown in below 132 BUSMASTER FlexRay g 67 Configure Transmission Messages FLEXRAY Tx Frame List Message Name Frameid_ BaseCyde Repetition _ _Channel A s Data Length _ Slot Type frame346 C frames24 frameA frame
163. ecaeeeseseseeseeees 230 Strpbrk lt fnd Chars I Sing ee repre ee nes bess oeuceeveest cues voee dvessstap caspase fees AENEAS EER ERS 230 strrchr reverse search for character in String seesssscesecseeeceeceseceeeeceecsaeeetsccnecneeseeaes 231 stropi find mitial Match sc coisa seers e deseseesoufoes cated a teeta tedeedbee chess reden ieee 231 Strstr find string SCQMENE elec eee rer or eon E aa EEE EEN e e Paak ERTI 231 stitok get next token from SINS y eee ee eee cseeceecseeesecaeaeceeesecseeeseeeeseseeseaeeeneeaes 232 Strupr force String tO Uppercase sitenin ene o eE ee Ea neee Ea EAE eira EE 232 SERMON CANS TOL SINE ysies oieri E E E E EE E E ES 232 Time FUNCUONS rr era a nak sie E EE EE E A diet al VEETEE 233 asctime format time aS SIND semien ece eseesececeeceseteeeeceecsseseesecnecaeeaeesecaecaseecsaecaseecerenaeeees 233 clock cumulative processor tiMe sees ceeeceeceseeeseeeeeeeceseeeaeeseecaecsaecaecsaeesecsseeeeneees 233 ctime convert time to local and format as String eee eeceseeeeeeseeeeeceeecseceenaeenaes 234 difftime subtract twO times eee eee eee ceeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeecseeseecseesaecsecsaecseceaeeseseeeeeeeees 234 gmtime convert time to UTC traditional form ee ee ceeeeeceeeeeecneeesececeseeneensees 234 localtime convert time to local representation eee eee eseeseecneeeseceeceaececeeeseensees 235 mktime convert time to arithmetic representation eee eee eeeeseeeeeceeeneceeeeseense
164. ecords how much of the file your program has already read Many of the stdio functions depend on this position and many change it as a side effect You can use fseek to set the position for the file identified by fp The value of offset determines the new position in one of three ways selected by the value of whence defined as macros in stdio h SEEK_SET offset is the absolute file position an offset from the beginning of the file desired offset must be positive SEEK_CUR offset is relative to the current file position offset can meaningfully be either positive or negative SEEK_END offset is relative to the current end of file offset can meaningfully be either positive to increase the size of the file or negative See ftell to determine the current file position Returns fseek returns 0 when successful If fseek fails the result is EOF The reason for failure is indicated in errno either ESPIPE the stream identified by fp doesn t support repositioning or EINVAL invalid file position fsetpos restore position of a stream or file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt IME TSSCINOS FILS i COMES IoxoOs_ ic jxOs p Description Objects of type FILE can have a position that records how much of the file your program has already read Many of the stdio functions depend on this position and many change it as a side effect You can use fsetpos to return the file identified by fp to a previous positi
165. ed as a hexadecimal value a string with a leading 0 and no x is treated as octal all other strings are treated as decimal If base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the conversion radix as described above If the subject string begins with a minus sign the value is negated Finally a pointer to the first character past the converted subject string is stored in ptr if ptr is not NULL If the subject string is empty or not in acceptable form no conversion is performed and the value of s is stored in ptr if ptr is not NULL The alternate function _strtol_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns strtol returns the converted value if any If no conversion was made 0 is returned strtol returns LONG_MAX or LONG_MIN if the magnitude of the converted value is too large and sets errno to ERANGE BUSMASTER C Library Functions 201 strtoul string to unsigned long Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt unsigned long strtoul const char s char ptr int base ioimsalCorerel Long siciec ull se wouel icecine Const Ched S Caer joie Har Dase Description The function strtoul converts the string s to an unsigned long First it breaks down the string into three parts leading whitespace which is ignored a subject string consisting of the digits meaningful in the radix specified by base for example 0 through 7 if the value of base is 8 and a traili
166. ed based on the filter requirements Event radio button shall be selected for Event filter This will enable Event combo box from which event type can be selected Channel combo box will enabled BUSMASTER LIN 149 The Add button in the Filter Attributes section will add configured filter in to the selected named filter list This button will be disabled in case of invalid parameter entered by the user and appropriate error message will be displayed in the status bar Once the filter is added in to the Filter List then the name of the filter will appear in the Filter Configuration List to select Any modification on these filter will immediately reflect in the all modules that are using these filters Filter list will be saved in configuration file and will be updated while loading a configuration file While loading a configuration file created with BUSMASTER 3 06 02 X XXX version one filter entry will be created with the previous filter information Message Display Message Filter Filters for message display can be configured by selecting LIN gt Message Window gt Configure and by selecting Filter tab This will show list of filters configured for Message Display Configure Message Display LIN Fiter DB NDB Buffer Filter List Y Display_Fitter Y RTR Filter Display Filter To configure display filter list select Configure button which will list available filters and selected filters 150 BUSMASTER LIN
167. ed signal will be unmapped from all associated frames Publisher and the Subscribers Signal Group Creating Signal Groups To create Signal group right click on the Signal Group element in the element view and click on pop up menu New A dialog Box as Shown in below image will be displayed f a Create Signal Group P xs Name Size decimal Signals Signal Name Offset decimal gt 1 F Door left Sign a 2 E Door left Sign a 3 E Door Right Sig 4 Door Right_Sig 5 MasterReqBo 6 MasterRegBi 7 MasterReqB2 1 General Properties e Name Name of the Signal Group should follow C identifier rules and should be unique in Signal and Signal Group List e Size The size of the signal group can be defined here 2 Signals e This list the all the signal defined in the LIN Cluster Signals can be added deleted from the group by checking unchecking Editing Signal Group 1 To edit existing Signal group right click on the required Signal group item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Signal lt Signal Group Name gt dialog will be displayed as shown below 186 BUSMASTER LIN P a SignalGroupDig xs Name SignalGroup Size decimal 63 Signals Signal Name Offset decimal Door left Sign 0 Door left Sign 8 Door Right Sic E Door Right Sig MasterReqBo MasterReqBi MasterReqB2
168. ed signals can be used to do the same When user triggers this event the following dialog pops out Currently there are 4 types of waves supported 1 Sine Wave 2 Cos Wave 3 Triangular Wave 4 Sawtooth Wave BUSMASTER CAN 65 Signal Properties Signal Type Sawtooth Wave v Cydes 4 Amplitude 10 Sampling Time Period 56 msec Frequency 2 Hertz AutoCorrect Sampling Points The dialog will be loaded with default waveform settings i e a sine wave with amplitude 10 frequency 1 and sampling time period 125 User can make appropriate changes to the wave by choosing signal type desired amplitude and frequency Ok button click will add the signal to Defined signals list The sampling Time Period which is last modified will be applicable to all the signals For example if for first signals you choose the sampling time period as 125 and for the second signal you choose the sampling time period as 100 Then the sampling time period applicable is 100 for first and second signals AutoCorrect Sampling Points checkbox when checked will calculate the sampling time period for a given frequency such that there will be at least 8 points in the a cycle and the graph does not distort Maximum frequency that can be set is 125 and Sampling Time Period is 32767 Now if user wants to transmit the defined signals make sure the application is in connected state and use the menu option CAN gt Waveform Messages
169. eesaececeseeneesees 193 atexit request execution of functions at program CXit eee esse eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 193 atof atoff string to double or float eee ceeseeseceeeeeseeseeessecsaeseesesseeneeseeseeaesaeeeeaeeas 193 atoi ALO 2 SMING TONLE BET esses 5s e sve spas seuss beose vases deve shave dues outa tae E OPNE ENRERE tee 194 bsearch binary seatchy 2 ccc0gate hua stalk ieee dite agin alae 194 calloc allocate Space for arrays cscs secstseae cecesess censeele nE E EEEa R EERE 195 Civ divide tWO INte QELS earte eers pesat EEEE Eaa EERE S er SeS rE S ES NEEE SER 195 ecyt ecvtf fevt fevtf double or float to string se sssseseessessesessesersreeesersessrsessessesrrsrsersee 195 gvcvt gcvtf format double or float as string esseeeeeseeeseseerseerstserreersrsrersersrrrersrsrerree 196 ecvtbuf fevtbuf double or float to string eeseseeseeeeereseesserisrsrsssessrsrerstsrerrersesereserseseees 196 exit ENA program CXECUTIONL eee ceeeceseeeeceecesecesceeeeeeeeseeeaeeseecaesseecaecsaecaecaeeaeenaeeaees 196 getenv look up environment Variable elect cee ce ceseeeeceseeeeceseeeeeeseeeaecaeecaecaesaeenaes 197 labs long integer absolute Value eee cee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseecsaesaecseceaecnessseeeeeeaees 197 Idiv divide two TONS MLE SOLS s menirs eia e EE E E EEEE ES ERER E 197 malloc realloc free manage MeEMOTy eseesesesresseeerrseesrsreererestersserersreeestenrrrrereerseere 19
170. eic Xe Description sinh computes the hyperbolic sine of the argument x Angles are specified in radians sinh x is defined as sinhf is identical save that it takes and returns float values Returns The hyperbolic sine of x is returned When the correct result is too large to be representable an overflow sinh returns HUGE_VAL with the appropriate sign and sets the global value errno to ERANGE You can modify error handling for these functions with matherr tanf tangent Synopsis include lt math h gt double tan double x rioei ganu ElLOaie 2 2 Description tan computes the tangent of the argument x Angles are specified in radians tanf is identical save that it takes and returns float values Returns The tangent of x is returned tanh tanhf hyperbolic tangent Synopsis include lt math h gt double tanh double x close gceuaani r Losie xF BUSMASTER C Library Functions 249 Description tanh computes the hyperbolic tangent of the argument x Angles are specified in radians tanh x is defined as sinh x cosh x tanhf is identical save that it takes and returns float values Returns The hyperbolic tangent of x is returned Miscellaneous Macros and Functions This chapter describes miscellaneous routines not covered elsewhere unctrl translate characters to upper case Synopsis include lt unctrl h gt Gasna Uliaveneiell alia e sige wirer lent ime el
171. enees 235 strftime flexible calendar time formatter elec cee ceeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 235 time get current calendar time as single numbet 0 0 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeneenes 236 C Math Library FUNCIONS ie n eea isco tbe E e E a EEE TUET EESTE 236 ACOS ACOSH EI rE I a E E EEEE EE E E EEEE EE E EE 236 acosh acoshf inverse hyperbolic cosine eseeseeessseeseesreerrrrererrsserrsserrrserersreerrreeresrsee 237 ASIN ASINE ALC SINE sesdsaceieeeccsvteces SoA EE EE E EE E E EES 237 asinh asinhf inverse hyperbolic sine sseeeseseseeseeeesesrereseesrsrsrerrsesrsserrrserrrsresrerenrrersee 237 atan atant arc tan Sent srei esoe S oa an eai R E E E hte RE R nine REES 238 atan2 atan2f arc tangent Of y X esesessseeessreerserereerssesrsserrssrerrstesterrererrsseseeseeesreetereneees 238 atanh atanhf inverse hyperbolic tangent eee ceeeeceeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeecseesaecseesaeeneenaes 238 JN JNf yN yNf Bessel fUnctions eee cece ceeceeeceeeeeeecseeeeecaeesaecsaeaececesecnseeseeeees 238 ebrtsebrtf gt CUBE TOOL EEE EEEE EE E E 239 copysign copysignf sign of y magnitude Of X esessseesssseerseesrseissreresrerrsrerrsreserresreereee 239 cosh coshf hyperbolic COSINC cc pi nieee eiere ee NE nre aE e a e 239 rf erff erfc erfct emor NCO a E OTETTA 240 exp eExpi s exponentiak eierne e a Eee eE E E E 240 expml expmlf exponential minus 1 essesessesesesseeessesees
172. eout BYTE TinmeoutT ype LIM UINT StartT imerchar UINT kd rea Connect and Disconnect User can connect disconnect the tool from the CAN bus by pressing releasing a toggle toolbar button shown in the figure below skh BS Connect Disconnect The tool can also be connected by selecting CAN gt Connect menu option available only in disconnected state or by pressing F2 function key The same can be disconnected by selecting CAN gt Disconnect menu option available only in Connected state or by pressing Esc key When the tool is in connected state the menu option will become Disconnect and when the tool is in disconnected state the menu option will be displayed is Connect Transmission and reception of messages can be done only when the tool is in the connected state Format Converters Format Converters Currently Five external tools are integrated with BUSMASTER e CAPL To CPP Converter Converts CAPL can file into BUSMASTER CPP cpp file 94 BUSMASTER CAN e DBC To DBF Converter Converts DBC dbc file into BUSMASTER database dbf file DBF To DBC Converter Converts BUSMASTER database dbf file into DBC dbc file e ASC TO LOG Converter Converts CANoe log file asc to BUSMASTER log file log e LOG To ASC Converter Converts BUSMASTER log file log to CANoe Log file log e Log To Excel Converter Exports BUSMASTER log file log to CSV Comma Seperated Values Format e
173. equence and a terminating null character which will be added automatically pattern is discussed in the paragraph following this table Corresponding arg char arg e d Reads a decimal integer into the corresponding arg int arg e D Reads a decimal integer into the corresponding arg long arg e o Reads an octal integer into the corresponding arg int arg e O Reads an octal integer into the corresponding arg long arg e u Reads an unsigned decimal integer into the corresponding arg unsigned int arg e U Reads an unsigned decimal integer into the corresponding arg unsigned long arg e x X Read a hexadecimal integer into the corresponding arg int arg e e f g Read a floating point number into the corresponding arg float arg E F G Read a floating point number into the corresponding arg double arg e i Reads a decimal octal or hexadecimal integer into the corresponding arg int arg e J Reads a decimal octal or hexadecimal integer into the corresponding arg long arg e nStores the number of characters read in the corresponding arg int arg e p Stores a scanned pointer ANSI C leaves the details to each implementation this implementation treats Yop exactly the same as U Corresponding arg void arg A pattern of characters surrounded by square brackets can be used instead of the s type character pattern is a set of characters which define a search set of possible characters making up
174. equire a random number The algorithm depends on a static variable called the random seed starting with a given value of the random seed always produces the same sequence of numbers in successive calls to rand You can set the random seed using srand it does nothing beyond storing its argument in the static variable used by rand You can exploit this to make the pseudo random sequence less predictable if you wish by using some other unpredictable value often the least significant parts of a time varying value as the random seed before beginning a sequence of calls to rand or if you wish to ensure for example while debugging that successive runs of your program use the same random numbers you can use srand to set the same random seed at the outset Returns rand returns the next pseudo random integer in sequence it is a number between 0 and RAND_MAX inclusive srand does not return a result strtod strtodf string to double or float Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt COUIOILS Sicievocl OMS EClieie Bidie Clagice 7 welsLJl 9 ILO Kiciewocliz Conse Chet Scie Caern sgenl y Clotiole _ sricol ie KWosCl ceeinit CGomSic Chela Gide Oneng wwwenl l y 200 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description The function strtod parses the character string str producing a substring which can be converted to a double value The substring converted is the longest initial subsequence of str beginning with the
175. es select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Delete key in the keyboard To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and press Delete key Configure Node This is used change the name of the Node or change add cpp dll associated with a Node Configuring a Node can be done by following ways 50 BUSMASTER CAN 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Configure 2 Select the Node and click Configure Node in the toolbar 3 If no cpp dll files are associated with the node previously then by pressing Enter key in the keyboard Build Node This is used build the cpp files associated with selected Node or all the nodes in the Simulated System Building a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Build To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All 2 Select the Node and click Build Node in the toolbar To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All in the toolbar Enable Disable Node This used to active deactivate selected Node or all the Nodes in the Simulated System Enabling Disabling can be done by following ways 1 Check Uncheck the checkbox associated with the Node will Enable Disable the Node respectively To Enable Disable all the Nodes Check Uncheck the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus respectively 2 Spaceba
176. essteue 213 gete read a Character MACTO ceeeceeceesessecesseceececescecsaeceecececeeneeeeeeesseeeeeeceeeesaeceneesee 213 getchar read a Character Macro jauns e E E A E E 213 gets get character string obsolete use fgets instead ce eeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeseceeeeceteeeeeeeee 214 iprintf write formatted output integer ONLY eee cee eeceeeeeeeceeeeeecaeesaecseesaecneenaes 214 mktemp mkstemp generate unused file MAME eeccesseceeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeseceeeeeseeesaeess 214 perror print an error message on standard f1OP eee ee eeeeee cee eeeeceeeeeeecaeecseceeeaeenaes 215 printf fprintf sprintf format output eee cee cneceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaecneeeaecsaenaes 215 Pute Write a Character MactO neiere kennen eiee orea ee oE KEE ESEE E EREA EERE ETENEE EA PARNER 217 putchar write a character MACTO ccecceeseceececesecesceceecessseeeecenseeeeneceeeecsaeceaeecereeenaeeeees 217 puts write a character String asa eaei eie e a a E R A EEEE SS EEES his 217 remove delete a files MAME eee eee ae e enera a Ee EE E EN p 218 t name LEN AMMA fe spekei ereer e aeee ne ee SER Ee EE EE IEE N E enie iS 218 rewind reinitialize a file or stream seessseeseseeesereesrsreresrsstsrsrerrsrerrssreresenresreersresreereee 218 scanf fscanf sscanf scan and format input esssssseseesesensreeesseessstsssetstsrstseesseeessrsessee 219 setbuf specify full buffering for a file or stream
177. et exponent of floating point number Synopsis include lt math h gt int ilogb double val int ilogbf float val YwH Neo Description All non zero normal numbers can be described as m 2 p ilogb and ilogbf examine the argument val and return p The functions frexp and frexpf are similar to ilogb and ilogbf but also return m Returns ilogb and ilogbf return the power of two used to form the floating point argument If val is 0 they return INT_MAX INT_MAxX is defined in limits h If val is infinite or NaN they return INT_ MAX infinity infinityf representation of infinity Synopsis include lt math h gt dowale skiasEalinalicsy VOLC p EO a E ON Description infinity and infinityf return the special number IEFE infinity in double and single precision arithmetic respectivly isnan isnanf isinf isinff finite finitef test for exceptional numbers Synopsis include lt ieeefp h gt int isnan double arg int isinf double arg int finite double arg ETS demenc GiaslK alten ane y IIe alfSaliqueic loer eue e ime aleer oeat aree Description These functions provide information on the floating point argument supplied There are five major number formats zero a number which contains all zero bits subnormal Is used to represent number with a zero exponent but a non zero fraction normal A number with an exponent and a fraction infinity A number with an all 1 s
178. exceeds this count Display will scroll to show the latest entries The display update rate can also be configured This will be used to refresh the display periodically e App Filters You can opt to view and log messages of your choice Message filters provide this facility Filters can be applied to message display window filters and or message log The filter list is configurable from CAN gt Filter Configuration menu e Message Logging You can select a file to log all the transmitted amp received messages The start of logging can also be triggered on reception of specific message name or message ID You can configure a logging session for different time stamping mode as well as Hex Decimal format You can also select to append or overwrite an existing log file e Message Replay The messages that are logged to a file can be replayed The replay can be configured by choosing replay type time delay and replay file name You can explicitly specify the delay required between messages or between cycles wherever applicable e Transmit Message You can configure define messages that are to be sent on CAN bus The configured messages can be database messages or undefined messages Undefined messages are those messages that are not available in the database Further the messages to be sent can be define as standard extended messages or as a RTR message e Simulated Systems Simulated systems can be configured under CAN Bus consisting of multiple n
179. f CAN Only difference is that for J1939 a message is identified not by CAN identifier but by its PGN number Start Network This function connects the application to the J1939 network Both the associated menu item and toolbar icon are toggling in nature and hence shuttle between Go Online and Go Offline modes Transmit Message This brings in the J1939 transmit message window in which the presently transmittable message can be configured and sent in both monoshot and cylcic mode 31939 Transmit Message Window je xj aa BUSMASTER J1939 Tx Msg Window re Transport Protocol Function Msg Type Broadcast From 0x fo To Ox 32 Data 0x 12321312312312312312312312312312 Channel fi J1939_MONITOR z Address 0x 0 ECU NAME 0x 8000000000000001 Transmit MV Cycic 100 ms _ Status Transmission stopped J1939 Transmit Message Window Logging By selecting the associated menu item or clicking on the toolbar icon the user can start the logging process This has the characteristics of a toggle switch and hence using the same ongoing logging process can be stopped too BUSMASTER CAN 89 e lt Time gt lt Channel gt lt CAN ID gt lt PGN gt lt Type gt lt Sre gt lt Dest gt lt Priority gt lt Tx Rx gt lt DLC gt lt DataBytes gt ttt 25 24 14 6112 1 16eeftO0 ODEE00 ACL oo FF 006 Tx 8 01 00 00 00 900 900 90 80 25 24 14 6124 1 18eeff00 OOEEOO ACL 00 FF 006 Rx 8 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 80
180. f the range of representable values plus or minus HUGE_VAL is returned and ERANGE is stored in errno If the correct value would cause underflow 0 0 is returned and ERANGE is stored in errno atoff obeys the same rules as atof except that it returns a float atoi atol string to integer Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt bie Orel Conse Chan 7S long acollconet nere Ts Description atoi converts the initial portion of a string to an int atol converts the initial portion of a string to a long atoi s is implemented as int strtol s NULL 10 atol s is implemented as strtol s NULL 10 Returns The functions return the converted value if any If no conversion was made 0 is returned bsearch binary search Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt void bsearch const void key const void base size_t nmemb size_t size aime Comocie Gomis woskcl CoOimsic WoOslcl 2 Description bsearch searches an array beginning at base for any element that matches key using binary search nmemb is the element count of the array size is the size of each element The array must be sorted in ascending order with respect to the comparison function compar which you supply as the last argument of bsearch You must define the comparison function compar to have two arguments its result must be negative if the first argument is less than the second zero if the two arguments match and positive if the first argument
181. file creation e Specify a message ID or select a message name on reception of which logging gets triggered Connection Details The connection to the CAN bus is via the 9 pole SUB D plug according to CiA Recommendation DS 102 1 Minimal configurations are the PINs 2 and 7 CAN L CAN H Pin Connection User defined 12V 5V not connected CAN L User defined CAN GND not connected Not Connected Not Connected User defined CAN GND not connected CAN H Not Connected User defined 12V 5V not connected YPN AN RYN S 12V 5V not connected CAN_GND not connected CAN_L CAN_H CAN_GND not connected not connected not connected 4 12V 5V not connected not connected 256 BUSMASTER Additional Installation Additional Installation In BUSMASTER MinGw gcc compiler is used in Node Simulation to build and generate dll files from user created cpp file Therefore any of the below two MinGw must be installed MinGW Installation using GCC Installer MinGW Installation The following steps should be followed to install MinGW and use it to successfully compile CPP files in Node Simulation using BUSMASTER e Download latest mingw executable from the following link http sourceforge net projects mingw files Installer mingw get inst and then use it to download the actual MinGW and copy the MinGW folder to C drive e During MinGW installation please choose the packages as shown in the screen below a
182. following validations are performed e Node Configuration name will be checked for its uniqueness e Logical Nodes will be checked for its uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel button BUSMASTER C Library Functions 193 C Library Functions Standard Library Functions abs This chapter groups utility functions useful in a variety of programs The corresponding declarations are in the header file stdlib h integer absolute value magnitude Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt iiae elos alime aL 7 Description abs returns the absolute value of i also called the magnitude of i That is if i is negative the result is the opposite of i but if i is nonnegative the result is i The similar function labs uses and returns long rather than int values Returns The result is a nonnegative integer atexit request execution of functions at program exit Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt inre aArcexic voio iribiarelc aon Y aviel e Description You can use atexit to enroll functions in a list of functions that will be called when your program terminates normally The argument is a pointer to a user defined function which must not require arguments and must not return a result The functions are kept in a LIFO stack that is the last function enrolled by atexit will be the first to execute when your program exits There is no built in limit to the number of functions you can enroll in this
183. g an element will update the element properties below the list 72 BUSMASTER CAN E Graph Display r Element List Category Element Type SignalLights Left Physica SignalLights Right Physica EngineRPM Physica List of Graph Elements Gear Physica Speed Physica Temp i Statistics Error Rate Statistics Extended Rx Me Statistics Extended Rx Re Properties Element s Line Style Line type Solid lt Line Color C Element s Line Color Point type Up Triangles lt 9 __ R Sample Point Color z LE ee le Element s Sample Hide Disable Point color To show hide selected element s graph in graph window To disable enable element receiving data Select a list item to see the element details and to modify the details The selected item will be highlighted in the graph using bold solid line Various line styles and point styles are supported by BUSMASTER Sample points symbols will be drawn only if the tool is in disconnected state When to tool is connected the graph will go to tailored mode or run mode where cosmetic components of the graph will not be drawn Line Type BUSMASTER graph supports various types of lines ranging for different line styles to different line types The following is the list of supported line types e Solid Graph with solid line e Dashed Graph with Dashed lines e Dotted Graph with Dotted lines e Dash Dot Graph with Da
184. g quot long rem Idiv_t 198 BUSMASTER C Library Functions where the quot field represents the quotient and rem the remainder For nonzero d if r Idiv n d then n equals r rem d r quot To divide int rather than long values use the similar function div malloc realloc free manage memory Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt void malloc size_t nbytes void realloc void aptr size_t nbytes void free void aptr void _malloc_r void reent size_t nbytes void _realloc_r void reent void aptr size_t nbytes void _free_r void reent void aptr Description These functions manage a pool of system memory Use malloc to request allocation of an object with at least nbytes bytes of storage available If the space is available malloc returns a pointer to a newly allocated block as its result If you already have a block of storage allocated by malloc but you no longer need all the space allocated to it you can make it smaller by calling realloc with both the object pointer and the new desired size as arguments realloc guarantees that the contents of the smaller object match the beginning of the original object Similarly if you need more space for an object use realloc to request the larger size again realloc guarantees that the beginning of the new larger object matches the contents of the original object When you no longer need an object originally allocated by malloc or
185. g will be displayed as shown below All The values are editable 188 BUSMASTER LIN Edit Coding Coding X General Properties Raw Value Description Minimum Maximum 00 0x5 To delete a logical element select the logical row and click on the Delete button provided in the same section Similarly Physical values also can be deleted using the delete button provided in the same section To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Coding name will be checked for its uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel button Deleting Coding To delete any coding right click on the coding item in the Element view and click on the pop up menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the coding On deletion coding will be unmapped from all associated signals BUSMASTER LIN 189 Schedule Table Creating Schedule Table To create Schedule Table right click on the Schedule Table element in the element view and click on popup menu New Create Schedule Table dialog is as shown below Cote Scout ae Schedule Table s Name Frame Name Frame Type Delay ms 1 General Properties e Name Name of the Schedule Table should follow C identifier rules and should be unique 2 Adding Schedule Table Item e To Add Schedule Table
186. ging is already OFF 100 BUSMASTER CAN WriteToLogFile To send string to log file Synopsis UINT WriteToLogFile char msg Description This function will output text passed as parameter msg to all log files The return value of this function will be Oor 1 Inputs msg Pointer to characterarray Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is OFF or user has passed a NULL pointer Trace To send string to Trace window Synopsis WINE IEICS elniena s ronnen s45 N Description This function will format the passed parameters based on format specified and will show the formatted text inTRACE window The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs msg Pointer to character array Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case user has passed a NULL pointer If the TRACE window is visible it will be made visible ResetController To reset CAN controller Synopsis void ResetController BOOL bResetType Description This function will reset the controller If the parameter passed is TRUE a hardware reset will be given to controller In case of hardware reset the buffer of controller will be flushed off and error counter value will be set to zero If the parameter passed is FALSE a software reset will be given to controller
187. h accepts Z but generates no output for it e 9 A single character Returns When the formatted time takes up no more than maxsize characters the result is the length of the formatted string Otherwise if the formatting operation was abandoned due to lack of room the result is 0 and the string starting at s corresponds to just those parts of format that could be completely filled in within the maxsize limit time get current calendar time as single number Synopsis include lt time h gt cims c tims teina te sre Description time looks up the best available representation of the current time and returns it encoded as a time_t It stores the same value at t unless the argument is NULL Returns A 1 result means the current time is not available otherwise the result represents the current time C Math Library Functions acos acosf arc cosine Synopsis include lt math h gt double acos double x rl ee AeOSic icllo sic F Description acos computes the inverse cosine arc cosine of the input value Arguments to acos must be in the range 1 to 1 acosf is identical to acos except that it performs its calculations on floats BUSMASTER C Library Functions 237 Returns If x is not between 1 and 1 the returned value is NaN not a number the global variable errno is set to EDOM and a DOMAIN error message is sent as standard error output You can modify error handling for these function
188. he double precision floating point number closest to val in the direction toward dir nextafterf performs the same operation in single precision For example nextafter 0 0 1 0 returns the smallest positive number which is representable in double precision Returns Returns the next closest number to val in the direction toward dir pow powf x to the power y Synopsis include lt math h gt double pow double x double y cloare joo Gelkoeie xp cloar y Description pow and powf calculate x raised to the exp1 0nt y BUSMASTER C Library Functions 247 Returns On success pow and powf return the value calculated When the argument values would produce overflow pow returns HUGE_VAL and set errno to ERANGE If the argument x passed to pow or powf is a negative noninteger and y is also not an integer then errno is set to EDOM If x and y are both 0 then pow and powf return 1 You can modify error handling for these functions using matherr rint rintf remainder remainderf round and remainder Synopsis include lt math h gt double rint double x elloar imen e lOar xE double remainder double x double y float remainderf float x float y Description rint and rintf returns their argument rounded to the nearest integer remainder and remainderf find the remainder of x y this value is in the range y 2 y 2 Returns rint and remainder return the integer result as a double scal
189. he number of digits to the left of the decimal point sgn contains 0 if the number is positive and 1 if it is negative Returns All four functions return a pointer to the new string containing a character representation of val gvcvt gcvtf format double or float as string Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt chan Crows Cloblolke val ime Precision Creat SIJE 2 chari eCwicie iclloetc welll OEEC Oe a O 2 Description gcvt writes a fully formatted number as a null terminated string in the buffer buf gdvtf produces corresponding character representations of float numbers gcvt uses the same rules as the printf format precisiong only negative values are signed with and either exponential or ordinary decimal fraction format is chosen depending on the number of significant digits specified by precision Returns The result is a pointer to the formatted representation of val the same as the argument buf ecvtbuf fcvtbuf double or float to string Synopsis include lt stdio h gt Cheie S waclowue Clowes well inc Chars bner Clecjorm aime Sif Claus loyulic e Chat iTeEyAclowuc ClowlolS wel ine Claciumells sinc vece slime 7S Claus Sgu Description ecvtbuf and fcvtbuf produce null terminated strings of digits representating the double number val The only difference between ecvtbuf and fcvtbuf is the interpretation of the second argument chars or
190. he version details about the editor and also opens this help file Using Editor e Creating a new test setup file Select File gt New menu A file browser will be displayed Select a required folder and enter the file name Click on OK The editor will create a new test setup file and a new test setup with some initial values e Updating test setup Initially the name of test setup will be lt New Test SetUp gt displayed in right pane Click on this item test setup node and update its details such as test setup name description version bus type module name engineer info report file path and database in left pane The database path is very important e Creating a test case Right click on the test setup node on right pane A pop up menu will appear click on New Test Case A new test case with Initial name Untitled TestCase will be created e Updating a test case Click on required test case node The left pane will show the details of test case and you can edit the details and click Confirm button e Deleting a test case Right click on required test case node A pop up menu will displayed Click on Delete item The test case will be deleted from the test setup e Adding a new test sequence Right click on required test case node A pop up menu will be displayed Click on New menu and select the required node e Updating a test sequence Click on any test sequence item And edit its detail in left pane and click on Confirm button BUSMAS
191. hich controls the maximum number of characters that will be read before converting the current input field If the input field has fewer than width characters scanf reads all the characters in the field and then proceeds with the next field and its format specification If a whitespace or a non convertable character occurs before width character are read the characters up to that character are read converted and stored Then scanf proceeds to the next format specification e size h l and L are optional size characters which override the default way that scanf interprets the data type of the corresponding argument Modifier Type s h d i 0 u x convert input to short store in short object h D I O U X no effect e f c s n p 1d i o u x convert input to long store in long object 1 e f g convert input to double store in a double object 1 D I O U X no effect c s n p L d i 0 u x convert to long double store in long double L all others no effect e type A character to specify what kind of conversion scanf performs Here is a table of the conversion characters e No conversion is done the percent character is stored e c Scans one character Corresponding arg char arg e s Reads a character string into the array supplied Corresponding arg char arg 220 BUSMASTER C Library Functions e pattern Reads a non empty character string into memory starting at arg This area must be large enough to accept the s
192. hile programming These functions can be used to interact with BUSMASTER application Please follow the steps below to insert a function 1 Edit the function for which prototype is to be added Refer Editing Function Body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Function A dialog box is displayed with a set of function prototypes API Listing Choose required function prototype from the list and click on OK button we amp be The selected function prototype will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Responding to Master Request To respond to the master request slave response of the particular identifier needs to be pre configured on Pre Connect Event Example For example to respond to the master request with an identifier 0x4 Pre Connect event shall be configured as shown below void OnBus_Pre_ Connect STLIN_MSG sMsg sMsg m_ucMsgTyp 1 Slave Response sMsg m_ucChksumTyp 0 Classic sMsg m_ucDataLen 8 sMsg m_ucMsgID 0x4 Message Identifier sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 0 10 Lower 4 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 1 20 Upper 4 Bytes sMsg m_ucChannel 1 Send the messag SendMsg sMsqg Required Include header file is LINIncludes h LIN API Reference STLIN_MSG Structure STLIN_MSG Structure Definition struct sTLIN_MSG unsigned char m_ucMsgTyp Header 0 Slave Response 1 unsigned cha
193. icator The alternate function _getchar_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns The next character read as an unsigned char and cast to int unless there is no more data or the host system reports a read error in either of these situations getchar returns EOF You can distinguish the two situations that cause an EOF result by using ferror stdin and feof stdin 214 BUSMASTER C Library Functions gets get character string obsolete use fgets instead Synopsis include lt stdio h gt char gets char buf char _gets_r void reent char buf Description Reads characters from standard input until a newline is found The characters up to the newline are stored in buf The newline is discarded and the buffer is terminated with a 0 This is a dangerous function as it has no way of checking the amount of space available in buf One of the attacks used by the Internet Worm of 1988 used this to overrun a buffer allocated on the stack of the finger daemon and overwrite the return address causing the daemon to execute code downloaded into it over the connection The alternate function _gets_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns gets returns the buffer passed to it with the data filled in If end of file occurs with some data already accumulated the data is returned with no other indicatio
194. igned char m_ucChannel Channel Nember Required Include header file is struct h Error Active Handler which will print error counter values and channel number void OnError_Active SCAN_ERR ErrorMsg macel Mabe lnieweies Sel Ro miros g0 Clasinmeils sel besorMs Gg mm el sxrg ois ISTO TEMS in WIC Tee Ove HnronrMsogr Wh WVSleediseicese p Accessing database message signal values Database message structures can be meaningfully interpreted Database message structures will have signal members as defined in the database Signal raw value can be directly assigned by using member of database message structure with the signal name CAN_Request is a database message that has signals Sig Sig2 and Sig3 Each signal is 2 bytes of length To assign raw value of a signal use message name structure and use signal name as member Message Declaration CANBREGUE SIE SMS G Sit alle tems 0 k0 0 pu OF me c mene em Oren Pam O em OP 0 0 Use signal member ft Sigil SMSC Siecle temas Wiehe hs aiey S n aula OF ff Sie2 SMSGSiisucre mas Which ier Sica 20 Ji Sig3 sMsgStruct m_sWhichBit Sig_3 30 Send the message now SendMsg STCAN_MSG amp sMsgStruct Note Right click on edit area of function editor Select Insert Message or Insert Signal option to i insert message structure or signal structure Select the option Yes I
195. iguring a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Configure 2 Select the Node and click Configure Node in the toolbar 3 If no cpp dll files are associated with the node previously then by pressing Enter key in the keyboard Build Node This is used build the cpp files associated with selected Node or all the nodes in the Simulated System Building a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Build To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All 2 Select the Node and click Build Node in the toolbar To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All in the toolbar BUSMASTER LIN 157 Enable Disable Node This used to active deactivate selected Node or all the Nodes in the Simulated System Enabling Disabling can be done by following ways 1 Check Uncheck the checkbox associated with the Node will Enable Disable the Node respectively To Enable Disable all the Nodes Check Uncheck the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus respectively 2 Spacebar key can be used as keyboard shortcut to Check Uncheck the Node s F 1 Node s can t be Added Removed Configured Enabled Disabled while the network is connected 2 A Node can be edited while the network is connected But the file must be built again to see the changes Note Function Editor BUSMASTER can work as a progra
196. ile is changed during the usage of the tool a save confirmation message is displayed to the user before closing the application BUSMASTER CAN 17 CAN Introduction Configuration BUSMASTER has provision for configuring the following properties e Baudrate By default the tool is configured to operate at 100kbps This can be changed to any valid value between 5 kbps and 1000 kbps e Acceptance Filter To increase the response of the tool at very high messages rate one can set the acceptance filter The controller filters the messages based on the values set for acceptance code and mask This filtering is faster than the software filter App filters e Warning Limit One can monitor the condition of the network by setting a warning limit value The user will be notified when either one of the error counter Tx amp Rx exceeds the warning limit By default this value is set to 96 The valid range is from 1 to 127 In USB interface setting warning limit is not supported and it is internally set to 96 e Message Display Every Message can be assigned a user defined color and text The text associated with the message will be displayed in the selected color along with its data in the message display window whenever that message is transmitted or received By default all the messages received are displayed in black color Display entries can be configured This is the number of entries that the display will show When the messages received
197. ill be as shown in the figure below To make things easier the BUSMASTER Menu will be replaced with the Test Automation Editor Title TestSetup Description First Testing Test Setup version 1 0 Bus Type CAN Kodule Wane ECU Engineer Nare Venkatanarayana Engineer Role SSE DataBase Path Report File Path D venkatanarayana MyProgRAMs ReportFile htal Time Mode RELATIVE File Format EML Right Click on tree item to add New Test Case 82 BUSMASTER CAN Master Pane The master pane or right pane can be used to add or update the test cases Property Pane The user can use the Property pane or Left pane to update the details of a Test case or its sub nodes e It contains a table with two columns Category and Value The value in Category field can not be changed and it s like a question To update the value in any row of Value column double click on the cell item An edit box or a list control will appear according to the context e Also the pane contains two buttons Confirm and Cancel The Confirm button can be used to save the current changes made to the node Note that these changes will not be saved to file For saving into a file select File gt Save see following section for menus The Cancel button Will cancel all the changes made and display the previously saved data Help Window The help window will provide help on every node Click on any item on right pane to get the details of that node Test Setup Editor Menu
198. ill be flushed off and error counter value will be set to zero If the parameter passed is FALSE a software reset will be given to controller Only driver buffer will be cleared The status of controller error counter will not be effected Inputs bResetType 1 for Hardware reset of CAN controller 0 for Software reset of CAN controller Returns GoOnline To enable all event handlers Synopsis UINT GoOnline Description This function will join all the nodes to the J1939 network The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value 1 indicate success condition while a value 0 indicate a failure condition GoOffline To disable all event handlers Synopsis UINT GoOffline Description This function will remove all nodes from J1939 network The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition 108 BUSMASTER CAN Disconnect To disconnect CAN controller from CAN bus Synopsis UINT Disconnect DWORD dwClientId Description This function will disconnect the tool from CAN bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already disconnected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition Connect To connec
199. imulated Systems Right click on CAN Bus in the left pane and select New Simulated System or Add Simulated System Select then the sim file Right click on the new simulated system and select Add Node The name will also be used as basename for the generated DLL The Node Details will become visible in the right pane Create a new function Follow the description in the previous chapter General access to the function editor Select Add New File in the right pane under File Details to add new functions to the node The function editor will open automatically Edit an existing function Follow the description in the previous chapter General access to the function editor Select Edit File in the right pane under File Details to edit an existing function of the node Include Header file User can include a header filename while programming event handlers To do so please follow the steps given below 1 Select Include Headers category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu comes up Select Add A dialog box appears 3 Click on Browse button to select the required header file name and click on OK button 4 The selected header filename will be added to the source file in the Pane 2 and also under Include Headers category in Pane 1 BUSMASTER CAN 41 Edit Include Header File Name User can edit the name of the header file to do so please follow the steps given below 1 we amp bh Select the Include Hea
200. indication If no data are read NULL is returned instead fiprintf format output to file integer only Synopsis include lt stdio h gt diae ieajoseslime ic 2 ILILIS IEC CONST Cle OMe oos p Description fiprintf is a restricted version of fprintf it has the same arguments and behavior save that it cannot perform any floating point formatting the f g G e and F type specifiers are not recognized Returns fiprintf returns the number of bytes in the output string save that the concluding NULL is not counted fiprintf returns when the end of the format string is encountered If an error occurs fiprintf returns EOF fopen open a file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt FILE fopen const char file const char mode FILE _fopen_r void reent const char file const char mode 210 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description fopen initializes the data structures needed to read or write a file Specify the file s name as the string at file and the kind of access you need to the file with the string at mode The alternate function _fopen_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Three fundamental kinds of access are available read write and append mode must begin with one of the three characters r w or a to select one of these r Open the file for reading the operation will fail if the file does not exist or if the
201. iod Each Signal can have different waveform settings allotted like Signal type Amplitude Frequency All the signals will be having a standard sampling time at which their amplitude will be calculated depending on the wave type and they will be sent out Currently only two waveforms are supported Sine Wave and Triangular Wave To configure signals go to menu option CAN gt Signal Graph gt Configure and user will be shown with the following dialog box 64 BUSMASTER CAN Waveform Selection List Default value for Message List Default Signal Value gt unselected signals in a message Ox10 MSG1_WFS_Anfrage v Signal List Defined Signal Waveform List As MSG1_WFS_RND Re 10 gt MSG1_WFS_P_ Klasse Sine wave As MSG1_WFS_SIG_E Rs 13 gt WFS_GSG_Status_Antwort Triangular wave Re 15 gt WFS_MSG2_Status_Antwort Sine wave Define Wave Unselected Signals elete Defined Signals The above shown figure contains the list of all the messages in a combo box Message list which are present in currently selected database file Signal List List control shows the signals in currently selected message in combo box which are not defined with any waveform Defined Signal Waveform List List control shows all the signals in different messages for which the waveforms are defined Use the Define Wave button to define a waveform for a particular signal Alternatively double click on the unselect
202. ion SECER OEV EN MECHE CKO OUMA by ILI N 164 BUSMASTER LIN unsigned char m_ucld unsigned char m_ucCrc unsigned char m_ucChannel unsigned int m_ulTime SEVENT_RECEIVE_LIN Structure Definition struct SEVENT_RECEIVE_LIN unsigned int m_ulTime SEVENT_SLAVE_NORESP_LIN Structure Definition struct SEVENT_SLAVE_NORESP_LIN unsigned char m_ucld unsigned char m_ucChannel unsigned int m_ulTime te SEVENT_SYNC_LIN Structure Definition typedef struct SEVENT_SYNC_LIN unsigned char m_ucChannel unsigned int m_ulTime hi Required Include header file is LINIncludes h Accessing database message signal values Database message structures can be meaningfully interpreted Database message structures will have signal members as defined in the database Signal raw value can be directly assigned by using member of database message structure with the signal name LIN_Request is a database message that has signals Sigl Sig2 and Sig3 Each signal is 2 bytes of length To assign raw value of a signal use message name structure and use signal name as member Message Declaration ILA IRESCMESE SWMseSctice il O 8 Ox4 0 O O O O O O Be Use signal member fi Sigl sMsgStruct m_sWhichBit Sig_1 10 fi Sig2 SMSGSiEeu Cre mms Whakeh pager Sika 20 fi Sigs SM SGOrEUC EAMES Wisse in sates S s14ciame aes gt Se
203. iption This function computes the length of the initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2 excluding the terminating null character Returns strspn returns the length of the segment found strstr find string segment Synopsis include lt string h gt Ghena Siciesicie coms Ghear sil Const Char si2 p Description Locates the first occurence in the string pointed to by s1 of the sequence of characters in the string pointed to by s2 excluding the terminating null character Returns Returns a pointer to the located string segment or a null pointer if the string s2 is not found If s2 points to a string with zero length the s1 is returned 232 BUSMASTER C Library Functions strtok get next token from a string Synopsis include lt string h gt Cheir ssr tok Chat SiowliceSs Conse Onei clei tens Ghar sgert ok Chiar goure e Const Chac voe limnicers Ciar salasa Description The strtok function is used to isolate sequential tokens in a null terminated string source These tokens are delimited in the string by at least one of the characters in delimiters The first time that strtok is called source should be specified subsequent calls wishing to obtain further tokens from the same string should pass a null pointer instead The separator string delimiters must be supplied each time and may change between cal
204. is will prompt delete confirmation dialog Selecting Ok to this dialog will delete message block from message blocks list Deleting a message block will remove all messages belong to that message block Addition and Deletion of message block shall be done by using context sensitive popup menus This will be displayed if the user right clicks on message block list Message List Message list will show the list of messages belong to a message block A message block shall be selected from Message Block to see the list of messages it has Message list will show message frame with its ID Name if it is a database message frame type DLC and data bytes The icon used for each entry will denote whether it is a database message or non database message The data bytes will be listed in hex or decimal format as per the tool BUSMASTER CAN 35 bar numeric mode By default massages will be displayed in hexadecimal mode The frame type will show the message is using standard frame type or extended frame type The RTR messages will be denoted by r With message in the list the following operations shall be performed Send This will send the selected message s immediately To perform this action the tool must be in connected state The selected messages will be transmitted on CAN bus with out having any delay in between the messages Delete This will delete the selected message entry from the message block Multiple selections shall be done to delete
205. its test cases e Select Deselect a test suite To select or deselect test setup for execution click on the check box located near the test setup file e Delete a test setup file Right click on the required test setup file and select Delete in the pop up menu 84 BUSMASTER CAN e Select Deselect a test case Click on the check box of particular test case to enable or disable it for execution Note that if the test setup is deselected from the execution then all its test cases are nor executed e Execute test suite Right click on the test suite node and select Execute in the pop up menu Each selected test case is executed and the summary will be displayed in Result view Network Statistics Network statistics dialog gives details about the messages transmitted and received on the bus This information includes the number of Standard Extended RTR and Error messages transmitted and received by BUSMASTER and current rate of these parameters This is updated once in a second Message rate per second and Network load in terms of Bus traffic is also presented The peak network load will show the peak traffic during that session This information can be used to find bus utilisation Statistics information will be cleared during connect and during controller reset Messages Total Messages Msq s Errors Total Ens Standard Total Standard Msq s Extended Total Extended Msq s Standard RTR Extended RTR Errors Total Error E
206. k shall be configured as both key and time triggering Time Delay Between blocks Time delay between blocks is used to transmit one block of data at a time This supersedes time delay between messages When Time Delay for Delay Between Message Blocks is checked the Time Delay for Trigger will be disabled and the time will not be considered for message transmission When the Transmit Messages is selected the messages in the block will be sent immediately After the given time delay between blocks is elapsed messages of the second block will be sent and will be continued till all the blocks are sent When the Time Delay for Delay Between Blocks is unchecked the Time Delay for Trigger will be enabled and the previous check status will be maintained If the Tx Mode selected is monoshot then the messages will be transmitted only once For cyclic mode messages will be transmitted continuously based on the delay given If key trigger is selected as Trigger event then messages will be sent on the key press event Adding a Message Block To create a new message block select Add from Message Blocks frame This will create a new message block with default values and with empty message list User shall modify attributes of the message block to customize the message block User shall be able to add maximum of 32 message blocks Deleting a message Block To delete a message block select the message block from the list and select Delete button Th
207. l be displayed in the status bar The same configuration file will be displayed on the top of MRU configuration file list File gt Recent Configuration 3 Selecting a configuration file name from the MRU list will also do loading of the configuration file If load is successful then the same configuration file will be displayed on the top of MRU configuration file list F Note e While loading BUSMASTER with parallel port interface created configuration file in to USB interface checks have been made to find unsupported options If anything found user will be informed about that and BUSMASTER will changes those values to default internally These changes will not be saved unless the user selects File Configuration Save Configuration file created in BUSMASTER with USB interface can be loaded in to BUSMASTER with Parallel port interface Saving a configuration file 1 Select File gt Save menu option This will invoke File Save dialog box 2 Select the configuration file name And select Save button 3 The selected configuration file will be saved The same configuration file will be displayed on the top of MRU configuration file list File gt Recent Configuration Saving a configuration file with new name 1 Select File gt Save As menu option This will invoke File Save As dialog box 2 Enter new configuration file name And select Save button The selected configuration file will be saved If the loaded configuration f
208. l become visible in the right pane Create a new function Follow the description in the previous chapter General access to the function editor Select Add New File in the right pane under File Details to add new functions to the node The function editor will open automatically Edit an existing function Follow the description in the previous chapter General access to the function editor Select Edit File in the right pane under File Details to edit an existing function of the node Include Header file User can include a header filename while programming event handlers To do so please follow the steps given below 1 Select Include Headers category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu comes up Select Add A dialog box appears 3 Click on Browse button to select the required header file name and click on OK button 4 The selected header filename will be added to the source file in the Pane 2 and also under Include Headers category in Pane 1 Edit Include Header File Name User can edit the name of the header file to do so please follow the steps given below 1 Select the Include Header filename under Include Header category to be edited in the Pane 1 and Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit A dialog box will be displayed vAN Click on Browse button to select the required header file and click on OK button BUSMASTER LIN 159 The selected header file will be replaced with
209. l converts the string s to a long First it breaks down the string into three parts leading whitespace which is ignored a subject string consisting of characters resembling an integer in the radix specified by base and a trailing portion consisting of zero or more unparseable characters and always including the terminating null character Then it attempts to convert the subject string into a long and returns the result If the value of base is 0 the subject string is expected to look like a normal C integer constant an optional sign a possible Ox indicating a hexadecimal base and a number If base is between 2 and 36 the expected form of the subject is a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer in the radix specified by base with an optional plus or minus sign The letters a z or equivalently A Z are used to signify values from 10 to 35 only letters whose ascribed values are less than base are permitted If base is 16 a leading Ox is permitted The subject sequence is the longest initial sequence of the input string that has the expected form starting with the first non whitespace character If the string is empty or consists entirely of whitespace or if the first non whitespace character is not a permissible letter or digit the subject string is empty If the subject string is acceptable and the value of base is zero strtol attempts to determine the radix from the input string A string with a leading Ox is treat
210. lect button This will show file selection dialog On selection of a log file the file path text box will be updated with selected file path Log File Size Log file size is fixed to a limit of 50 MB This limit is set as most of the editors will take lot of time to open if the file size is large Time Mode Logging of messages can be done in three different time modes System time Absolute time and Relative time mode In system time mode time stamping of message is done using real time clock of the system In absolute time mode the time stamping is done with respect the to the absolute timer that will be stated during connect In relative time mode the time stamping of a message is with respect to previously received message Reset Timestamp for every enable logging is provided If this option is selected then the absolute time will be reset whenever the logging is enabled Numeric Mode This tells the numeric format of log file entries It has two options Hex and Decimal Message ID and data bytes of a CAN message will use this as a base while format for logging File Mode In Append file mode log sessions will be appended at the end of the file Each logging session will have its own session header and footer In Overwrite file mode the file will be overwritten for the first session For consecutive sessions the file name will be suffixed with an incrementing number and each session will be logged in new files The log file name wi
211. lit fractional and integer parts cesses cseeeeesecsececeecesecerseceeeneeseeees 246 nan nanf representation Of iNfiMity ee ee ceeeeeeceseeeeeeseecaecaaecaecaeesecsseeseeneees 246 nextafter nextafterf get next NUMDET eee eee cee ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseecaeesaecsecnaeenees 246 POW powf X to the power VY eee eeceseeeeeeseeeeecscesaecseeaecsecesececeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeens 246 rint rintf remainder remainderf round and remaindet c ccceeessscseessesceseeesesseseees 247 scalbn scalbnf scale by INteGer eee eesececeeseceeeceesecesceceeeecaeeeneeceeeecseceseeeeeeeeaeeeeees 247 6 BUSMASTER TOC sait saiti s POSILIVE square TOOL sirsie iiie i de peescpens seus cuted E seeds dees couts Sueebeny 247 sin sinf COS COSF SIME Or COSINE ir eerie eE saves Eiere eset EE EESE esi eroina VEE E 248 sinh sinhf hyperbolic SINE eisrean A E EEA onaess 248 tani tank 2 tangenti i ee EE Ea eas inves E EE OA e EE a E EE TE 248 tanh tanhf hyperbolic tangent esik rre pe po ree eener openenen pee sE EPERE IS EOT ES 248 Miscellaneous Macros and Functions eseeeeseseeesseeeseeresesrsserrssterrsrerterentesrnsertnsertesrerrerentnseneeses 249 unctrl translate characters tO Upper Case s esseeeseeesessseeserseesrsrtersresestssererserresrenesrenens 249 Variable Argument TIS Si n a eran aa r Ea REE RE S SONETOS aa ES ENE 249 COpyrig a PEREA EEEE EN EEA EOE EEEE EEEE E EEE EEEE EEE 251 la OI CEEE T
212. ll be incremented every time when you stop the logging process If already log files are created in the previous session and if a new session is started then the log files created already will be overwritten in both overwrite and append mode In this case the successive files already created in the previous session will contain old session data Logging Indication Recording or logging is indicated in the status bar for both CAN and J1939 When the logging is enabled and data is logged in to the file an icon will be shown in the status bar with glowing on and glowing off continuously till the logging is stopped When the logging is stopped then icon will be disabled Example If the log file name is xyz log for the first time then for the next time the log file name will be xyz0 log Similarly if the log file name is xyzn log for the first time where n is any number then for the next time the log file name will be xyzm log where m n 1 Create New Log File Measurement New Log file can be created for every Bus Connect The new log file will have a file name Eg BusmasterLogFile CAN_Mn log where n is the count and M indicates logging is Measurement based Size New Log file can be created with log file exceeding certain file size The new log file will have a file name Eg BusmasterLogFile CAN_Sn log where n is the count and S indicates logging is Size based 24 BUSMASTER CAN Time New Log
213. loat val int exp 242 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description All non zero normal numbers can be described as m 2 p frexp represents the double val as a mantissa m and a power of two p The resulting mantissa will always be greater than or equal to 0 5 and less than 1 0 as long as val is nonzero The power of two will be stored in exp frexpf is identical other than taking and returning floats rather than doubles Returns frexp returns the mantissa m If val is 0 infinity or Nan frexp will set exp to 0 and return val gamma gammaf Igamma Igammaf gamma_r gammaf_r Igamma_r Igammaf_r Synopsis include lt math h gt double gamma double x float gammaf float x double lgamma double x float lgammaf float x double gamma_r double x int signgamp float gammaf_r float x int signgamp double lgamma_r double x int signgamp float lgammaf_r float x int signgamp Description gamma calculates the natural logarithm of the gamma function of x The gamma function exp gamma x is a generalization of factorial and retains the property that Accordingly the results of the gamma function itself grow very quickly gamma is defined as to extend the useful range of results representable The sign of the result is returned in the global variable signgam which is declared in math h gammaf performs the same calculation as gamma but uses and returns float values lgamma and lgamm
214. low 1 Select CAN gt Message Window gt Configure 2 Dialog box Configure Message Display as in above figure will be displayed 3 Click on Add button 4 One more dialog box Add Message Display Attributes as shown below will pop up Message Text Ingnition Message ID Ox jl Message Color Cancel Enter the message ID and Message text Click on the colored button to select a color This click pops up a color palette as shown above Select a suitable color aeorntnn Select OK button to confirm 30 BUSMASTER CAN Subsequent reception transmission of the message that has been configured will be displayed with associated text amp color Editing a message attribute To edit the message attributes please follow the steps given below Select CAN gt Message Window gt Configure Dialog box Configure Message Display will be displayed Select the message entry to be edited from the message list Either click on Edit button or double click on the selected entry One more dialog box Edit Message Attributes will pop up An BB WwN Change the required Message attributes 7 Select OK buttons to confirm Subsequent reception transmission of the message that has been configured will be displayed with associated text amp color Deleting message display attribute To delete an entry from the Message List follow the steps given below Select CAN gt Message Window gt Configure
215. lowed by a notification message stating message not found in the database Message interpretation can be obtained by double clicking on the message Selective Message Interpretation Messages can be selectively interpreted in overwrite display mode Select a database message entry and right click BUSMASTER will popup this menu Message Window CAN DER S 6D6 BAP_Debug_Cnd 8 L0 A 08 11 20 1437 sai ISO_EPB Resp 08 11 20 1438 Expand BAP_OPS 08 11 20 1438 Tx amp IS5S0_Sounda H 08 11 20 1436 Tx Ss BAP_Debug_ BUSMASTER CAN 61 Select Expand to expand the message entry with its signal value Signal values will be displayed in terms Raw and Physical values The expanded entries can be closed by right clicking on that entry and selecting Collapse The expanded entries can be closed by right clicking on that entry and selecting Collapse Alternatively we can click on the sign shown against each interpretable message to expand the message entry And clicking on the sign will collapse the expanded entries as shown in figure below Message Window CAN SE Samd Mea Tee D Messe DIC 583 mMotor_ 3 S 5F7 mklimaEKomp_1 4 100 000 Unit_Minut Inver 0 000 Unit_PerCent Enable S 393 mGate_Komf_3 S 5c0 mEPB_1 S 520 mKombi_3 5 SEO mClima_1 S 570 mBSG_Last S 393 mGate_Komf_3 8 11 34 13 6623 Tx 5 540 mBremse_2 8 11 34 13 7047 S mBremse_11 8 a 11 34 13 7893
216. ls The strtok function returns a pointer to the beginning of each subsequent token in the string after replacing the separator character itself with a NUL character When no more tokens remain a null pointer is returned The strtok_r function has the same behavior as strtok except a pointer to placeholder lasts gt must be supplied by the caller Returns strtok returns a pointer to the next token or NULL if no more tokens can be found strupr force string to uppercase Synopsis include lt string h gt Coe Vegitoo Cineni cl ee Description strupr converts each characters in the string at a to upper case Returns strupr returns its argument a strxfrm transform string Synopsis include lt string h gt Size w Sroa elec Sil Comsic Chait SZ Siza ic M Description This function transforms the string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting string into the array pointed to by s1 The transformation is such that if the strcmp function is applied to the two transformed strings it returns a value greater than equal to or less than zero correspoinding to the result of a strcoll function applied to the same two original strings No more than n characters are placed into the resulting array pointed to by s1 including the terminating null character If n is zero sl may be a null pointer If copying takes place between objects that overlap the behavior is undefined With a C locale this function jus
217. matic Makefile Builder 1 11 serie S mingw32 automakel 11 doc 1 11 1 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 11 serie gS mingw32 automakel 11 lic 1 11 1 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 11 serie S mingw32 automakel 4 bin 1 4p6 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 4 series 6l minow3 automakel 4 dnr 1 4n6 1 Automatic Makefile Ruilder 1 4 series 4 m r General Description Dependencies Installed Files Versions Automatic Makefile Builder 1 5 series FIXME data sheet unavailable a compiler for this data category has yet to be implemented e Set the environment variable path as C MinGW bin MinGW Installation using TDM GCC Installer MinGW Installation The following steps should be followed to Download and install MinGW using TDM GCC Installer BUSMASTER Additional Installation 257 e Download the TDM GCC from the following link http sourceforge net projects tdm gcc files TDM GCC 20Installer tdm gccwebdl exe download e Run the installer Following image will show the first screen of the installer td TDM GCC Setup Wizard Action Choose which action you want the setup wizard to perform Create a new TDM GCC installation ge Manage an existing TDM GCC installation e Click on the create button if you are installing the first time this will go to the following screen td TDM GCC Setup Select Edition Choose which edition of TDM GCC you want to install MinGW TDM 32 bi
218. mation Section tag Description Assumed value if absent Error condition if absent Test setup testsetup Database file database Version version Module Name module name Engineer s name Engineer s role Report file path path Report file format format Report file time mode t imemode Bus type bustype Test case list The root node Accompanied by its title title and version information version Database file Version information of the test setup Module focused on for the testing Test engineer s name And role designation Particular of the report file to be generated Format of the report file Can be one of TXT and HTM Time mode Can be one of SYS system REL relative and ABS absolute Bus type At present can be only CAN Collection of test list_of_test_cases pases Test case testcase Test case title title Test case exception handler exp_handler Collection of test steps A test case contains identifier title and exception handler The last one instructs if in case of failure to continue or exit Test case title Instructs if in case of failure the testing process exists or continues Can be one of continue or exit 1 0 Current working directory with the name same as the test setup TXT SYS CAN Nil Nil continue Fatal Fatal No error No error No error No error
219. me Grid Color This is the color of grid lines This change will be visible only if grid lines are visible Frame Style Three types of frame styles are supported FLAT 3D and FRAME In flat style axis rectangle will cover graph plotting area This is a flat rectangle In 3D style a 3D rectangle will cover graph plotting area Axis rectangle will be in 3D format In FRAME style a gradient picture will be used to cover plotting area Grid Lines This will configure number of grid lines displayed on X and Y axis Supported range is 2 10 The grid line starts from left to right in case of X axis The last grid line will merge with right side boundary For Y axis grid lines will start from bottom to top The last Y axis grid will merge with top boundary of the graph Line Display This will configure line display style of grid lines displayed on X and Y axis Currently three styles of display are supported for graph drawing They Normal Step Mode XY Graph will be advanced in X axis first and then in Y Axis and Step Mode YX Graph will be advanced in Y axis first and then in X Axis Set Default This will set all parameters to default values View style parameters will be set to default color and style Buffer size will be set to 10000 entries and display update rate will be set to 1000 msec Note e All graph window configuration parameters are saved in BUSMASTER configuration file While loading a configuration file all are resto
220. me Returns A pointer to the traditional time representation struct tm mktime convert time to arithmetic representation Synopsis include lt time h gt time_t mktime struct tm timp Description mktime assumes the time at timp is a local time and converts its representation from the traditional representation defined by struct tm into a representation suitable for arithmetic localtime is the inverse of mktime Returns If the contents of the structure at timp do not form a valid calendar time representation the result is 1 Otherwise the result is the time converted to a time_t value strftime flexible calendar time formatter Synopsis include lt time h gt Size w Seiwa Clieie 7S Size t maxSize Const Char iOMMEC CONSE SLUC wii ampi Description strftime converts a struct tm representation of the time at timp into a string starting at s and occupying no more than maxsize characters You control the format of the output using the string at format format can contain two kinds of specifications text to be copied literally into the formatted string and time conversion specifications Time conversion specifications are two character sequences beginning with use to include a percent sign in the output Each defined conversion specification selects a field of calendar time data from timp and converts it to a string in one of the following ways e a An abbreviation for the day of the
221. message Inputs Message name Structure sMESSAGESTRUCT double m_dMessageCode double m_dNumberOfSignals double m_dMessageLength BOOL m_bMessageFrameFormat int m_nMsgDataFormat Cause of failure message name not in database data base file is not imported to BUSMASTER GetNetworkStatistics To get all the statistics of a channel Synopsis HRESULT GetNetworkStatistics int nChannel sBUSSTATISTICS_USR sStat Description This function will provide the channel s statistics Inputs Channel number and Pointer to the structuresCHANNELSTATISTICS DOUBLE m_dBusLoad DOUBLE m_dPeakBusLoad float m_fTotalMsgCount float m_unMsgPerSecond float m_fTotalTxMsgCount DOUBLE m_dTotalTxMsgRate float m_fTxSTDMsgCount DOUBLE m_dTxSTDMsgRate float m_fTxEXTDMsgCount DOUBLE m_dTxEXTMsgRate float m_fTxSTD_RTRMsgCount float m_fTxEXTD_RTRMsgCount float m_fTotalRxMsgCount DOUBLE m_dTotalRxMsgRate float m_fRxSTDMsgCount DOUBLE m_dRxSTDMsgRate float m_fRxEXTDMsgCount DOUBLE m_dRxEXTMsgRate float m_fRxSTD_RTRMsgCount float m_fRxEXTD_RTRMsgCount float m_fErrorTxCount DOUBLE m_dErrorTxRate float m_fErrorRxCount DOUBLE m_dErrorRxRate float BUSMASTER CAN 115 m_fErrorTotalCount DOUBLE m_dErrorRate float m_fDLCCount DOUBLE m_dBaudRate DOUBLE m_dTotalBusLoad int m_nSamples DOUBLE m_dAvarageBusLoad UCHAR m_ucTxErrorCounter UCHAR m_ucRxErrorCounter UCHAR m_ucTxPeakErrorCount UCHAR m_ucRxPeakErrorCount UCHAR m_ucStatus C
222. mmable node over a LIN bus User can program different event handlers using function editor The programming language is C C Six types of event handlers are supported e Bus Events e Message Handlers e Timer Handlers e Key Handlers e Error Handlers e DLL Handlers These function handlers when built and loaded are executed on e Bus connect and disconnect e Receipt of a Message e Elapse of a time interval e Press of a Key e Detection of error or change in error state e Loading unloading of DLL User can also include Header File names add Global Variables and Utility Functions while programming the event handlers All these functions can be edited and saved in a file with extension cpp The source file can be built to a DLL This DLL can be loaded dynamically There are three panes in function editor as shown below e Left Pane Will be called Pane 1 e Right Top Pane Will be called Pane 2 e Right Bottom Pane Will be called Pane 3 Pane 1 displays the list of functions included header files and global variables defined Pane 2 displays the contents of the source file Through Pane 3 User can edit the body of function selected 158 BUSMASTER LIN Ef sampleriecpp T Firg GCU_LERTERN VOIO GCC r LIN EYTornsgy gt a E C Program Files x86 BUSMASTER v 30 GCC EXTERN void GCC EXPORT OnDLL_Load S Include Headers 31 GCCLEXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnDII_U
223. n If end of file occurs with no data in the buffer NULL is returned Supporting OS subroutines required close fstat isatty lseek read sbrk write iprintf write formatted output integer only Synopsis include lt stdio h gt dine doriae Conse Cligse arom sool Description iprintf is a restricted version of printf it has the same arguments and behavior save that it cannot perform any floating point formatting the f g G e and F type specifiers are not recognized Returns iprintf returns the number of bytes in the output string save that the concluding NULL is not counted iprintf returns when the end of the format string is encountered If an error occurs iprintf returns EOF mktemp mkstemp generate unused file name Synopsis include lt stdio h gt char mktemp char path int mkstemp char path char _mktemp_r void reent char path int _mkstemp_r void reent char path LA r Description mktemp and mkstemp attempt to generate a file name that is not yet in use for any existing file mkstemp creates the file and opens it for reading and writing mktemp simply generates the file name You supply a simple pattern for the generated file name as the string at path The pattern should be a valid filename including path information if you wish ending with some number of X characters The generated filename will match the leading part of the name you supply with the trailing X characters
224. n output to the host system at every newline as well as when the buffer is full or when an input operation intervenes Use the size argument to specify how large a buffer you wish You can supply the buffer itself if you wish by passing a pointer to a suitable area of memory as buf Otherwise you may pass NULL as the buf argument and setvbuf will allocate the buffer Warnings You may only use setvbuf before performing any file operation other than opening the file If you supply a non null buf you must ensure that the associated storage continues to be available until you close the stream identified by fp 222 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Returns A 0 result indicates success EOF failure invalid mode or size can cause failure siprintf write formatted output integer only Synopsis include lt stdio h gt slime Glaljsicalinieic Chenn Scie COMB Char xOmMec ly Eee selg Description siprintf is a restricted version of sprintf it has the same arguments and behavior save that it cannot perform any floating point formatting the f g G e and F type specifiers are not recognized Returns siprintf returns the number of bytes in the output string save that the concluding NULL is not counted siprintf returns when the end of the format string is encountered tmpfile create a temporary file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt FILE tmpfile void FILE _tmpfile_r void reent Descrip
225. n together are used to display signal value received in engineering units The data received is multiplied by the factor added to the offset to obtain the engineering value Also a particular value of the signal can be given a meaningful name by using signal descriptor e g ON 1 OFF 0 This information will be used while interpreting the messages User can create new BUSMASTER database by selecting CAN gt Database gt New menu option This menu option will be enabled only when no database editor is open User can also open any BUSMASTER database by selecting CAN gt Database gt Open menu option This will allow you to specify the database name which you want to open and edit There are two panes in the database editor as shown in figure below BUSMASTER CAN 55 Databasef ditor CAN mtP_Er_motor mtP_eriws MTP Er LWR Message Details mtP_fr_teritite wir r10w Message Nane mSoll Verbauiste_neu 3 MessageLengh 8 Bytels MTP Er Getriebe Signal mP Er Aa mP Eres Details List MTP _Er_Daemofer DateFormat L t Endan MTP Er Akad MTP _Er_Arbag MTP Er ADR miP_Er_ass MaVa Mnva MTPO RKA Phs 2 MTP Dyn Quersperre_2 MTP Dyn _Quersperre_1 MTP om Pua Poc mtP_Dyn_Motor_4 Number of Signals 64 o0o009000000 VL1_IntoE lt mtP_oyniwe mtP_Dyn_Lecthife_2 New Signal Edt Signal Delete Signal mtP_Oyn_Lecthite_t mtP_Dyn_10w_2 Signal Des
226. nd receiver of CAN messages Initial Setup Call BUSMASTER exe by double clicking the appropriate icon in the BUSMASTER program group The tool will only work with Active mode Make sure that the USB hardware is connected to the PC and CAN bus For setting the Baud Rate a k a Bit rate go to Hardware menu and select Channel Configuration This brings up a dialog box as shown in figure 1 Enter the required baud rate in the Baud Rate field Other than the baud rate values this dialog can be used to set other parameters like sampling point Synchronization jump width Hardware acceptance code mask and warning limit Configure CAN Controller a 7 xi Channel 1 Clock Baud Rate 1000 Kbps z MHz Number of samples bit Propagation delay v Options pagati y ALL Warming Limit ia Fite SJW ja z Sampling Point 16 0x00 D B8 0x05 62 1 0x00 0xB0 0x06 56 16 1 Ox40 0x88 0x05 52 16 1 0x40 OxB0 0x06 56 16 1 0x80 0x88 0x05 62 16 1 0x80 OxB0 0x06 56 16 1 OxC0 0x88 0x05 62 16 1 OxCO 0x80 0x06 56 16 1 0x89 0x04 68 16 1 0x61 A OK Cancel e In USB interface setting Warning limit is not supported The default warning limit value 96 is set internally and user cannot change this value e Dual filtering is not supported in USB interface Only single filtering is supported To send CAN messages the messages has to be defined first For
227. nd the message now SendMsg STLIN_MSG amp SMsg Right click on edit area of function editor Select Insert Message or Insert Signal option to insert message structure or signal structure Select the option Yes I want to declare selected message structure variable option in the Message and Signal List to initialise message with its struct definition Required Include header file Unions h Note e Unions h file will be automatically generated by BUSMASTER during database import e This file will be in the database file directory BUSMASTER LIN 165 LIN API Listing BUSMASTER API Listing SendMsg To send a LIN frame Synopsis UINT SendMsg STLIN_MSG Description This function will put the message on the LIN bus The message structure STLIN_MSG will be filled with ID length message type checksum type and data Inputs STLIN_MSG LIN Message Structure Returns Zero on successful transmisstion Non zero value on failure Trace To send string to Trace window Synopsis WAIN WikeG e velit arona so Description This function will format the passed parameters based on format specified and will show the formatted text in TRACE window The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs msg Pointer to character array Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case user has passed a NULL pointer
228. ndicates Peer_2 peer or Broadcast BYTE m_byDataPage 1 DataPage DP Set to 0 currently BYSE nm VReseia c Cun mele am a meRCScinVicG msc taseom Om BYD im loy Pieal iealieyy 3 37 ERU CHERCN typedef union tagUPGN UENS ZAMANE CN 8 Bile STRUCT_PGN m_sPGN UNION_PGN J1939 Extended 29 bit ID IE VOCOCHs Sie BUC bb ag Sl RU Cie ORB lilaelsP BYTE m_bySrcAddress 8 Sender node address UNION_PGN m_uPGN Parameter group number PGN SAE lists various PGNS and its SPNS ORUC Bs IEA ALP E typedef union tag29BitID ULNISZ m Wintec 1D 8 2s SIERUCHE AONE IED qh SA Sialic elp TUINIEOINE 2S 1B I0 AED J1939 message type typedef enum EJ1939_MSG_ TYPE MSG_TYPE_NONE 0x0 MSG_TYPE_COMMAND MSG_TYPE_REQUEST MSG_TYPE_DATA MSG_TYPE BROADCAST MSG_TYPE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MSG_TYPE_GROUP_FUNCTIONS MSG_TYPE_NM_ACL MSG_TYPE_NM_ROST_ACL BUSMASTER CAN 105 MSCE MSCE MSG_TYP MSCE MSCE MISE _ NO MSGSTR NM_CMD_ADDRESS NM_TPCM_BAM NM_TPCM_RTS NM_TPCM_CTS NM_TPCM_EOM_ACK NM_TPCM_CON_ABORT _NM_TPDT ex ex ELELEE E typedef enum EDIRECTION DIR_RX R DEIR we Um DIR_ALL J1939 message properties typedef struct tagSTJ1939_ MSG_PROPERTIES UINT64 m un64
229. nep Cage Clic COMSic Cligue Sie Save ie IkSinvejcla 2 Description strncpy copies not more than length characters from the the string pointed to by src including the terminating null character to the array pointed to by dst If the string pointed to by src is shorter than length characters null characters are appended to the destination array until a total of length characters have been written Returns This function returns the initial value of dst strpbrk find chars in string Synopsis include lt string h gt BUSMASTER C Library Functions 231 chaie Ferroork conset Chait gil Conse Chew 7S2 Description This function locates the first occurence in the string pointed to by s1 of any character in string pointed to by s2 excluding the terminating null character Returns strpbrk returns a pointer to the character found in s1 or a null pointer if no character from s2 occurs in s1 strrchr reverse search for character in string Synopsis include lt string h gt Cligue Serieari Conse Chac Seieilme doe C 7 Description This function finds the last occurence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by string including the terminating null character Returns Returns a pointer to the located character or a null pointer if c does not occur in string strspn find initial match Synopsis include lt string h gt SHaZiC Ease HSM CON Sinemet nS ieont ehars 2 Descr
230. nfigured for Message Display Configure Message Display x Filter DB NDB Buffer m Filter List ai MT Dispaly Filter LAY Tx Msa Filter OF RTRA Fitter OK Cancel Help Display Filter To configure display filter list select Configure button which will list available filters and selected filters BUSMASTER CAN 27 Filter Selection Dialog Configured Filters Selected Filters Y Channel 2 Filter Y CAN gt Display Filter T Filter_ T CAN gt Replay Tx Filter Y Log Filter tu Y CAN TX Mag Filter ATR Filter T Add All Delete All Cancel Message Coloring User can configure the color with which the message will be displayed and associate a textual description to message By default all messages are displayed in black color and the message ID itself as the associated text For the database message user can only edit the color 28 BUSMASTER CAN Configure Message Display CAN Fiter DB NDB Buffer Message Tent m remze_3 mBremse_5 ISO_EPH_Reqg ISO Funktionale mMotor CNG 1 IMMO_GSG_Anl IMMO_MSG1_A IMMO_MSG2_4 IMMO MSGI A IMMO MSG4 4 MSG1_WFS_Ani MSG2_WFS_Angm hae be oa a ee Cancel Help BUSMASTER CAN 29 Configure Message Display CAN Fiter DB NDB Buffer Message Text Test Present AudioStatus OF Cancel Help Adding message attribute To configure a message display option please follow the steps given be
231. ng Description This function will disable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is already OFF WriteToLogFile To send string to log file Synopsis UINT WriteToLogFile char msg Description This function will output text passed as parameter msg to all log files The return value of this function will be Oorl Inputs msg Pointer to characterarray Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is OFF or user has passed a NULL pointer LIN Database Editor 168 BUSMASTER LIN Introduction LIN Database Editor Overview BUSMASTER LIN Database Editor is a user friendly tool to create edit and view LIN Description Files LDF LIN Database Editor supports LDF versions 1 3 2 0 and 2 1 Using LIN Database Editor user can create LIN Description files with out knowing the details of LIN Description file format File View Help 9 tal tel JA LDF Element View 4 Lin Cluster a E Master E MasterECU 4 E Slaves W Door Left B Door_Right Unconditional Frames Door_left_Open 0x2 Door_Right_Open 0x3 Event Triggered Door Open 0x0 Sporadic Frames Diagnostic Frames MasterReq 0x3C SlaveResp 0x3D ix Signals i Door_left_Signali ix
232. ng which lists all the defined Codings To define new coding refer the section Codings 2 Publisher and Subscribers e Signal publisher can be selected from the Publisher drop down which lists Master and all the Slave nodes e Subscribers of the signals can be selected from the Select Subscribers list Editing Signals To edit existing Signal right click on the required signal item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Signal lt Signal Name gt dialog is displayed as shown below x Edit Signal Door _left_Signal1 B ress General Properties Name Door_left_Signal1 Length 8 bits ae readin o Seectcadrg 7 Tx Rx Relations V Door_Left Select 4 Door_Right Y Publisher Subcribers 4 MasterECU If the publisher is changed the signal will be unmapped from the frames which are published by the old ECU To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Signal name will be checked for its uniqueness e Initial value should be in range of 0 to 24signal_length 1 BUSMASTER LIN 185 e A Publisher should be selected To discard the changes click on Cancel button Deleting Signal To delete any signal right click on the Signal item in the Element view and click on the pop up menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the signal On deletion delet
233. ng portion consisting of one or more unparseable characters which always includes the terminating null character Then it attempts to convert the subject string into an unsigned long integer and returns the result If the value of base is zero the subject string is expected to look like a normal C integer constant save that no optional sign is permitted a possible Ox indicating hexadecimal radix and a number If base is between 2 and 36 the expected form of the subject is a sequence of digits which may include letters depending on the base representing an integer in the radix specified by base The letters a z or A Z are used as digits valued from 10 to 35 If base is 16 a leading Ox is permitted The subject sequence is the longest initial sequence of the input string that has the expected form starting with the first non whitespace character If the string is empty or consists entirely of whitespace or if the first non whitespace character is not a permissible digit the subject string is empty If the subject string is acceptable and the value of base is zero strtoul attempts to determine the radix from the input string A string with a leading Ox is treated as a hexadecimal value a string with a leading 0 and no x is treated as octal all other strings are treated as decimal If base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the conversion radix as described above Finally a pointer to the first character past the converted subject st
234. nload include lt Windows h gt 32 GCCLEXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnMsgName_DCDC_LINALTECM_R_01 DCDC_LINALTECM_R_01 RxMsg 33 include lt LINIncludes h gt 34 B include C Users sia3kor Deskt 35 HA Bus Events 25 void OnBus_Connect0 B void OnBus_Disconnect void OnBus_Pre_Connect0 fi Message Handlers 2 void OnMsglD_29 STLIN_MSG Rx R void OnMsgName_DCDC_LINAL 45 void OnBus_Connect t Pane 2 Displays contents of C C file delete pTmp End LIN g Timer Handlers 46 St enera B void OnTimer Timer 10 47 void OnBus_Pre_Connect 5 Key Handlers 49 void OnKey_a unsigned char Key eu End LIN H E Error Handlers E7 enid mMenTN JAGTTTN NGG PvMen a void OnError_Checksum SEVENT 77 Place for cleanup void OnError_Receive Frame SEV delete pTmp void OnError_Slave No_Response void Onrror_Sync SEVENT_SYNC 5 5 DLL Handlers void OnDLL_Load void OnDLL_Unload P Utility Functions Global Variables Pane 1 Displays handler j functions t General access to the function editor Go to LIN gt Node Simulation gt Configure to open the window Configure Simulated Systems Right click on LIN Bus in the left pane and select New Simulated System or Add Simulated System Select then the sim file Right click on the new simulated system and select Add Node The name will also be used as basename for the generated DLL The Node Details wil
235. ns will go along with the repetition mode called Monoshot or Cyclic In monoshot mode messages belong to a block will be transmitted only once After completing the cycle of transmission nothing will be transmitted In cyclic mode message transmission will happen cyclically After completing one cycle of transmission first message in the block will be transmitted and so on In case of key triggering if the mode is monoshot messages in the block will be transmitted one after another for each trigger key press Once all messages are transmitted nothing will be transmitted If the mode is cyclic after completing one cycle the first message will be transmitted on press on the key again and this cycle will continue The special attribute All Message is used to generate heavy load condition This is attribute is applicable only for key triggering If All Message is checked and the mode is monoshot on press of the key all messages will be transmitted once without any delay in between If the mode is cyclic then all messages will be transmitted continuously with out any delay in between This can be stopped only be stopping the Tx message transmission Triggering Value For timer triggering the triggering value is in milliseconds The minimum supported timer value is 1 millisecond For key triggering the value can be A Z a z 0 9 Note e Key trigger character is case sensitive e Same key character shall be used for multiple message blocks e One bloc
236. nsmitted replay will stop In case of break point that line will be highlighted If it is due to the last message transmission then first message will be highlighted Once the replay is stopped replay message window will be activated again Stop If user selects Stop the replay of messages will be stopped If replay is in the middle of message transmission that message will be completely transmitted and then replay will stop Once the replay is stopped replay window will be activated again and next message of last transmitted message will be highlighted Break Points Inserting break points in the replay messages enables user to transmit a section of messages and then go in to the step mode Break points shall be inserted by just double clicking the message entry in the replay window This is a toggling functionality Double clicking again on the same message entry will disable break point Replay with Go option will stop at break point This makes user to analyze the CAN communication better Note e Break points are available only in interactive single run mode and will be considered in Go option only e Incase of Step break points are ignored Non Interactive Replay In non interactive replay message transmission will start from the beginning during tool connect Message transmission will be stopped during tool disconnect Enable Disable Filter Filter App Filter can be enabled disabled using tool bar buttons or menu Filters mu
237. nt on LIN BUS The time mode can BUSMASTER LIN 141 Column Explanation be changed to Absolute System Relative Mode using LIN gt Message Window gt Time Mode menu This Menu will display weather the message is received or sent from BUSMASTER Tx Represents the message is sent From BUSMASTER Rx Represent Message is received in BUSMASTER Message Displays the Name of message if available in LDF file Message Type This Column will tell the Frame type The following are the Frame types displayed in this column e LIN Frame e Error Slave No Response e Error CRC Error e Event Sleep e Event Wakeup ID Displays the LIN Message ID Checksum This column will give the Checksum value and Checksum type Channel This column will display on which channel A B or AB the message was received DLC This column will display the Length of Frame in Bytes Data Byte s This column will display the Data Bytes received Transmitted of the Frame Message Interpretation window It is possible to Monitor the interpretation of a single message in separate window called Message Interpretation Double click on any message in Message window to Activate the Message Interpretation window An Instance of this window is shown in following figure 142 BUSMASTER LIN LIN Name Message Signals Name _ Physical Value Raw Value Units Signall 15 875000 211 mye Signal2 8 000000 et Signal3 8 000000 a Signal4 0 000000 v
238. ocessshe ER RE N EREN cosets 140 Network Stausticsss s cnts iA ei Rak elaine eni peta ied Wi Reg Ba eel ihinte Nese Reg elas 142 S1p ral W at t EAEAN E R sesug scons ELTE EE EE arena eulveslsspay co etusc A EE 143 TOP SING rests sees iiss ela a tee aaa eg ot I Se ee ee 145 PSDP BUMS A EE thew tnte sae tat Shdbes nce E E E E E exteekeacedte ESE 147 Message BI aI E N E sc she eth rte Be a SE teen ed RG his aes 149 TIN Node Simulations sss copes ssoeess aseredst aagsevesetusee sees dash ruses cops aep A e E S nE E Epy aE Tri 154 Node Simulation Configuration cc ceceececeeceeeeeseseeeeesseeseecseesaecsecsaecsecsseeeeseeseeneees 154 Function Editor seiri merie E E E E E E RE E R RS 157 Responding to Master Request cece ceceseesceseesecesceesceseeeeecseeesecseesaecsaeaecscesecnseeseeeeees 162 LIN cAPD E TEE aE E Se EEE EE ENE E EE ccs cp cate pepes ceosed vos seaesupencdyaesthsertpctease 162 LIN Database Editor senian a n e Eaa gas ee ag ode a Sian T E EERE 167 Introductio ae r A castes GA cadre AE A A EE EE E EO 168 OVELVIEW e a a Ska Ra ahi E en E E Hehe Asie 168 Getting Started x 2c doles Ee EAE SOE cide cdess sein ou fae E A events EEE ratios 171 LDE Elementsin ne Sin ee ee a een ne 171 C Library FUNCOMS cased sucsned heeds dsbveis ved ead edacecvckpvekentase acetaveedevidisvecnviven assassin LII Standard Library PUNCH OnSs sse5s ccs sesepedivs EEE een odes EER 193 abs integer absolute value magnitude ee eee eeeeseeeeecseeeeecaeesaece
239. odes each representing a dll Multiple user programs can be built as dlls and loaded The configured simulated systems can be saved and used across sessions The entire above mentioned configuration except message replay is saved across sessions Refer the respective sections for more details Baudrate While defining a baud rate the number of samples bit value can also be defined For a selected baud rate a set of all possible combinations of CNFO CNF1 and CNF2 values will be listed From this you can select any one set The selected combination of CNFO CNF1 and CNF2 values will be used to initialize the CAN controller The baud rate can be changed by the method mentioned below e Select Hardware gt Channel Configuration e Configure CAN Controller dialog box will be displayed as shown below e Enter the required Baud rate e Ifrequired select the Number of Sample Bit e Specific values for propagation delay and SJW can be selected too Default selection for them is ALL 18 BUSMASTER CAN e If the default value is not appropriate for the application then the required CNFO CNF1 and CNF2 value can be selected by selecting an entry from in the list Configure CAN Controller j 2 x Clock Tooo amp 1000 z Number of 1 Channel 1 ae nope ele samples bit 1 P tion delay z Options ropagation delay ALL Warning Limit Filter SJW aLL CNF1 CNF2 CNF3 Sampling Point 0x00 OxB8 0x05 62 16 1 0x00 OxBO 0x0
240. odes in the network Synopsis UINT RequestAddress UINT Channel Description This function will request the address of each node in the J1939 network Inputs Channel Channel number Returns TRUE success FALSE if the handler is already in the specified state CommandAddress To command a address for a node Synopsis UINT CommandAddress UINT64 EcuName BYTE NewAddress UINT Channel Description This function will command a address to the node having ECU NAME as specified Inputs EcuName ECU NAME of a node for which the address has to be commanded NewAddress The new address Channel Channel number Returns TRUE success FALSE if the handler is already in the specified state SetTimeout To configure flow control timeouts of J1939 network Synopsis UINT SetTimeout BYTE TimeoutType UINT TimeoutValue Description This function can be used to configure flow control timeouts in J1939 network Inputs TimeoutType Timeout type Possible values are a Tb 0 Time interval between two packets in broadcast transmission 112 BUSMASTER CAN b Tr 1 Maximum wait period for a sender without receiving response from the receiver c Th 2 Time interval between two Clear to Send message when delaying the data d T1 3 Maximum wait period for a receiver when more packets were expected e T2 4 Maximum wait period for a receiver to receive data packets after sending Clear to Send mess
241. of the form 9 9999e I 999 takes a floating point number e Eprints the same way as e but using E to introduce the exponent takes a floating point number e g prints a signed value in either f or e form based on given value and precision trailing zeros and the decimal point are printed only if necessary takes a floating point number e G prints the same way as g but using E for the exponent if an exponent is needed takes a floating point number e n stores in the same object a count of the characters written takes a pointer to int BUSMASTER C Library Functions 217 e p prints a pointer in an implementation defined format This implementation treats the pointer as an unsigned long same as Lu Returns sprintf returns the number of bytes in the output string save that the concluding NULL is not counted printf and fprintf return the number of characters transmitted If an error occurs printf and fprintf return EOF No error returns occur for sprintf putc write a character macro Synopsis include lt stdio h gt aie pure akin wl IP ICG sa fp Description putc is a macro defined in stdio h putc writes the argument ch to the file or stream identified by fp after converting it from an int to an unsigned char If the file was opened with append mode or if the stream cannot support positioning then the new character goes at the end of the file or stream Otherwise the new character is written
242. of to query the two indicators Returns clearerr does not return a result fclose close a file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt aLione CCLO a kya SD Description If the file or stream identified by fp is open fclose closes it after first ensuring that any pending data is written by calling fflush fp Returns fclose returns 0 if successful including when fp is NULL or not an open file otherwise it returns EOF fdopen turn open file into a stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt FILE fdopen int fd const char mode Initia se ClojaSinn AVOL weSine Laie Cey Const Char moce e Description fdopen produces a file descriptor of type FILE from a descriptor for an already open file returned for example by the system subroutine open rather than by fopen The mode argument has the same meanings as in fopen Returns File pointer or NULL as for fopen feof test for end of file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt SLIONG CEOL PALLD w2 p 208 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description feof tests whether or not the end of the file identified by fp has been reached Returns feof returns 0 if the end of file has not yet been reached if at end of file the result is nonzero ferror test whether read write error has occurred Synopsis include lt stdio h gt dae cerror Pia Aae Description The stdio functions maintain an error indicator with
243. omri cllogie x cloar y p Description copysign constructs a number with the magnitude absolute value of its first argument x and the sign of its second argument y copysignf does the same thing the two functions differ only in the type of their arguments and result Returns copysign returns a double with the magnitude of x and the sign of y copysignf returns a float with the magnitude of x and the sign of y cosh coshf hyperbolic cosine Synopsis include lt math h gt double cosh double x irl ere Cosa arllo sie zF 240 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description cosh computes the hyperbolic cosine of the argument x cosh x is defined as Angles are specified in radians coshf is identical save that it takes and returns float Returns The computed value is returned When the correct value would create an overflow cosh returns the value HUGE_VAL with the appropriate sign and the global value errno is set to ERANGE You can modify error handling for these functions using the function matherr erf erff erfc erfcf error function Synopsis include lt math h gt double erf double x clop emirra loet x doubleren erdobe rlogin errer icllo aic oe Description erf calculates an approximation to the error function which estimates the probability that an observation will fall within x standard deviations of the mean assuming a normal distribution erfc calculates the complementary
244. on pos after first recording it with fgetpos See fseek for a similar facility Returns fgetpos returns 0 when successful If fgetpos fails the result is 1 The reason for failure is indicated in errno either ESPIPE the stream identified by fp doesn t support repositioning or EINVAL invalid file position ftell return position in a stream or file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt Lome eSLi iP IIb E 6 Description Objects of type FILE can have a position that records how much of the file your program has already read Many of the stdio functions depend on this position and many change it as a side effect The result of ftell is the current position for a file identified by fp If you record this result you can later use it with fseek to return the file to this position In the current implementation ftell simply uses a character count to represent the file position this is the same number that would be recorded by fgetpos Returns ftell returns the file position if possible If it cannot do this it returns 1L Failure occurs on streams that do not support positioning the global errno indicates this condition with the value ESPIPE BUSMASTER C Library Functions 213 fwrite write array elements Synopsis include lt stdio h gt gilze t mpita COME VOC sow Size ic Size Siwe CO Wlidie I Iila lt 19 Description fwrite attempts to copy starting from the memory location buf
245. on can be selected from the combo box or directly typed The combo box will have primitive data types and database message structure names 5 Enter the Function Prototype in the Edit control like e g Func_One int a int b 6 Select OK button Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Utility Functions category in Pane 1 Global Variables To add delete modify global variables follow the steps given below 1 Select Global Variables category in the Pane 1 and double click 2 The Pane 3 will become editable and will show global variable block 3 Change this block to Add Delete Modify the global variables Variable declaration will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 Note e Use global variable block to use macros structure or union definitions The scope of variables and definitions given in this block is throughout the program Edit Function Body User can edit any function body by double clicking the prototype of the function displayed in Pane 1 On double click of the function prototype the function body will be displayed in the Pane 3 and will be ready for editing Variable of Message Type BUSMASTER defines structures for messages define in the database User can use these structures while programming Please follow the steps below to add variable of the message type 1 Edit the function for which database message name is to be added
246. on which pops out a menu with three options System absolute and relative time mode display Toggle Message Overwrite This is a toggle tool bar button This button is used to switch between message overwrite mode and append mode In message overwrite mode there will be only one instance of a message ID in the message window Subsequent messages received with the same ID will overwrite the message entry In append mode a newly added message entry will be appended instead Please refer to description B of the figure shown in section Message Window Toggle Numeric Mode This is a toggle tool bar button This button is used to switch between decimal mode and hexadecimal mode In decimal mode data bytes will be displayed in decimal format In hexadecimal mode data bytes will be displayed in hexadecimal format By default massages will be displayed in hexadecimal mode Please refer to description C of the figure shown in section Message Window Toggle Message Interpretation This is a toggle tool bar button This button is used either to enable or disable message on line interpretation This button is enabled only in message overwrite mode If on line interpretation of message is enabled a message entry will be followed by a textual description of the received message Please refer to description D of the figure shown in section Message Window The aforementioned will be done only if the message ID is found in the database Else the message will be fol
247. onfiguration dialog as shown below Configure Logging for e Log File Details File Path D Projects BUSMASTER BUSMASTERLogFie _ Time Mode system X Channel ALL Numeric Format File Mode 2 Append Overwrite Reset Timestamp MV Start on Reception of ID 0x FE D Projects BUSMASTER BUSMA Add IV Stop on Reception of ID 0x 445 m Create New Log File For every Bus Connect for Transmission After each file size exceeding 50 MB After every fo Hr s 30 Min s Number of files to be allowed 10 Enable Disable Logging during tool Connect Disconnect Log Files User can add as many as log files in to the list of Log Files This list will show the log files that are already configured To add a new Log file select Add button This will add a log file with default file name User can change the file name using button in the Log File Details section The check box associated with the log file will make the log file eligible for logging If the check box is not checked logging will not happen to that particular file BUSMASTER CAN 23 Log File Details Log file details will give configuration of the selected log file This will give info of log file path time mode numeric mode file mode log triggers and log filter Log File Path The file path text box will give the selected log file path To change the path se
248. only and will get populated on mapping signals using Map Signal button 3 Signal Mapping e To map signals to the frame click on Map Signal button Map Signal dialog is displayed as shown below with lists signals thats belong to the publisher selected in the Publisher field BUSMASTER LIN 177 Signals Published by ECU Door Righ Door Right_Signali To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Frame name will be checked for its uniqueness e Ifthe frame is not dynamic frame Frame Id will be checked for uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel button Editing Unconditional Frames To edit existing Unconditional Frame right click on the Unconditional frame item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Unconditional Frame dialog is displayed as shown below 178 BUSMASTER LIN ID _ Dynamic Frame MasterECU Signal Name Subscriber s Length bits Init Value 1 Door Right MasterECU T 0x1 Deleting Unconditional Frame To delete Unconditional Frame right click on the Unconditional frame item in the Element view and click on the popup menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the frame On deletion deleted Unconditional frame will be unmapped from the Publisher and the Subscribers Event Triggered Fram
249. oo many open files EMLINK Too many links EMULTIHOP Multihop attempted ENAMETOOLONG File or path name too long ENFILE Too many open files in system ENODEV No such device ENOENT No such file or directory ENOEXEC Exec format error ENOLCK No lock ENOLINK Virtual circuit is gone ENOMEM Not enough space ENOMSG No message of desired type ENONET Machine is not on the network ENOPKG No package ENOSPC No space left on device BUSMASTER C Library Functions 229 ENOSR No stream resources ENOSTR Not a stream ENOSYS Function not implemented ENOTBLK Block device required ENOTDIR Not a directory ENOTEMPTY Directory not empty ENOTTY Not a character device ENXIO No such device or address EPERM Not owner EPIPE Broken pipe EPROTO Protocol error ERANGE Result too large EREMOTE Resource is remote EROFS Read only file system ESPIPE Illegal seek ESRCH No such process ESRMNT Srmount error ETIME Stream ioctl timeout ETXTBSY Text file busy EXDEV Cross device link Returns This function returns a pointer to a string Your application must not modify that string strlen character string length Synopsis include lt string h gt Sive_ic Sicileia eo imerc Ciieie sicie p Description The strlen function works out the length of the string starting at str by counting chararacters until it reaches a NULL character Returns strlen returns the character count strlwr force string to lower case Synopsis inclu
250. or the LIN messages of LIN Network Refer LIN Message Window section for more information LIN Cluster Configuration Introduction To connect BUSMASTER to the LIN Network first it has to be configured with the proper LIN Baud Rate and LIN Protocol Version This can be done using by importing a LDF or using manual settings Configuration To configure the Cluster use LIN gt Cluster Configuration menu This will display the Window as shown in following Figure 136 BUSMASTER LIN m Cluster Configuration V Overwrite LDF Settings Protocol Version Lun 2 0 xe Baud Rate 19200 LIN BaudRate amp Protocol Settings 1 To enable master mode for LIN channel for transmitting frame headers check the Enable Master Mode check box under LIN Network Settings 2 LIN baud rate amp Protocol version can be set either by loading the LDF file or can be set explicity by using LIN Network Settings section by Enabling Overwrite LDF Settings as shown in above figure LIN Schedule Table Configuration LIN Schedule Table Configuration can be used to configure schedule tables imported from LDF file to transmit master requests by following the below steps 1 To configure Schedule Table use LIN gt Schedule Configuration menu which displays Configure Schedule Table dialog as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 137 5 amp Table Frame Delay ms If E A are Me onan SES InitTable
251. otocol function 1 Multi packet broadcast A broadcast message is broadcasted to all nodes in the network Sender node must first send a Broadcast Announce Message BAM followed by sequence of 8 byte data Receiving nodes can prepare for reception if interested BAM message contains following information 1 PGN to be sent 2 Size of multi packet message 3 Number of packages Transmitter Receiver TP CM_BAM Multi packet broadcast data transfer BUSMASTER CAN 87 2 Multi packet peer to peer For destination specific data transmission communication needs to be established hence subject to flow control Transport protocol function is applied in three steps 1 Connection Initialization The sender of a message transmits a Request to Send message The receiving node responds with either a Clear to Send message or a Connection abort message incase it decides not to establish connection 2 Data Transfer Sender transmits data after receiving Clear to Send message 3 Connection Closure The receiver of the message upon reception sends End of Message ACK message Transmitter Receiver TP CM_RTS TP EoMA Multi packet peer to peer data transfer Network management Each ECU in a J1939 network must hold at least one NAME and claim one 8 bit address for identification purposes 1 ECU NAME 64 bit identifier includes an indication of the ECU s main function performed at the ECU s address Arbitrary Vehicle
252. p menu Delete and Delete All Select Delete pop up menu A delete confirmation will be displayed Select Yes to confirm deletion The selected message frame will be removed from the message frame list The added messages can be directly transmitted instantaneously The steps to do this is listed below e Select a message entry or message entries from the message list e Select Send button to transmit these messages The other way of doing this is right click on selected message entries This will show a popup menu with Send option Select Send to transmit selected messages once a Note e To send a message tool should be in connected state e If more then one message are selected to send all messages will be transmitted one after another without any delay Transmission Blocks In Detail The transmission blocks are segregated in to Message Blocks and Message frames that belong to a block Message blocks will have logical name and triggering attributes and list of messages Message block name is logical representation of the block Message block attributes are triggering type and trigger value 34 BUSMASTER CAN Triggering Type Two types of triggering are supported by BUSMASTER These are timer and key triggering In timer triggering messages will be transferred periodically with the time delay mentioned in the trigger value In case of key triggering the message will be transmitted on press of the trigger character These optio
253. ped with out tool disconnect The messages added in to the Tx message list can also be modified Follow the steps given below e Select an entry in the message list The selected detail will be unpacked and will be displayed in the edit controls below If it is a database message then the signal details will be listed in the signal list with both physical and raw values e Any modification in Message Name ID DLC Data bytes signal raw and physical values will directly reflect in the selected message entry in the message list The signal matrix will also get updated to reflect the changes e Selecting Apply or OK button will reflect message details change in transmission immediately if message transmission is on User can delete a message frame entry from the list by following the steps given below e Select CAN gt Transmit gt Configure menu option This will display the dialog box as shown below in figure a e Select an entry in the message frame list e Select Delete button A delete confirmation will be displayed Select Yes to confirm deletion The selected item will be deleted from the list Multiple items can be selected to delete multiple items in one shot e Select Delete All button to delete all entries in the message block A delete all confirmation will be displayed Select Yes to confirm deletion This will clear message block entries The other way of doing delete is Right click mouse button This will display a pop u
254. perties displayed will vary based on the protocol version selected e Slave created with the protocol version 1 3 is as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 173 e Slave created with the protocol version 2 0 is as shown below 1000 0000 1000 0000 e Slave created with the protocol version 2 1 is as shown below 174 BUSMASTER LIN L Create Slave U e 50 000000 General Properties e Name Name of the Slave which should follow C identifier rules and should be unique e Protocol Version 1 For LDF Version 2 1 Protocol version drop down will be populated with 1 3 2 0 and 2 1 2 For LDF Version 2 0 Protocol version drop down will be populated with 1 3 and 2 0 3 For LDF Version 1 3 Protocol version drop down will be populated with 1 3 e Response Error Signal Response Error Signal drop down will be populated with the list of signals existing in the configuration Response Error Signal is displayed if the Slave protocol versions 2 0 and 2 1 e Fault State Signals To specify fault state signals click on Edit button which displays BUSMASTER LIN 175 Editing Slave To Edit the existing Slave node right click on the Slave in the Element View and select popup menu Edit which displays et Se cet i I 1000 000000 50 000000 1000 000000 0 000000 Response Error Signal Fault State Signals Door_left_Signal1
255. pha numeric key Connect and Disconnect User can connect disconnect the tool from the LIN bus by pressing releasing a toggle tool bar button shown in the figure below Connect Disconnec The tool can also be connected by selecting LIN gt Connect menu option available only in disconnected state The same can be disconnected by selecting LIN gt Disconnect menu option available only in Connected state or by pressing Esc key When the tool is in connected state the menu option will become Disconnect and when the tool is in disconnected state the menu option will be displayed is Connect Transmission and reception of messages can be done only when the tool is in the connected state 140 BUSMASTER LIN LIN Message Window Introduction On line LIN Network Monitoring can be done using FlexRay Message window Activation Use LIN gt Message Window gt Activate menu to Activate the Message window This will display Message Window as shown in following figure Gh Message Window LIN E Tine y Message Message Type Tx Rx Chann a DLCs IDo Data Byte s A Checksum Once the BUSMASTER is connected to LIN Network the Message window will display all the Messages Transmitted on the network Also the Message window will display the LIN Error Messages amp other LIN Events Currently the following Error or Event messages were supported e CRC Error e Sync Error e Sla
256. plication Gets pointer to BUSMASTER Application Description Gets the pointer to BUSMASTER Application using which various operation in BUSMASTER is performed Synopsis HRESULT GetApplication out BusMasterA pp pApplication Inputs out IBusMasterApp pApplication gets the pointer to BUSMASTER Application Usage in COM Client IBusMasterApp pApplication HRESULT hResult GetApplication pApplication 118 BUSMASTER CAN Cause of failure NA StopLogging To stop logging Synopsis HRESULT StopLogging Description This function disables logging Inputs NA Cause of failure NA StartLogging To start logging Synopsis HRESULT StartLogging Description This function enables logging Inputs NA Cause of failure Log file absent in configuration AddLoggingBlock To Add a Logging Block Synopsis HRESULT AddLoggingBlock SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock Description This function is used to a add logging block Inputs SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock pointer to logging block Usage in COM Client SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock new SLOGGINGBLOCK_USRQ m_IApplication gt AddLoggingBlock psLoggingBlock Cause of failure NA BUSMASTER CAN 119 GetLoggingBlock To get a particular Logging Block Synopsis HRESULT GetLoggingBlock in USHORT BlockIndex out SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock Description This function gets a particular logging block Input
257. ponent 1 0 Type Library 145 RADIUS Protocol 1 0 Type Library A4CDual Priority _ Acrobat Access 2 0 Type Library AcrolEHelper 1 0 Type Library Active DS IIS Extension DII vr b Help elet _ Active DS IIS Namespace Provider Active DS Type Library ctive Setuo Control Library CAN_Monitor4pp Location C Program Files RBIN CANYvas USB CANvas exe Language Standard Now all the BUSMASTER COM APIs can be used in the client application Once the VB project is configured to use CAN_Monitor type library a global variable is needed to be declared and initialised so that the COM server can be accessed This can be accomplished using following statement Dim gBUSMASTERApp As CAN_MonitorApp Application Set gQBUSMASTERApp New CAN_MonitorApp Application Now the varible g3 USMASTERApp can be used to access all the COM members For connecting the tool following code is required gBUSMASTERApp Connect 1 From C Let s start with a very simple C application Make a simple dialog based application with the class wizard be it an MFC or an ATL WTL application Just make sure that ColnitializeQ and CoUninitialize are called somewhere that is done automatically in ATL applications Put a button on the dialog somewhere wire it up and put the following in the message handler for the BN_CLICKED handler HResult hr hr CoCreateInstance CLSI
258. quest_NodeO5 DiagUSDT_request_NodeO6 DiagUSDT_request_Node x 42 BUSMASTER CAN 4 From this dialog message handlers of different type can be selected The different types of message handlers supported are e Message handler based on the message name e Message handler based on message ID e Message handler based on range of message ID e Message handler for all received messages The type of message handler can be selected using the radio buttons To add handler based on the message name the corresponding message should be available in the imported database Multiple messages can be added from this dialog box by clicking on Apply button after selecting a message handler Function definition will be added to the source file in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Message Handlers category in Pane 1 Add Timer Handler Select Timer Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Add A dialog box appears Enter Timer Handler Name like e g Time_One and the Timer Value in milliseconds Select OK button Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Timer Handlers category in Pane 1 F Nn bBwWN e Note e Adding a Sleep function inside a Timer handler might have an adverse effect on the application e Maximum of 16 timers can run simultaneously in cyclic mode Anything above 16 will fail to star
259. r key can be used as keyboard shortcut to Check Uncheck the Node s a 1 Node s can t be Added Removed Configured Enabled Disabled while the network is connected 2 A Node can be edited while the network is connected But the file must be built again to see the changes Note Node Simulation Examples Node simulation supports both C and C compilation Below are the examples in C for CAN and J1939 J1939 This file is generated by BUSMASTER VERSION 1 1 BUSMASTER VERSION 1 7 0 PROTOCOL J1939 Start J1939 include header include lt Windows h gt include lt J1939Includes h gt End J1939 include header Start J1939 global variable End J1939 global variable Start J1939 Function Prototype GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnTimer_Timer_1000 GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnKey_q unsigned char KeyValue GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnPGN_A11 STJ1939_MSG RxMsg GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnEvent_DataConf UINT32 unPGN BYTE bySrc BYTE byDest BOOL bSuccess GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnEvent_AddressClaim BYTE byAddress s ime Wicallls Cime Ss ime yie GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnDLL_Load j GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnDLL_Unload GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnTimer_dew_10 GCC_EXTERN void GCC_EXPORT OnBus_Connect GCC_EXTE
260. r m_ucChksumTyp 74 Cosckeum Type 0 Classical CT Enhanced unsigned char m_ucDatalLen Darca lenca 03 8 unsigned char m_ucMsgID LIN Identifier union UCHAR m_aucData 8 Byte USHORT m_auwData 4 Word OUI m sisulDeice 2 s Long m_sWhichBit Data unsigned long m_ulTimeStamp unsigned char m_ucChannel Hi unsigned char m_ucCRC bd rose Nm Ser Required Include header file is LINIncludes h Input Parameters m_ucMsgTyp 0 Sets message type as Header 1 Sets message type as Response m_ucChksumTyp 0 Sets checksum type as Classic 1 Sets checksum type as Enhanced m_ucDataLen dlc of the LIN message Valid range of LIN data length is 0 8 m_ucMsgID LIN message identifier m_aucData m_auwData m_aulData Contains data bytes m_sWhichBit To access update Data bytes m_ulTimeStamp Actual time stamp of the received message m_ucChannel Channel number m_ucCRC Checksum value of the received message STLIN_Msg Example STLIN_MSG sMsg Slave Response Os f Classic sMsg m_ucMsgTyp l sMsg m_ucChksumTyp BUSMASTER LIN 163 Data Data Data access member Channel Number Checksum Read Only sMsg m_ucDataLen 8 sMsg m_ucMsgID 0x4 sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 0 10 Lower 4 Bytes sMsg m_sWhichBit m_aulData 1 20 Upper 4 Bytes sMsg m_ucChannel 1 Send the messag SendMsg sMsqg Event Structure SEVENT_CHECKSUM LIN Structure Definit
261. rame right click on the Sporadic frame item in the Element view and click on Edit Edit Sporadic Frame dialog is displayed as shown below 182 BUSMASTER LIN Associated Frames Frame Name Length Byte s Publishers 1 Door left 4 Door Left 2 A Door Righ 4 Door Right MasterECu Deleting Sporadic Frame To delete Sporadic Frame right click on the Sporadic item in the Element view and click on the popup menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the frame Diagnostic Support Adding Diagnostic Support To create diagnostic frames right click on the Diagnostic Frames element in the Element view By default MasterReq and SlaveResp diagnostic frames will get created as shown below LDF Element View 4 Lin Cluster gt GB Master gt GB Slaves gt Unconditional Frames gt M Event Triggered 4 Sporadic Frames sporadicFrame Diagnostic Frames MasterReq 0x3C SlaveResp 0x3D Signals Diagnostic Signals Signal Groups Codings Schedule Tables Node Compositions RAR EF Ei BUSMASTER LIN 183 On Adding diagnostic support for Frame Diagnostic Signals will get automatically created for Master and Slave under Diagnostic Signals in the Element View as shown below LDF Element View 4 Lin Cluster gt LJ Master gt LJ Slaves BX Unconditional Frames BA Event Triggered Sporadic Frames BX Diagnostic Frames gt M
262. raph window All graphs will overlap each other as each graph is utilizing whole graph window This mode will be useful to find the overlapping between the signal values or to compare value of various signals and statistics parameters Auto Fit To set optimal values for time axis and Y scale will set to a value such that each graph will be displayed one by one This will be useful to find all graphs with out any overlap All graph elements will occupy portion of graph window so that its element value will not merge with other graph element The whole graph area will be shared across all graph elements Cursors for Signal Tracking Time at cursor 1 Time at cursor 2 Time difference r Cursor Stats T1 s 2 798 T2 s 4 025 T2 T1 s 1 227 Category Element Cursor Cursor2 Difference BAP_ACC BAP_Data_ACC Physical 34 851 BAP_Anzeige BAP_Data_Anzeige Physical 24 517 BAP_ACC BAP_Data_ACC Raw 34 851 BAP_Anzeige BAP_Data_Anzeige Raw 24 517 Element values at cursor positions and the modulus of difference BUSMASTER I CAN 75 Description Cursors for Signal tracking is an offline feature available for viewing the element values at different time values Cursors can be activated by left mouse double clicks on the graph When the two cursors are activated user can view the time values at respective cursor postions and the element values in the bottom view of the graph as shown in the above figure User can deactiva
263. red BUSMASTER CAN 77 Graph Export BUSMASTER graph shall be exported in several types These are Comma Separated Format or CSV detailed HTML report and as a bitmap picture In CSV export graph element details are exported with corresponding time values To make extensive test report HTML format will be handy This will generate a report in HTML format with graph and elements details The same shall be printed directly from BUSMASTER if Print option is enabled To save the graph window details as image image export option is given This will save the graph windows snapshot in to the specified bitmap file F Note e CSV export will export only the data that is currently in element buffer of the graph e HTML report will take the snapshot of the graph window This will not modify either time range or y axis appearence User has freedom to set any time range and Y axis range This should be done before exporting the report e To optimise printing select light plot area color This will make background of the graph lighter and elements can be easily identified cH Note Select Landscape as page format to fit whole report in one page Trace Window Trace window gives details about the result of the latest operation Result can be information warning or error Below picture shows some text displayed in the trace window This window basically contains a multiple selection list box where user can select clear delete the entries
264. red for the selected cluster An Example Cluster Configuration is shown in following figure Current BUSMASTER Supports FIBEX Versions 2 0 3 0 4 0 BUSMASTER FlexRay 127 Cluster Configuration X Select Channel Channel 1 Import Flexray Database Fibex JSMASTER FlexRayFibex Files flexray FlexRay_Cluster_Example xml ons Cluster and ECU Selection Select Flexray Cluster FlexRay x Key Slot Configuration Ecu Send is Configured for Transmission ECU Send is selected for Simulation in BUSMASTER So all the Tx Message configured for Send ECU will be available for transmission in Tx Window Check FlexRay Transmission Window Topic for more information on How to Transmit the FlexRay Messages over FlexRay Bus FlexRay Controller Configuration Introduction BUSMASTER Can be connected to FlexRay physical channel using FlexRay Controller Currently BUSMASTER Supports the following FlexRay Controllers 1 ETAS BOA Controllers 2 GIGATRONIK flex i Controller Selecting Controller Before Selecting the controlletr the BUSMASTER has to be configured with the proper FIBEX File Refer Cluster Configuration for more information To select controller use FlexRay gt Driver Selection gt Driver For example to select ETAS BOA Driver use FlexRay gt Driver Selection gt ETAS BOA If only one controller is connected to PC that controller will be selected automatically Otherwise Hardware Selection window with
265. requests User can monitor analyze the LIN messages using BUSMASTER The following steps are required to Configure the BUSMASTER for transmission of frame headers or transmission reception of LIN messages 1 Cluster Configuration 1 To Transmit Receive the LIN Messages BUSMASTER has to be configured with LIN Baud Rate and Version Refer Cluster Configuration Section for more Information 2 To enable master mode for LIN channel for transmitting frame headers check the Enable Master Mode check box under LIN Network Settings 2 Schedule Table Configuration Configure Schedule Table window can be used to select schedule table frame headers for transmission imported from the loaded LDF file if BUSMASTER is used as master Refer LIN ScheduleTable Configuration for more information 3 Controller Driver Selection BUSMASTER can be connected to Physical LIN Network using LIN Controller Refer Controller Selection section for more Information 4 Transmit Messages LIN Slave Messages or LIN Master requests Can be transmitted over LIN network using LIN Tx Window Refer LIN Transmission Window Section for more information 5 Connect to Network Once the Cluster amp Controllers are properly configured BUSMASTER can be connected to Network using LIN gt Connect menu or the LIN Connect Tool bar Button as shown in following figure n oa Un Be MOIS Y FF alles 5 Monitoring Messages BUSMASTER Message Window can be used to monit
266. return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 nTimerMode Mode of the timer 1 Start in Cyclic mode 0 Start in Monoshot mode Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found StopTimer To stop a running timer Synopsis UINT StopTimer char strTimerName Description This function will stop timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName If the named timer is not running or timer name is not matched the function will return FALSE Otherwise function be return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found hGetDIilHandle To get handle of dll attached to a node from the node Synopsis HANDLE hGetDllHandle char strNodeName Description This function returns the handle of the dll attached to a node The node name will be passed as parameter Inputs Node name BUSMASTER LIN 167 Returns DII handle on success else NULL EnableLogging To start logging Synopsis UINT EnableLogging Description This function will enable logging The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 Inputs Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition This function can return 0 in case logging is already ON DisableLogging To stop logging Synopsis UINT DisableLoggi
267. ring is stored in ptr if ptr is not NULL If the subject string is empty that is if s does not start with a substring in acceptable form no conversion is performed and the value of s is stored in ptr if ptr is not NULL The alternate function _strtoul_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns strtoul returns the converted value if any If no conversion was made 0 is returned strtoul returns ULONG_MAX if the magnitude of the converted value is too large and sets errno to ERANGE system execute command string Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt int system char s lme _S ySiceun se WoOslel meSine Ciar lt 3 2 Description Use system to pass a command string s to bin sh on your system and wait for it to finish executing Use system NULL to test whether your system has bin sh available The alternate function _system_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns system NULL returns a non zero value if bin sh is available and 0 if it is not With a command argument the result of system is the exit status returned by bin sh 202 BUSMASTER C Library Functions wctomb minimal wide char to multibyte converter Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt ine wercono hean Si Wenen w weolneie 2 Description This is a minimal ANSI conforming implementation of wctomb The only wide charac
268. ritcr cu Clock Eher MJUE E Description Format the time value at clock into a string of the form Wed Jun 15 11 38 07 1988 The string is generated in a static buffer each call to asctime overwrites the string generated by previous calls Returns A pointer to the string containing a formatted timestamp clock cumulative processor time Synopsis include lt time h gt elock i clock voie s 234 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Description Calculates the best available approximation of the cumulative amount of time used by your program since it started To convert the result into seconds divide by the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC Returns The amount of processor time used so far by your program in units defined by the machine dependent macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC If no measurement is available the result is 1 ctime convert time to local and format as string Synopsis include lt time h gt Ghar serine terme ic Clock Char seriya se emer t Clock Cineni lowic p Description Convert the time value at clock to local time like localtime and format it into a string of the form Wed Jun 15 11 38 07 1988 like asctime Returns A pointer to the string containing a formatted timestamp difftime subtract two times Synopsis include lt time h gt doublement r MEME wall wale te wala 9 Description Subtracts the two times in the arguments tim tim2 Returns The difference in seconds bet
269. rn FALSE Otherwise function be return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found SetTimerVal To set a new time value for a timer Synopsis UINT SetTimerVal char strTimerName UINT nTimeInterval Description This function will change the timer value The timer value and name of timer whose time value is to be changed has to be passed through the parameter strTimerName The second parameter will take time value If the timer is BUSMASTER CAN 103 running in cyclic mode or next instance of timer is to be fired this function will return FALSE otherwise if will return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 nTimelInterval Time value of the timer Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found BOOL EnableDisableMsgTx To enable or disable message transmission from the node Synopsis BOOL EnableDisableMsgTx BOOL bEnable Description This function will enable or disable message transmission from a node User can pass parameter as TRUE to enable and FALSE to disable outgoing message from a node The node can receive the messages in both state Function will return TRUE if state change was successful otherwise it will return FALSE Inputs bEnable TRUE to Enable message transmission FALSE to disable Returns TRUE success
270. rr s Total Msg s Total Msg s Tx Error Counter Peak Tx Eror Counter Rx Error Counter Peak Rx Eror Counter m To invoke Network Statistics Dialog select the menu Window gt Network Statistics BUSMASTER CAN 85 J1939 Introduction J1939 is a CAN based layer 7 protocol mainly used in Truck and Bus control and communications The typical properties of J1939 are e 29 bit extended CAN identifier e Point to point and broadcast communication e Transmission up to 1785 bytes 1339 User Application SS J1939 Application Layer J1999 DiL J1939 Protocol Stack Parameter Group Number PGN PGN identifies the Parameter Group PG PGs point to information of parameter assignments within 8 byte CAN data field repetition rate and priority The structure of PGN allows a total of 8672 different Parameter Groups per page 2 pages are available 86 BUSMASTER CAN non 29 Bit R 6st 0 8 byte 16 Bit 2Bit 7 Bit CAN ID R Conrol Field Data Field CRC Field ACK End of Frame 3 Bit 18 Bit Priority PGN 1 Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit Reserved Date Page PDU Format PDU Specific Transport protocol functions are mainly used for transmission and reception of multi packet messages which can extend upto 1785 bytes Function involves packaging into sequence of 8 byte size messages during transmission re assemble of such data at the receiver side Parameter Group Number Transport pr
271. rror message is printed and the value of errno is not modified You can accomplish either or both of these things in your own matherr using the information passed in the structure e This is the exception structure defined in math h struct exception int type char name double argl arg2 retval aiae Gace hi The members of the exception structure have the following meanings type The type of mathematical error that occured macros encoding error types are also defined in math h name a pointer to a null terminated string holding the name of the math library function where the error occurred arg1 arg2 The arguments which caused the error retval The error return value what the calling function will return err If set to be non zero this is the new value assigned to errno The error types defined in math h represent possible mathematical errors as follows DOMAIN An argument was not in the domain of the function e g log 1 0 SING The requested calculation would result in a singularity e g pow 0 0 2 0 OVERFLOW A calculation would produce a result too large to represent e g exp 1000 0 UNDERFLOW A calculation would produce a result too small to represent e g exp 1000 0 TLOSS Total loss of precision The result would have no significant digits e g sin 10e70 PLOSS Partial loss of precision Returns The library definition for matherr returns 0 in all cases You can change the calling function s
272. rssrerssreresrerrsresrrrrsrerssreresreresreee 240 fabs fabsf absolute value magnitude nssenessesseesessesessrseeseeseserstesessesessrsersrereseesenses 241 floor floorf ceil ceilf floor and ceiling eeseeseeessessseeseseseserssessesresseesressrsseessessresres 241 fmod fmodf floating point remainder MOdUIO ceceeseceeceeeceeeeteeeeceeeeeeeeseeseeeneeese 241 frexp frexpf split floating point number s sesseeessersersessesessesetsrereseesessrsessessesersrsersee 241 gamma gammaf lgamma lgammaf gamma_r gammaf_r lgamma_r lgammaf_t 242 hypot hypotf distance from OFiQiN ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeseeceecaeecaecaeesecsaeeeeeseeeeees 242 ilogb ilogbf get exponent of floating point numbe eee eeseeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 infinity infinityf representation of INfiNIty eee eee eeeeeeseeeeecaeeeaeceeeaeenaes 243 isnan isnanf isinf isinff finite finitef test for exceptional numbers cceceeeceeeeeeee 243 Idexp Idexpf load exponentis iisi sesen ienei esis hns eS 244 log Jogt lt pat ral logarit hS n nnii a a A NA A EEEN 244 log10 loglOf base 10 logarithms cece eee ceseeeeceeeeeeceseeeeecseeeeecaaesaecaeesaecneenaes 244 LOG 1p LOST pi LOG OF LE Xo sets coves covteesenasneedes padsdeeve satus cheeate ocedh sense oe E E A 244 matherr modifiable math error handler ccc eceseseeeceecseeseeeeceeceeeeeesecaeeeeeecsaeeeseeeeeens 245 modf modff sp
273. s in USHORT BlockIndex The zero based logging block index out SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock return pointer to Logging block Usage in COM Client SLOGGINGBLOCK_USR psLoggingBlock HRESULT hResult m_IApplication gt GetLoggingBlock 0 psLoggingBlock Gets pointer to first logging block Cause of failure NA RemoveLoggingBlock To remove a particular logging block Synopsis HRESULT RemoveLoggingBlock in USHORT BlockIndex Description This function removes a particular logging block Inputs USHORT BlockIndex The zero based logging block index Cause of failure Will fail in case block index passed is wrong GetLoggingBlockCount Getter for total number of logging blocks Synopsis HRESULT GetLoggingBlockCount out USHORT BlockCount Description This function is a getter of logging blocks defined Inputs USHORT BlockCount An out parameter for the logging block count Cause of failure NA 120 BUSMASTER CAN ClearLoggingBlockList To Clear Logging block list Synopsis HRESULT ClearLoggingBlockList void Description This function clears the logging block list Inputs void Cause of failure NA WriteToLogFile Writes a text in the log file currently open Synopsis HRESULT WriteToLogFile USHORT BlockIndex BSTR pcStr Description This function writes a text in the log file currently open Inputs bstrStr The input string in BSTR Cause of failure Logging no
274. s it is not selected by default I MinGW instalation Manager a m Ce Cr eer Installation Package Settings Help Basic Setup Package Class Installed Version Repository Version Description a All Packages 3 a 2 a MinGW S mingw developer tool bin 2013072300 An MSYS Installation for MinGW Devel MinGW Base System S mingw32 autoconf bin 10 1 Wrapper scripts for autoconf comman MinGW Compiler Suite S mingw32 autoconf lic 10 1 Wrapper scripts for autoconf comman MinGW Source Level 0 mingw32 autoconf2 1 bin 2 13 4 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MinGW Standard Libral Ss mingw32 autoconf2 1 doc 2 13 4 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MinGW Libraries 6 mingw32 autoconf2 1 lic 2 13 4 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MinGW Contributed 6 mingw32 autoconf2 5 bin 2 68 1 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MinGW Autotools gS mingw32 autoconf2 5 doc 2 68 1 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MSYS S mingw32 autoconf2 5 lic 2 68 1 Automatic Configure Script Builder 2 MSYS Base System is mingw32 automake bin 4 1 Wrapper scripts for automake and acl MinGW Developer Toolkit S mingw32 automake lic 4 1 Wrapper scripts for automake and acl MSYS System Builder is mingw32 automake1 10 bin 1 10 2 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 10 serie S mingw32 automake1 10 doc 1 10 2 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 10 serie 6 mingw32 automake1 10 lic 1 10 2 1 Automatic Makefile Builder 1 10 serie 6 mingw32 automake1 11 bin 1 11 1 1 Auto
275. s section The check box associated with the log file will make the log file eligible for logging If the check box is not checked logging will not happen to that particular file Log File Details Log file details will give configuration of the selected log file This will give info of log file path time mode numeric mode file mode log triggers Log File Path The file path text box will give the selected log file path To change the path select button This will show file selection dialog On selection of a log file the file path text box will be updated with selected file path Log File Size Log file size is fixed to a limit of 50 MB This limit is set as most of the editors will take lot of time to open if the file size is large Time Mode Logging of messages can be done in three different time modes System time Absolute time and Relative time mode In system time mode time stamping of message is done using real time clock of the system In absolute time mode the time stamping is done with respect the to the absolute timer that will be stated during connect In relative time mode the time stamping of a message is with respect to previously received message BUSMASTER LIN 147 Reset Timestamp for every enable logging is provided If this option is selected then the absolute time will be reset whenever the logging is enabled Numeric Mode This tells the numeric format of log file entries It has two options Hex and
276. s section contains the message ID However BUSMASTER enables to attribute a message with a specified name and color If a particular message code is attributed with a name and a color message name will appear in place of message ID and the message will be displayed in the specified color e DLC Itis abbreviation for data length count It shows number of data bytes in the message body e Data Byte s The data bytes are displayed either in hexadecimal or in decimal mode Please refer to section Toggle numeric mode to know how to toggle numeric modes On occurrence of an error a suitable error message will be displayed in red color The following subsections describe various toolbar buttons used to change display of message entry File CAN 1939 View Window Help x ed Oui fF FT OOOO SSHE n a 4 O a BPO Time ID es Message y DLC Data Byte s 23 4 rp 17 13 07 7859 17 5 ACOQ_LNEWV 1 ooo 17 13 07 7849 75 ACQ_LNEW N ooo 17 13 07 8859 0114 RQD_CMM 5 000 000 000 000 000 x 17 13 07 8849 0114 ROD_CHM 5 OOO 000 000 000 000 17 13 07 9859 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 ooo 000 O 17 13 07 9849 1266 Dat3_BSI 8 000 000 17 13 08 0859 0168 CFD_BSI 5 ooo A 4 17 13 08 0849 Ose QI 5 ooo 17 13 08 1859 1 17 13 08 1849 Toggle Overwrite i t 17 13 08 2859 Append Modes 000 000 000 000 000 17 13 08 2849 5 000 000 000 000 000 kl 17 13 08 3859 1 ASI 8 000 000 000 000 000 000 17 13 08 3849 1266 Mat
277. s using matherr acosh acoshf inverse hyperbolic cosine Synopsis include lt math h gt double acosh double x tloa ExGOSlaie GELS ec xe Description acosh calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of x acosh is defined as x must be a number greater than or equal to 1 acoshf is identical other than taking and returning floats Returns acosh and acoshf return the calculated value If x less than 1 the return value is NaN and errno is set to EDOM You can change the error handling behavior with the non ANSI matherr function asin asinf arc sine Synopsis include lt math h gt double asin double x pilosi Asib loz xs Description asin computes the inverse sine arc sine of the argument x Arguments to asin must be in the range 1 to 1 asinf is identical to asin other than taking and returning floats You can modify error handling for these routines using matherr Returns If x is not in the range 1 to 1 asin and asinf return NaN not a number set the global variable errno to EDOM and issue a DOMAIN error message You can change this error treatment using matherr asinh asinhf inverse hyperbolic sine Synopsis include lt math h gt double asinh double x rioei ASile boae x2 P Description asinh calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of x asinh is defined as asinhf is identical other than taking and returning floats Returns asinh and asinhf return the calculated value
278. scale values automatically setting all graph elements one below another and setting manual range For easy navigation directional navigation keys are provided which will move the graph in the selected direction by one grid position Graph control shall be configured in terms of performance and view style Graph buffer size and update rate can be configured by the user to optimize the performance Graph window view style shall be fully configured by the user including colors of various graph window components User shall configure the graph window to his known style like oscilloscope or Excel graph Data from graph buffer shall be exported in various formats This includes exporting data as image CSV used in excel and detailed HTML report HTML report shall be printed after creation by BUSMASTER This report shall be modified by the user after create using any HTML editor externally This report will include graph elements detail like range unit color and min max values Configuring Graph To configure graph for a particular bus with graph elements or statistics elements select CAN gt signal Graph gt Configure menu item This will show Configure Signal Graph Window dialog 70 BUSMASTER CAN Configure Signal Graph Window x Graph Display Configure for Bus can Configure Configured Elements Element List Properties Element Una tapa BAP_ACC BAP_Data_ACC Physical BAP_ACC BAP_Data_ACC Raw Line Color BA
279. scription This function converts the argument c into an unsigned char and fills the first length characters of the array pointed to by dst to the value 226 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Returns memset returns the value of m rindex reverse search for character in string Synopsis include lt string h gt chari icslincless COMSiE Clieie GiewaLing alin p Description This function finds the last occurence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by string including the terminating null character This function is identical to strrchr Returns Returns a pointer to the located character or a null pointer if c does not occur in string strcat concatenate strings Synopsis include lt string h gt Ginaie sicieCee Chari Clic COMSiG Cln eie Sicc Description strcat appends a copy of the string pointed to by src including the terminating null character to the end of the string pointed to by dst The initial character of src overwrites the null character at the end of dst Returns This function returns the initial value of dst strchr search for character in string Synopsis include lt string h gt Char scien Const Chet Sicialinve slime Pp Description This function finds the first occurence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by string including the terminating null character Returns Returns a pointer to the located character or a
280. seeeeesees 225 memset Set AN area OL MOMOLY eesosa oan vatecen eee EEEa ANE RE EEE 225 rindex reverse search for character in string seseeesseeersereresrsreerssesresesrerrrseerrererreeee 226 strcat lt concatenate StL ES Fecanccevesse deck sense csece ee enes sostesd eve vevdes teunese det Ee EE Beas cv ER SEE dents 226 strchr search for character in String eee ees eeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeecaeesaecseesaecsecsseeeesees 226 stremp Character string COMPALe eee ee eeeeseceeeecneceseceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseseaseseeeaecsaeeaeenaes 226 strcoll locale specific character string COMPALE sccesseceececeseeenceceeeeceeceeeeeetreesaeceeees 227 BUSMASTER TOC 5 Stre pye COPY SIN Dineen oo a e ee e r a es 227 StrCSpN count Chars NOt in SCLIN eeeceseeceeeeesseeeececeeceeseceeeeeaeeeseecueecaeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeees 227 strerror convert error number tO SING eeeeceeceesceesecesseceececeseeeseeceeeeceeseaeeeseeesaeeeees 227 strlen character string length cee eseceeceseceeceseeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeseseaecseeeaesseesaeenaes 229 Strlwrs force String to lower Caseres pn enr eiee yes stounos Stade EEE NESES EEn 229 Strncat concatenate Strings eee eee ceee cee ceeeeseceseeseceseeseceseeseeeeeeaseseeseecsaesaecaeeaeenees 230 strncmp Character string COMPALe eee cece ceeceseceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeseesaecseecaecsaecaeesaeenees 230 Strncpy counted COPY StI eee ce eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecseeseecaecsaecaecsaea
281. select Add 2 Click Add Node in the toolbar 3 Pressing Insert key in the keyboard Then Node Details dialog box appears as shown below Add unique Node name and add existing cpp dll or provide new File name to create new cpp file 156 BUSMASTER LIN Node Details Node Name fEcut File D Demo ECUT cpp Browse OK Cancel Edit Node This is used to edit the cpp file attached to a Node Editing can be done by following ways a m i F Bus FO Configure Build Remove 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Edit 2 Select the Node and click Edit Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Enter key in the keyboard Then Function Editor window appears in which the required editing can be done Remove Node This is used remove selected node all the nodes in the Simulated system Removing a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Remove To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Al 2 Select the Node and click Remove Node in the toolbar To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Remove Node in the toolbar 3 Select the Node and press Delete key in the keyboard To Remove All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and press Delete key Configure Node This is used change the name of the Node or change add cpp dll associated with a Node Conf
282. seseeseseseesessiseesesrsesrsssssrrersrsrsresrsesrersssstererserrerrerseseee 208 fgetc get a character from a file OF stream eeeseesesseesesreesrrererresesesrerrrsrerrsrenereereses 208 fgetpos record position in a stream or file eee cece ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseecseesaeraes 209 fgets get character string from a file OF StreaIM eo eee seeeeceecneeeeeecnececeeceaecaeeeeeeesaees 209 fiprintf format output to file integer Only ee eee cree ceeceeeaeceeeaeceeenseeneeeseeeees 209 LOPSD opena LC noyes aes cute ss Panes E e e a A E EEE EROSA cage oe loss EEEN EE ien aes 209 fputc write a character on a stream or file eeeseeeseseeeesseeeereererrssesrssrrrsreersreerereereseeee 210 fputs write a character string in a file OF stream sesseeeseeseeeserssresreesrsersesrseesseseeereesees 211 fread read array elements from a file esseeseeeeeseseeseseesesesseseretsesssesseesesrserseersenrerssesseesee 211 freopen open a file using an existing file descriptor eesesseesseseessrsesesrserserrersrreeesses 211 fseek set fle position inni a a eta re reeds Sheaves E E T E 211 fsetpos restore position of a stream or file eee eceeceeseceseceetecesceceeeeceaeeeaeecereeeaeeeeees 212 ftell return position in a stream or file ee lee eeeeceeeecseeceececeeeecaeeeeceeeeesneceseeceseeeneeeeee 212 fwrite writes array CLEMONS sie lt daecsyesas ses epecsstsstns sapabestensd pesopuceapeeseetecey cesabevecegahssy
283. shed and Dotted lines e Dash Dot Dotted Graph with Dash followed by a Dot followed by a Dotted line Line Color Color of the graph line User can select standard colors from the palette or user can define own color from the RGB and illumination space Point Type Type of the sample point element User can select sample point symbols to highlight the points at which graph got samples This will be disabled by selecting point type as NONE BUSMASTER supports following symbol types BUSMASTER CAN 73 e None To Disable Sample point Symbols e Dots e Rectangles e Diamonds e Asterics e Down Triangles e Up Triangles Left Triangles e Right Triangles Point Color Color of the sample point symbol User can select standard colors from the palette or user can define own color from the RGB and illumination space Show Hide This is to show or hide a graph from graph window The hidden graphs will not be plotted in graph window But a hidden graph will receive samples if the tool is connected User can be able to view the hidden graph at any point of time This is to hide the graph from drawing Enable Disable This is to enable or disable a graph element from receiving sample values If a graph is disabled it will not receive any update for message signals or statistics parameters This is to avoid a graph getting samples from message signals or statistics parameters If the tool is connected and a graph element is
284. sia3ko z Time Mode V Retain the recorded time delay Delay between replay messages msecs Replay Mode Once Cyclic Delay between replay cycles msecs Replay fal Messages Interactive Replay Add Delete Filters Cancel BUSMASTER CAN 25 Replay Files User can add as many as replay files in to the replay list This list will show the replay files that are already configured To add a new Replay file select Add button This will show replay file selection dialog User can select log files that are created using BUSMASTER Once the user has selected a replay file the file will be added to the replay list User can change the file button in the Replay File Details section The check box associated with replay file will make the replay file eligible to run If the check box is not checked then that replay will not be used for replay Replay File Details Replay file details will give configuration of the selected replay file This will give info of replay file path time mode replay mode filters and Replay type Replay File Path The file path text box will give the selected replay file path To change the path select button This will show file selection dialog On selection of a log file the file path text box will be updated with selected file path Replay Time Mode Time mode or replay tells whether to use logged time for replay or to use user specified value If user selects Retain Del
285. splayed Select Insert Signal A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list A list of signals will be displayed under Signals list Select a signal and click on Select button AAP ey The selected signal will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Insert a Function BUSMASTER provides API functions which can used while programming These functions can be used to interact with BUSMASTER application Please follow the steps below to insert a function 1 Edit the function for which prototype is to be added Refer Editing Function Body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Function A dialog box is displayed with a set of function prototypes API Listing Choose required function prototype from the list and click on OK button tt a The selected function prototype will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 Message Log CAN messages can be logged to a file for analysis and replay Log file name shall be selected as described in section Log and Replay To start message logging select Log Start or press the Tool Bar Button shown in the figure below The tool bar is toggle button Clicking on the button or selecting the menu again will stop logging Once the logging has started the messages received and transmitted will be logged in to the file with time of message reception BUSMASTER
286. ssage Handlers D void OnMsg_Al STCAN_MSG RAsMsg 2 Timer Handlers Pane 2 Displays contents of C file and is non editable enum TIMEOUT TIMEOUT_A TIMEOUT_rx_fc TIMEOUT_rx_cf WRONG_SN UNEXP_PDU WFT_OVRN NOT_IDLE imeout Timeout return codes void OnTimer_eol_test_sequence_breaker_100 void OnTimer_t_present_1000 void OnTimer_ts_fc_5f void OnTimer_tx_cf_5f void OnTimer_rx_cf_5f void OnTimer_rx_cf_1000 void OnTimer_post_mortem_record_1000 void OnTimer_response_timeout_5s_5000 INT_ERROR EXT_ERROR WARN_DLC WARN_FS WARN_LENGTH void Uti ls bart INvas glo wrong DLC unknown flow status message length not as an int b ehu select int response_type unsigned int diag_ Pane 3 Editable view that void OnTimer_timeout_100ms_100 void OnTimer_auto_test_20 Key Handlers E Error Handlers 5 6 DLL Handlers B void OnDLL_Load T Utility Functions Global Variables Pane 1 Displays Function prototypes global variables etc displays the function body case TEST_STAGE_START eol_test_stage TEST_STAGE_CLEAR_TROUB reset the troublecode case TEST_STAGE_CLEAR_TROUBLE Trace _TEST_STAGE_CLEAR_TROUBLE txl_length 1 txl_data 0 0x04 Utils TP_request1 IZ General access to the function editor Go to CAN gt Node Simulation gt Configure to open the window Configure S
287. ssage block Maximum of 32 Message Blocks shall be added Apply To make changes to reflect the transmission select Apply button This will make changes permanent and the changes will reflect in the transmission if TX is on The TX dialog will remain open to continue modifications Ok This will make changes permanent and will close the dialog The changes will reflect in the transmission if TX is on Cancel To cancel the changes select Cancel This will close the dialog with out saving the changes All changes will be ignored and can not be recalled uf Note e Signal Value shall be modified even if the transmission is on e New Messages shall be added in to the message block even if the transmission is on e If Message Transmission is on message from any block can not be deleted Any active message block with check box is on in Message Block list can not be switched off if Tx is on Node Simulation Configuration Simulated systems can be configured under the lt Protocol gt bus by following the steps given below Select lt Protocol gt gt Node Simulation gt Configure menu option This will display the window as shown is figure below BUSMASTER CAN 37 Add Node Edit Node Build Node t J al H D M y Bus DN f Mg tonion Remove Node E Node Add Node This is used to added cpp dll files to Node Simulation Add Node can be done by following ways Add Build All
288. ssage name User can add a tag of message structure and this could be used for defining variables Please follow the steps below to insert a message structure tag into the function Edit the function for which database message name is to be added Refer section Edit Function Body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Message A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list and click on Select button Aner wey a The selected message will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 162 BUSMASTER LIN Insert Signal name User can use signal names while programming The signal names have to be used in conjunction with the corresponding message variable It is member of message structure Please follow the steps below to insert a signal name into the function Edit the function in which signal name is to be added Refer section Edit Function Bodyedit_function_body Right click in the Pane 3 A pop up menu is displayed Select Insert Signal A dialog box is displayed with all the database messages under Message list Choose a message from the list A list of signals will be displayed under Signals list Select a signal and click on Select button The selected signal will be displayed in the Pane 3 and the same is updated in the Pane 2 DODO Roe Ne Insert a Function BUSMASTER provides API functions which can used w
289. st dae AVSjOmIUMEIE CVOL resnic Chee Scie Conse Chean some Velisi Lisce lea eu Description vprintf vfprintf and vsprintf are respectively variants of printf fprintf and sprintf They differ only in allowing their caller to pass the variable argument list as a va_list object initialized by va_start rather than directly accepting a variable number of arguments Returns The return values are consistent with the corresponding functions vsprintf returns the number of bytes in the output string save that the concluding NULL is not counted vprintf and vfprintf return the number of characters transmitted If an error occurs vprintf and vfprintf return EOF No error returns occur for vsprintf String and Memory Functions String and Memory Functions This chapter describes string handling functions and functions for managing areas of memory The corresponding declarations are in string h bcmp compare two memory areas Synopsis include lt string h gt ime ISG Comsic Chew Sil Conse Cial S2 Size A Description This function compares not more than n characters of the object pointed to by s1 with the object pointed to by s2 This function is identical to memcmp 224 BUSMASTER C Library Functions Returns The function returns an integer greater than equal to or less than zero according to whether the object pointed to by s1 is greater than equal to or less than the o
290. st have been configured prior to this Refer section Configure App Filter and Display Filter Display Filter To enable message window filtering select CAN gt Message Window gt Enable Filters or press Display Filter toolbar button shown in figure below rv 7 F f Llog Message Replay To disable filtering select the toolbar button again Filtering will toggle on each press 48 BUSMASTER CAN Log Filter To enabling filter for logging select CAN gt Logging gt Enable Filters or press Log Filter toolbar button shown in the fig The filter will be applied on messages that are received after enabling the filter To disable select the same menu item or toolbar button again Filtering will toggle on each press Replay Filter To enabling filter for replay select CAN gt Replay gt Enable Filters or press Replay Filter toolbar button shown in the fig To disable select the same menu item or toolbar button again Filtering will toggle on each press a Note Note e Message filter and Log filter will be applied only for the incoming messages after enabling the filter e Filters can be Enabled Disabled irrespective of tool connection status Node Simulation Configuration Simulated systems can be configured under the lt Protocol gt bus by following the steps given below Select lt Protocol gt gt Node Simulation gt Configure menu option This will display the window as shown is figure below
291. stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt void rewind FILE fp Description rewind returns the file position indicator if any for the file or stream identified by fp to the beginning of the file It also clears any error indicator and flushes any pending output BUSMASTER C Library Functions 219 Returns rewind does not return a result scanf fscanf sscanf scan and format input Synopsis include lt stdio h gt ine SGaAidiT Const Cheie irOmMee arC soll 2 LMG CSCA ONLI i Conse Cias lt rormaec lp BEC soale dnr SsCani Conor Cligue seggi COM Caas ice iameic ly aiey sool Description scanf scans a series of input fields from standard input one character at a time Each field is interpreted according to a format specifier passed to scanf in the format string at format scanf stores the interpreted input from each field at the address passed to it as the corresponding argument following format You must supply the same number of format specifiers and address arguments as there are input fields There must be sufficient address arguments for the given format specifiers if not the results are unpredictable and likely disasterous Excess address arguments are merely ignored scanf often produces unexpected results if the input diverges from an expected pattern Since the combination of gets or fgets followed by sscanf is safe and easy that is the preferred way to be certain that a program is
292. synchronized with input at the end of a line fscanf and sscanf are identical to scanf other than the source of input fscanf reads from a file and sscanf from a string The string at format is a character sequence composed of zero or more directives Directives are composed of one or more whitespace characters non whitespace characters and format specifications Whitespace characters are blank tab t or newline n When scanf encounters a whitespace character in the format string it will read but not store all consecutive whitespace characters up to the next non whitespace character in the input Non whitespace characters are all other ASCII characters except the percent sign When scanf encounters a non whitespace character in the format string it will read but not store a matching non whitespace character Format specifications tell scanf to read and convert characters from the input field into specific types of values and store then in the locations specified by the address arguments Trailing whitespace is left unread unless explicitly matched in the format string The format specifiers must begin with a percent sign and have the following form width size type Each format specification begins with the percent character The other fields are e an optional marker if present it suppresses interpretation and assignment of this input field e width an optional maximum field width a decimal integer w
293. t 1 Time Quantum Hence tNBT tsyn tPD tseg1 tseg2 The Nominal Bit Rate is the number of bits per second Nominal Bit Rate 1 Nominal Bit Time Each segment consists of a specific programmable number of time quantum which is basic unit of bit time The synchronization segment is that part of the bit time where the edges of the CAN bus level Mapping between fsys and tq The controller needs to regulate its system clock period 1 fsys in order to realise the time quantum tq desired The coefficient of regulation is defined as Baud Rate Prescaler BRP Hence tq 2 BRP fsys fsys fclk 2 ID where fclk is Clock Frequency tNBT 1 baud rate HI NBT tNBT tq IV Hence from equation 1 II and IID NBT 1 baud rate 4 x BRP fclk gt NBT x BRP fclk 4 X Baud Rate The product value NBT x BRP will be an integer value Appropriate baud rate will be calculated to get an integer value for the above product This will ensure that Clock Frequency remains same for a particular CAN controller Additionally NBT x tq tNBT tsyn tPD tseg1 tseg2 V Clearly tsyn tq VI tsegl TSEGI x tq VID tseg2 TSEG2 x tq VII tPD PD x tq IX Therefore from equation VJ VID and VIII NBT TSEGI TSEG2 PD 1 Sampling Point NBT TSEG2 NBT x 100 The neoVI hardware consist of three registers namely CNF1 CNF2 CNF3 the details of which are given belo
294. t Add Key Handler Select Key Handlers category in the Pane and right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Add A dialog box appears asking the user to press a key Press a key for which User want to write the handler The same will be displayed in the dialog box Oe ae Select OK button or Apply button if more key handlers are to be added from the same dialog Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Key Handlers category in Pane 1 Add Error Handler 1 Select Error Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu will be displayed 3 Select Add A dialog as shown below pops up from this dialog select the type of error handlers to he handled by your program and click on OK button BUSMASTER CAN 43 Add Error Handler s 2 x Eror Active J Eror Passive Tl Warming Limit Bus Off J Eror Frame Cancel Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Error Handlers category in Pane 1 Add DLL Handler DLL handlers are invoked at the time of loading the DLL or while unloading the DLL The procedure for adding DLL handlers is similar to that of adding error handlers Add Utility Function 1 Select Utility Functions category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu comes up 3 Select Add A dialog box appears 4 Return Type of the utility functi
295. t Create a MinGW based installation Create a MinGW w64 hased installation 258 BUSMASTER Additional Installation Select MingW TDM 32 bit option and click Next to get to the following screen How do the licenses of this software affect you Hi Sorry for the interruption but you may want to take at least a few seconds to look into some recent license changes for the software you re about to install Parts of the winpthreads library will be compiled into every binary file EXE or DLL you create It s a necessary evil that is currently required in order to provide support for threads and concurrency in programs compiled by GCC The license for winpthreads requires you to reproduce its text in every copy or substantial portion of the winpthreads library that you distribute This means that even if you just want to distribute a single small executable created with TDM GCC or any winpthreads based GCC release you must include a copy of that license Click Next and provide path to install the GCC GCC has some problems if it is installed in a folder name having space So it is recommended to install in path like C MinGw Make sure the folder was empty New Installation installation Directory Choose the installation directory to use en Setup will install TOM GCC in the following folder To install in a different folder click Browse and select another folder Click Next to continue Click Next B
296. t CAN controller to CAN bus Synopsis UINT Connect DWORD dwClientId Description This function will connect the tool to CAN bus The return value of this function will be 0 or 1 This function can return 0 in case tool is already connected dwClientld is reserved for future use Inputs Client ID Currently unused Returns A value zero indicate failure condition while a value 1 indicate a success condition StartTimer To start a timer in specific mode Synopsis UINT StartTimer char strTimerName UINT nTimerMode Description This function will start timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName in monoshot or cyclic mode The function takes first parameter as timer name and second as mode monoshot or cyclic If the named timer is already running or timer name is not matched the function will return FALSE Otherwise function be return TRUE Inputs strTimerName Name of the timer i e OnTimer_Tester_Present_100 nTimerMode Mode of the timer 1 Start in Cyclic mode 0 Start in Monoshot mode Returns 1 on success 0 if the timer is already running or timer name not found BUSMASTER CAN 109 StopTimer To stop a running timer Synopsis UINT StopTimer char strTimerName Description This function will stop timer having name passed as parameter strTimerName If the named timer is not running or timer name is not matched the function will return FALSE Otherwise function be return TRUE Inputs
297. t Triggered Frame To delete Event Triggered Frame right click on the Event Triggered frame item in the Element view and click on the pop up menu Delete A confirmation message will be displayed before deleting the frame To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Frame name will be checked for its uniqueness e Frame Id will be checked for its uniqueness e Checked if selected Associated frames belong to the Collision resolving table To discard the changes click on Cancel button Sporadic Frame Creating Sporadic Frames To create Sporadic frame right click on the Sporadic Frame element in the element view and click on popup menu New Create Sporadic Frame dialog is as shown below BUSMASTER LIN 181 Frame Name Length Byte s Publishers 1 F Door left 4 Door Left 2 E Door _Righ Door Right MasterECu 1 General Properties e Name Name of the frame which should be follow C identifier rules and should be unique 2 Associating Frames e Check the Unconditional frames to be mapped to the Sporadic frame from the Associated Frames list To save the changes click on OK button Errors are displayed if validation fails The following validations are performed e Frame name will be checked for its uniqueness To discard the changes click on Cancel button Editing Sporadic Frames To edit existing Sporadic F
298. t copies Returns The strxfrm function returns the length of the transformed string not including the terminating null character If the value returned is n or more the contents of the array pointed to by s1 are indeterminate BUSMASTER C Library Functions 233 Time Functions This chapter groups functions used either for reporting on time elapsed current or compute time or to perform calculations based on time The header file time h defines three types clock_t and time_t are both used for representations of time particularly suitable for arithmetic In this implementation quantities of type clock_t have the highest resolution possible on your machine and quantities of type time_t resolve to seconds size_t is also defined if necessary for quantities representing sizes time h also defines the structure tm for the traditional representation of Gregorian calendar time as a series of numbers with the following fields tm_sec Seconds tm_min Minutes tm_hour Hours tm_mday Day tm_mon Month tm_year Year since 1900 tm_wday Day of week the number of days since Sunday tm_yday Number of days elapsed since last January 1 tm_isdst Daylight Savings Time flag positive means DST in effect zero means DST not in effect negative means no information about DST is available asctime format time as string Synopsis include lt time h gt Cher ASCriwMSs CoOmsc Servei tim clock y Char ascii Const S
299. t enabled log file not present Usage in COM Client BSTR bstr bstr SysAllocString L In CanSendMsg1 m_IApplication gt WriteToLogFile 0 bstr SysFreeString bstr Know About SubErrors The enhanced view of error display in USB version of BUSMASTER is as shown in the picture below The SubErrors are not displayed in parallel port version of BUSMASTER The Sub error value corressponds to the error value given by CAN controller E Message Window CAN Channel Msg Type ID Message BUSMASTER CAN 121 i aa b ce ERR Diagnostics Diagnostics Settings ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR 16834561 33611777 50388993 67166209 83943425 100720641 117497857 134275073 151052289 167829505 184606721 201383937 218161153 234938369 251715585 268492801 268550145 268615681 268681217 Bus Error Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Tx Error Tx Error Tx Error Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Rx Error Tx Error Tx Error Tx Diagnostics settings window is used to set the settings for transmitting diagnostics requests and for receiving diagnostics
300. t will always contain a decimal point even if no digits follow the point Normally a decimal point appears only if a digit follows it Trailing zeroes are removed e gorG same ase or E but trailing zeroes are not removed e all others undefined e width width is an optional minimum field width You can either specify it directly as a decimal integer or indirectly by using instead an asterisk in which case an int argument is used as the field width Negative field widths are not supported if you attempt to specify a negative field width it is interpreted as a minus flag followed by a positive field width e prec an optional field if present it is introduced with a period This field gives the maximum number of characters to print in a conversion the minimum number of digits of an integer to print for conversions with type d i 0 u x and X the maximum number of significant digits for the g and G conversions or the number of digits to print after the decimal point for e E and f conversions You can specify the precision either directly as a decimal integer or indirectly by using an asterisk in which case an int argument is used as the precision Supplying a negative precision is equivalent to omitting the precision If only a period is specified the precision is zero If a precision appears with any other conversion type than those listed here the behavior is undefined e size h l and L are optional size characters
301. tch list will show Raw and Physical value of the signal with the Unit along with Message and Signal name Close signal watch window User can directly close the window by clicking on Close X button OR 1 Click on the drop down button associated with the tool bar button shown above This will pop up a menu 2 Click on Close menu option to close the signal watch window Signal Graph Graph Support for Signal and Statistics BUSMASTER Graph supports plotting graph for signal values and statistics parameters This includes raw and physical values of a signal Network statistics parameters can be added to plot graph The number of graphs plotted is limited to 10 Various types of graph are supported by BUSMASTER This includes types color and sample points highlight with symbols For analysis of the plotted graph various graph manipulation options are provided The graph data can be exported in various formats ranging from image to report BUSMASTER CAN 69 Starting With Graph E Graph Display CAN Element List Graph Display CAN Category Element Type MSG1_WFS_ MSG1_WFS_P_Physical MSG1_WFS_MSG1_WFS_Al Physical MSG1_WFS_ MSG1_WFS_SI Physical BAP_ACC BAP Data ACC Physical BAP_HYB BAP_Data_HYBPhysical BAP_Anzeige BAP_Dala_Anz Physical Statistics Standard Tx Rat Properties Line type Line Color Pointtype Right Triangles z Point Color Hide Disable Active Axis Action Graph aea Move
302. te the cursors by right mouse double click on the graph The time values at cursors are shown in a read only edit boxes The list box shown in the above figure presents the interpolated element values at both the cursor positions and the modulus of difference between both the values Track Mode Track mode is activated by clicking the Track button in Actions group of Graph manipulations controls In this mode user can drag the cursors to new time values For this user has to position the mouse on the cursor which is to be dragged to a new position Then keep holding the left mouse and drag the cursor to new position The image below shows the dragging of cursor to new time value If the user wants to clear the cursors on the graph at any point of time right mouse double click will do the job Graph Window Configuration To change look and feel of graph select Configure button from right side view of graph window This will popup graph configuration dialog This dialog has various graph view style parameters Graph Window Configuration 2x r Configuration Buffer Size 10000 Entries Display Update Rate 1000 msec View Style Frame Color E z Frame Style 3D X Plot Area Color ij z x Axis Grids fi 0 Axis Color my Y Axis Grids 5 Grid Color O Line Display Normal b Set Default Cancel 76 BUSMASTER CAN Buffer Size User can configure graph buffer size in terms of number of
303. ted This will enable range edit boxes Message ID type gives information about the ID or message name For database message this field will be automatically updated But user can change the type to override the database definition To make the filter to work for both standard and extended type user shall select the ID type as All Other attributes shall be selected based on the filter requirements 22 BUSMASTER CAN Event radio button shall be selected for Event filter This will enable Event combo box from which event type can be selected Channel combo box will enabled The Add button in the Filter Attributes section will add configured filter in to the selected named filter list This button will be disabled in case of invalid parameter entered by the user and appropriate error message will be displayed in the status bar Once the filter is added in to the Filter List then the name of the filter will appear in the Filter Configuration List to select Any modification on these filter will immediately reflect in the all modules that are using these filters Filter list will be saved in configuration file and will be updated while loading a configuration file While loading a configuration file created with BUSMASTER 3 06 02 X XXX version one filter entry will be created with the previous filter information Log and Replay Logging User can configure log file setting using CAN gt Logging gt Configure menu This will show log file c
304. tem from tree a Note e To add an item quickly just double click the item e After an element addition element color and sample point type are automatically assigned e Only 10 elements are allowed to add If elements count exceeds 10 the Add button will be disabled and double clicking the item will show error message To delete an item from the element list select the item from the element list right side and select Delete button This will remove the selected item from element list and will put the deleted item in to the tree at the appropriate place To delete all item from the element list select Delete All button This will cleat element list and will refresh tree to include all database messages and statistics parameters F Note e To view details of a database signal just double click the item from element list This will popup signal details dialog with signal definition e Selecting OK will save changes and will close element selection dialog e To undo changes done in element selection dialog just select Cancel button This will ignore all changes done by the user Graph Element List The graph element list will be shown in left side view of graph window This will show element name category and value type For a database signal this will show signal name message name and value type For statistics parameters this will show parameter name Each element will be displayed in the color of that graph element Selectin
305. tep osc ll 2 ime icjoweaLionese PLE siey Const Char romec lp arep s2 dme gorim i Chen Sew Conse Chear rorat ly ie osol Description printf accepts a series of arguments applies to each a format specifier from format and writes the formatted data to stdout terminated with a null character The behavior of printf is undefined if there are not enough arguments for the format printf returns when it reaches the end of the format string If there are more arguments than the format requires excess arguments are ignored fprintf and sprintf are identical to printf other than the destination of the formatted output fprintf sends the output to a specified file fd while sprintf stores the output in the specified char array str For sprintf the behavior is also undefined if the output str overlaps with one of the arguments format is a pointer to a charater string containing two types of objects ordinary characters other than which are copied unchanged to the output and conversion specifications each of which is introduced by To include in the output use in the format string A conversion specification has the following form flags width prec size type The fields of the conversion specification have the following meanings e flags an optional sequence of characters which control output justification numeric signs decimal points trailing zeroes and octal and hex prefixes The flag characters are minus
306. terface h missing while compling Why Answer Rebuilding the solution will solve the problem When rebuild is selected the visual studio will compile BUSMASTER idl file and will generate BUSMASTER_Interface h and BUSMASTER_Interface c files Question Why Toolbar replay buttons are not active after changing the active window Answer This is the intended behavior of the toolbar replay button This is because of the following functionality 1 Add more than one log file for replay in Replay Configuration window 2 Select interactive replay 3 Connect to the network Multiple replay windows will be displayed corresponding to the number of log files added for reply If 2 log files are added then 2 interactive replay windows will be displayed on connect 4 The replay toolbar functionality works based on the active interactive window So making it general will not work Hence the tool bar is disabled Question After the Message Replay Window is closed there is no way to have it back Answer In interactive replay method the functionality of close button is basically stopping the replay Hence the window will be closed and immediately the replay will be stopped To get back the replay window just disconnect and connect to the network again No restart of application is required Make sure Interactive Replay Window option is selected in the Replay configuration window Question The files union h are created each time BUSMASTER starts
307. ters recognized are single bytes and they are converted to themselves Each call to wctomb copies the character wchar to s unless s is a null pointer Returns This implementation of wctomb returns 0 if s is NULL it returns 1 otherwise reporting the length of the character sequence generated Character Type Macros and Functions This chapter groups macros which are also available as subroutines to classify characters into several categories alphabetic numeric control characters whitespace and so on or to perform simple character mappings The header file ctype h defines the macros isalnum alphanumeric character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt cline aksieLlliauim ski F Description isalnum is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero for alphabetic or numeric ASCII characters and 0 for other arguments It is defined for all integer values You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining the macro using undef isalnum Returns isalnum returns non zero if c is a letter a z or A Z or a digit 0 9 isalpha alphabetic character predicate Synopsis include lt ctype h gt men Sapha Gne Description isalpha is a macro which classifies ASCII integer values by table lookup It is a predicate returning non zero when c represents an alphabetic ASCII character and 0 otherwise
308. the name of the Node or change add cpp dll associated with a Node Configuring a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Configure 2 Select the Node and click Configure Node in the toolbar 3 If no cpp dll files are associated with the node previously then by pressing Enter key in the keyboard Build Node This is used build the cpp files associated with selected Node or all the nodes in the Simulated System Building a Node can be done by following ways 1 Select the Node then Right click and select Build To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All 2 Select the Node and click Build Node in the toolbar To Build All Nodes select Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus and select Build All in the toolbar BUSMASTER CAN 39 Enable Disable Node This used to active deactivate selected Node or all the Nodes in the Simulated System Enabling Disabling can be done by following ways 1 Check Uncheck the checkbox associated with the Node will Enable Disable the Node respectively To Enable Disable all the Nodes Check Uncheck the Root Node lt Protocol gt Bus respectively 2 Spacebar key can be used as keyboard shortcut to Check Uncheck the Node s F 1 Node s can t be Added Removed Configured Enabled Disabled while the network is connected 2 A Node can be edited while the network is connected But the file must be built again to see th
309. tically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Key Handlers category in Pane 1 Add Error Handler 1 Select Error Handlers category in the Pane 1 and right click 2 A pop up menu will be displayed 3 Select Add A dialog as shown below pops up from this dialog select the type of error handlers to he handled by your program and click on OK button Add Error Handler s Error Checksum Error Receive Frame Error Slave No Response Error Sync Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Error Handlers category in Pane 1 Add DLL Handler DLL handlers are invoked at the time of loading the DLL or while unloading the DLL The procedure for adding DLL handlers is similar to that of adding error handlers BUSMASTER LIN 161 Add Utility Function 1 Select Utility Functions category in the Pane 1 and right click A pop up menu comes up Select Add A dialog box appears A UN Return Type of the utility function can be selected from the combo box or directly typed The combo box will have primitive data types and database message structure names 5 Enter the Function Prototype in the Edit control like e g Func_One int a int b 6 Select OK button Function definition will be added to the source file automatically in the Pane 2 and the prototype under Utility Functions category in Pane 1 Global Variables To add delete modify glob
310. tion Create a temporary file a file which will be deleted automatically using a name generated by tmpnam The temporary file is opened with the mode wb permitting you to read and write anywhere in it as a binary file without any data transformations the host system may perform for text files The alternate function _tmpfile_r is a reentrant version The argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns tmpfile normally returns a pointer to the temporary file If no temporary file could be created the result is NULL and errno records the reason for failure tmpnam tempnam name for a temporary file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt Caere SNINE enee S p charki temnpnamn Chanka air ehana PE Gligie _icMomennt 16 YWOuC iseSinc ehan o char _tempnam_r void reent char dir char pfx Description Use either of these functions to generate a name for a temporary file The generated name is guaranteed to avoid collision with other files for up to TMP_MAX calls of either function tmpnam generates file names with the value of P_tmpdir defined in stdio h as the leading directory component of the path You can use the tmpnam argument s to specify a suitable area of memory for the generated filename otherwise you can call tmpnam NULL to use an internal static buffer tempnam allows you more control over the generated filename you can use the argument dir to specify the path to a director
311. turns This implementation of mbtowc returns 0 if s is NULL it returns 1 otherwise reporting the length of the character sequence used qsort sort an array Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt void qsort void base size_t nmemb size_t size int compar const void e oxoimcic woalel jz Description qsort sorts an array beginning at base of nmemb objects size describes the size of each element of the array You must supply a pointer to a comparison function using the argument shown as compar This permits sorting objects of unknown properties Define the comparison function to accept two arguments each a pointer to an element of the array starting at base The result of compar must be negative if the first argument is less than the second zero if the two arguments match and positive if the first argument is greater than the second where less than and greater than refer to whatever arbitrary ordering is appropriate The array is sorted in place that is when qsort returns the array elements beginning at base have been reordered Returns qsort does not return a result rand srand pseudo random numbers Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt ine canc Voro F void srand unsigned int seed int rand_r unsigned int seed Description rand returns a different integer each time it is called each integer is chosen by an algorithm designed to be unpredictable so that you can use rand when you r
312. tween 0 and 127 tolower translate characters to lower case 206 BUSMASTER C Library Functions tolower translate characters to lower case Synopsis include lt ctype h gt sige cCOlower alin ahigie ico lloyyeie aliaie 9 Description tolower is a macro which converts upper case characters to lower case leaving all other characters unchanged It is only defined when c is an integer in the range EOF to 255 You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining this macro using undef tolower _tolower performs the same conversion as tolower but should only be used when c is known to be an uppercase character A Z Returns tolower returns the lower case equivalent of c when it is a character between A and Z and c otherwise _tolower returns the lower case equivalent of c when it is a character between A and Z If c is not one of these characters the behaviour of _tolower is undefined toupper translate characters to upper case Synopsis include lt ctype h gt int toupper int c eT ee OUD Cital aine Description toupper is a macro which converts lower case characters to upper case leaving all other characters unchanged It is only defined when c is an integer in the range EOF to 255 You can use a compiled subroutine instead of the macro definition by undefining this macro using undef toupper _toupper performs the same conversion as toupper but should
313. uations e The assignment suppressing character appears after the in the format specification the current input field is scanned but not stored e width characters have been read width is a width specification a positive decimal integer e The next character read cannot be converted under the the current format for example if a Z is read when the format is decimal e The next character in the input field does not appear in the search set or does appear in the inverted search set When scanf stops scanning the current input field for one of these reasons the next character is considered unread and used as the first character of the following input field or the first character in a subsequent read operation on the input scanf will terminate under the following circumstances BUSMASTER C Library Functions 221 e The next character in the input field conflicts with a corresponding non whitespace character in the format string e The next character in the input field is EOF e The format string has been exhausted When the format string contains a character sequence that is not part of a format specification the same character sequence must appear in the input scanf will scan but not store the matched characters If a conflict occurs the first conflicting character remains in the input as if it had never been read setbuf specify full buffering for a file or stream Synopsis include lt stdio h gt VOLC STOVE
314. ude lt stdio h gt int remove char filename tne Jenova voi iweSesincd Char ies einen p Description Use remove to dissolve the association between a particular filename the string at filename and the file it represents After calling remove with a particular filename you will no longer be able to open the file by that name In this implementation you may use remove on an open file without error existing file descriptors for the file will continue to access the file s data until the program using them closes the file The alternate function _remove_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns remove returns 0 if it succeeds 1 if it fails rename rename a file Synopsis include lt stdio h gt inet sename Conse Chair ole Conse Onar Sneen F dme serans voici vieene Const nen wole conse Cheis Mew p Description Use rename to establish a new name the string at new for a file now known by the string at old After a successful rename the file is no longer accessible by the string at old If rename fails the file named old is unaffected The conditions for failure depend on the host operating system The alternate function _rename_r is a reentrant version The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Returns The result is either 0 when successful or 1 when the file could not be renamed rewind reinitialize a file or
315. uring logging The replay can be selectively done for transmitted received and all messages More then one logging session with same time stamping can be combined in a single replay session The replay can also be configured in a cyclic manner with different time delay e The message filtering can be done through Software hardware or both Software filter works at application level while hardware filter works at CAN controller level e It supports transmission of message blocks in single shot or periodic mode with time key trigger e Itcan display messages and error frames on CAN bus e User can configure acceptance filter baud rate and warning limit Warning limit is not supported currently by BUSMASTER with USB interface e Message display can be configured in different colours Different colours can be assigned to different message IDs Message display entries and the display update rate can be configured e It provides a message database editor for creating amp editing of messages and its signals 8 BUSMASTER Introduction e The signals of message can be interpreted It can be interpreted in a separate window or on message display window e Signals alone can be monitored separately with time stamping e It provides programming facility through Function editor The event based programming is done using ANSI C language The user can use all windows provided APIs and any third party LIB DLL API files e It supports all bit rates up to 1
316. utes 2 List of published frames Frame Unconditional Event Triggered 1 Sporadic and Diagnostic frames Frame Attributes 2 List of published signals Signals Normal and Diagnostic Signals 1 Signal Attributes 2 List of Codings mapped to the signal Codings 1 Coding Attributes Schedule Table 1 Schedule Table Items 2 Schedule Table attributes populated based on the type of the frame selected BUSMASTER LIN 171 Signal Groups 1 Signal Group properties 2 Signals mapped to the Signal group Node Compositions 1 List of Composite nodes mapped to the Node Configuration Network View Network view displays the Master and Slave nodes Published subscribed frames and signals will be displayed under respective node On Selecting an element in the network view respective element in the element view is selected and elements properties are displayed in the Property view and Additional view Warning Window On Save or Load LDF file warning will be displayed in the Warnings window if exists any with description and action taken is specified if any action is performed to correct the warning Getting Started 1 Creating LDF File Using LDF Editor Currently LDF Editor supports creation of LDF 1 3 2 0 and 2 1 versions Recommended work flow to create a LDF file 1 Create LDF File using File gt New gt LDF lt version gt LDF Editor will create a Master and a Slave node with default parameters 2 Create
317. ve Not Responding Error e Sleep Event Enabling Interpretation The Signal values of LIN Messages can be analysed using Interpretation mode To enable the interpretation the Message window should be in overwrite mode Use LIN gt Message Window gt Overwrite menu to enable the overwrite mode After this use LIN gt Message Window gt Interpret The below figure shows Message window when it BUSMASTER is connected to LIN Network Message Window LIN fo e is Tine _ Message Message Type Tx Rx Chann DLC ID Data Byte s Checksum 10 52 41 2678 0x29 LIN Message Rx 1 4 0x029 88 88 01 83 0x80 Enhanced E 1055234139211 Messagel LIN Message Tx 1 4 0x001 D3 88 00 03 OxDE Enhanced Signall 211 15 875000 y Signal2 8 8 000000 e Signal3 8 8 000000 vw Signal4 o 0 000000 ar Signals 3 3 000000 si Signal o 0 900000 as Signal o 0 900000 10 52 41 3169 Error Slave Not Responding i 0x012 10 52 40 3263 OxF LIN Message Rx 1 2 Ox00F FO FF 0x3F Enhanced 10 52 41 2896 OxFF Error Unknown 1 10 52 41 2939 Message5 Error Slave Not Responding 1 0x005 10 52 40 1340 Event Wake up 1 10 52 40 1469 Error Slave Not Responding 0x018 10 52 41 2340 Error Slave Not Responding 1 0x026 The Following section will explain the Columns Displayed in Message window with explanation Table 2 Column Explanation Time This Will display the time at which message is received Se
318. ve frames 9 Block Size Maximum number of consecutive frames that a sender can send before waiting for the flow control 10 Flow Control Length BUSMASTER CAN 123 Length of the flow control to be transmitted 11 P2 Time Out Indicates the time that the tool should wait for the ECU to respond 12 P2 Extended Indicates the time to wait after the Negative response received 13 S3 Client Indicates the time delay between tester present messages to be transmitted Diagnostics Main Window Introduction Diagnostics Main Window is used to transmit diagnostics requests and to monitor the diagnostics responses received from the ECU Configuration To configure diagnostic requests for transmission or to monitor diagnostic response use CAN gt Diagnostics gt Main Window menu This will display the Window as shown below Main Diagnostic Window Request l Source Address Target Address Send Tester Present ox w a E so DLC coc Data Bytes Hex 3 22 F106 4 p a Response Response Description Positive Response Response Data hex YYYY YY Y VV VV VV Vv Displayed Fields 1 Source Address To specify the Source Address if the interface is selected as 29 bit interface 124 BUSMASTER CAN If the interface is selected as 11 bit interface the source address will be taken from CAN ID Request to ECU field in the Settings window 2 Target Address To specify the Target address if the interface
319. w 20 BUSMASTER CAN CNFI Register CNF1 7 GNET CNFIS CNF1 4 CNF1 2 CNF1 1 CNF1 0 SJvv1 SJV0 BRPS BRP 4 BRP3 BRP2 BRP1 BRPO CNF2 Register CNF2 1 CNF2 0 SAM TSEG1 2 TSEG14 TSEG1 0 CNF3 Register CNF3 6 2 CNF3 0 WAKEFIL TSEG2 2 TSEG2 1 TSEG2 0 SAM Sampling 0 or 1 1 or 3 SJW 2 x SJW1 SJW0 1 BRP 32 x BRP5 16 x BRP4 8 x BRP3 4 x BRP2 2 x BRP1 BRPO 1 TSEGI 4 x TSEG1 2 2 x TSEG1 1 TSEG1 0 1 TSEG2 4 x TSEG2 2 2 x TSEG2 1 TSEG2 0 1 FLAG 0 or TSEG2 Ignored or TSEG2 Considered App Filter User can configure filter list by choosing messages to be filtered To configure the filter list follow the steps given below e Select CAN gt Filter Configuration e The dialog box specified below will be displayed BUSMASTER CAN 21 Configure Filter List es _X Filter List Filter Details Stop 100 Node4_A Standard Non ATA Pass rat 2 Standard Non ATA Stop 3 Standard Non ATR i Error Frame N Named Filter List Finer Message Delete All m Filter Attributes l Direction an i0 OO NodeA_A Channel All hd C From Ox 3 to Ox fio uo sid Event Eror Frame Fane Non RTR oF J Event S Delete Add ID Properties OK Cancel r Message Event Filter List It is a list of filters that are identified by the name The name of the filter should be unique and can have
320. ween tim2 and tim as a double gmtime convert time to UTC traditional form Synopsis include lt time h gt struct tm gmtime const time_t clock grruet cm Cie ime Conse Time ic CLOCK SiciwwCie em wes Pp Description gmtime assumes the time at clock represents a local time gmtime converts it to UTC Universal Coordinated Time also known in some countries as GMT Greenwich Mean time then converts the representation from the arithmetic representation to the traditional representation defined by struct tm gmtime constructs the traditional time representation in static storage each call to gmtime or localtime will overwrite the information generated by previous calls to either function Returns A pointer to the traditional time representation struct tm BUSMASTER C Library Functions 235 localtime convert time to local representation Synopsis include lt time h gt Sieuew wat lhoeeulic shia came e loelk y Sriemerr cm lhoe elicsime reine ic Scleck Since wim res Description localtime converts the time at clock into local time then converts its representation from the arithmetic representation to the traditional representation defined by struct tm localtime constructs the traditional time representation in static storage each call to gmtime or localtime will overwrite the information generated by previous calls to either function mktime is the inverse of localti
321. will be displayed with associated text amp color Editing a message attribute To edit the message attributes please follow the steps given below Select LIN gt Message Window gt Configure Dialog box Configure Message Display will be displayed Select the message entry to be edited from the message list Either click on Edit button or double click on the selected entry One more dialog box Edit Message Attributes will pop up An BB WwN Change the required Message attributes 7 Select OK buttons to confirm Subsequent reception transmission of the message that has been configured will be displayed with associated text amp color Deleting message display attribute To delete an entry from the Message List follow the steps given below Select LIN gt Message Window gt Configure A dialog box will pop up Select the message entry to be deleted from the message entry list Click on Remove button A delete confirmation message box will be displayed Select Yes to confirm deletion na bh WN Select OK button to confirm the modification of entries On subsequent reception transmission the message will be displayed in black color Display Buffer size amp Update Rate configuration To configure Append and overwrite buffer size follow the steps given below 1 Select LIN gt Message Window gt Configure 2 A dialog box will pop up Select the Buffer page 154 BUSMASTER LIN
322. y for temporary files and you can use the argument pfx to specify a prefix for the base filename BUSMASTER C Library Functions 223 If dir is NULL tempnam will attempt to use the value of environment variable TMPDIR instead if there is no such value tempnam uses the value of P_tmpdir defined in stdio h If you don t need any particular prefix to the basename of temporary files you can pass NULL as the pfx argument to tempnam _tmpnam_r and _tempnam_tr are reentrant versions of tmpnam and tempnam respectively The extra argument reent is a pointer to a reentrancy structure Warnings The generated filenames are suitable for temporary files but do not in themselves make files temporary Files with these names must still be explicitly removed when you no longer want them If you supply your own data area s for tmpnam you must ensure that it has room for at least L_tmpnam elements of type char Returns Both tmpnam and tempnam return a pointer to the newly generated filename vprintf vfprintf vsprintf format argument list Synopsis ilinculuele lt gieClile lax include lt stdarg h gt dine Woe Cornge Cies rme Wwer_llagic List g diae WAE ETLIMNGIE PLE si CONST Chex inte va dise Ja sic Pp dine WwSjoslincie eheann wariy Comedic Claese inmc va liaw List aime Noses ie ie VOL iSSMc Comar Caere imc ya ligt List IME _ AWC OISILIMG IE Ae Vol wSSinc WILL Siop Const Caed ime Va lise bi
323. y then the transmission will start when the corresponding key is pressed Now the messages to be transmitted have been configured and it s ready to be transmitted e Select the Connect menu from the CAN menu option This initializes the CAN controller e To initiate the transmission of the messages go to the menu CAN gt Transmit gt Enable BUSMASTER Getting Started 13 A cross mark on the message icon in the Tx Message list indicates that the message is not available in the database If the installation is proper and working then you should be able to see the configured messages being transmitted and receive simultaneously in the Message display window as shown in below File CAN 1939 View Window Help el S walls a OP E KT Tait pe Taf R e TEE Data Byte s 17 13 07 7859 ACQ NEV N 1 000 17 13 07 7849 ACO NEW N 000 17 13 07 8859 Tx 1 fii4 ROD_CMM 000 000 000 000 17 13 07 8849 5 0114 ROD_CMM 000 0090 000 000 17 13 07 9859 1266 Dat3_BSI poo 17 13 07 9849 1266 Dat3_BSI 17 13 08 0859 Enable Disable interpret CFD_BSI 17 13 08 0849 z 17 13 08 1859 17 13 08 1849 17 13 08 2859 17 13 08 2849 17 13 08 3859 17 13 08 3849 1266 17 13 08 4859 0168 CFD_BSI 17 13 08 4849 0168 CFD_BSI 17 13 08 5859 1375 ACQ NEV 17 13 08 5849 1375 ACQ NEV 17 13 08 6859 0114 ROD_CHM 17 13 08 6849 0114 ROD_CMM 17 13 08 7859 1266 Dat3_BSI 17 13 08 7849 1266 Dat3_BSI 17 13 08 8859 0168 CFD_BSI 17 13 08 8849 0168 CFD_BSI
324. yed in the Pane 2 Right click in the signal details list in Pane 2 A pop up menu will be displayed Select New Signal menu option A signal details dialog box will be displayed SON ee a Key in the signal details and click on OK button The new signal and its attributes are displayed in the signal details list Selecting New Signal button will do the same Edit signal attributes User can edit the attribute of a signal define earlier please follow the steps below to do so 1 Click the message name for which you want to edit the signal attributes from the Pane 1 The details will be displayed in the Pane 2 Select the signal in the signal details list in Pane 2 Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit Signal menu option A signal details dialog box will be displayed An Pe amp bP Key in the signal details and click on OK button The changes are displayed in the signal details list for the selected signal Selecting the signal details from the list and clicking on Edit Signal button will do the same Deleting a signal User can edit the attribute of a signal define earlier please follow the steps below to do so Click the message name for which you want to delete the signal from the Pane 1 The details will be displayed in the Pane 2 Select the signal in the signal details list in Pane 2 Right click A pop up menu will be displayed Select Delete menu option A delete confirmation message will be

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Integral IN3T2GNYNGX memory module  König HAV-TR11  目 次  Minitech 25 EXT Minitech 35 EXT  『超熱血高校くにおくん ドッジボール部』 基本操作に関するお知らせ  6月 - アイエイアイ  LED Heart Rate Watch  DF010D - Makita  J-333SX 取扱説明書 このたびはレーシングビーチスタンドシングルをお  103898  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file